Spxflow PDF

OPERATION MANUAL
NOVADOS Metering pump
SALES ORDER NO.: 2838758.10
SERIAL NO.: 12001224 ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS
TYPE: NOVADOS H2
CUSTOMER ORDER NO.: IMP/PU/1819/D419006/129 READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS MANUAL, PRIOR TO
CUSTOMER: SPX Flow Techology (India)Pvt.Ltd INSTALLATION, OPERATING OR SERVICING
DATE: 13.06.2019
REVISION: 0
TAG NO.: P3205
NOVADOS
Metering pump
OPERATION MANUAL
SPX Flow Technology Germany GmbH has a tightlyknit, global network of service centres and partners. For
more details, just contact us and we will discuss how we can help you to optimise your processes!
Commissioning
Training Repair
Spare parts Maintenance/Maintenance
agreements
Support Service Upgrades
Diagnostics
SPX Flow Technology Germany GmbH
Werkstraße 4
D22844 Norderstedt
Tel.: +49 40 522 02 0 BRAN+LUEBBE
Fax: +49 40 522 02 444
Email: branluebbe@spxflow.com
Customer service
Technical Hotline +49 40 52 20 2 405
BL.service@spxflow.com
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not rep
resent a commitment on the part of SPX Flow Technology Germany GmbH. Spare parts
National +49 40 52 20 2 335
No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without the prior written permission of SPX
International +49 40 52 20 2 477
Flow Technology Germany GmbH. Mail BL.parts@spxflow.com
Other +49 40 52 20 2 222
Edition 01/2018
COPYRIGHT ©2018 SPX FLOW, Inc. Fax +49 40 52 20 2 447
Table of contents
1 General remarks
1.0 Structure, Assignment, Marking, Ordering of Spare Parts
1.1 Safety instructions
1.1.1 Safety instructions in Ex areas
1.2 Technical data
1.2.1 Data sheet
1.2.2 Dimension sheet
2 Pump type
2.1 NOVADOS
3 Components
3.1.12 Gearbox H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, G3H, G4H
3.2.20 Pneumatic stroke length adjustment (H2...H6, C, KH, DH, DSH)
3.3.3 Diaphragm pump head (PTFE – diaphragm)
3.4.13 Plunger seal: diaphragm pump head
3.5.14 Plunger restraint (H2, J, K, KA)
3.6 Valves
4 Installation
4.1.1 Installation of machines
4.2 Suction and pressure piping
4.3.1 Examples of suction and pressure piping designs
5 Operation
5.1.19 Lubricant and lubricant change (H2...H6, G3H, G4H)
5.2.4 Gear oil for H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, G3H, G4H
5.2.10 Lubricant table
5.3.1 Startup procedure NOVADOS
5.4.1 Adjusting the capacity
6 Maintenance, Inspection, Cleaning
6.1 Maintenance, Inspection, Cleaning
6.2 Technical information
7 Troubleshooting
8 Transport, Storage, Preservation
8.1 NOVADOS
9 Drawings and parts lists
Dimension sheet
Drawings
Parts Lists
Parts Lists (Service Set)
Parts Lists (Accessories)
10 Motor / Accessories
10.1 Motor
10.3 Pressure Transmitter EJA (YOKOGAWA)
10.3 Coupling (BoWex) ATEX
10.3 Pump
CE declarations / Manufacturer declarations
CE declaration (SPX)
CE declaration motor
CE declaration pressure transmitter (YOKOGAWA)
CE declaration coupling (BoWex)
1 General remarks
1.0 Structure, Assignment, Marking, Ordering of Spare

Parts
Structure of the user manual
Just like the metering or rather process pump, this user manual has a modular structure. Thus
each manual only contains information on the pump supplied. For this reason, the pages and
sections are not numbered in sequence throughout the whole document.
Finding the required information has been simplified by dividing the user manual into the
following sections:
1. General remarks
2. Pump type
3. Components
4. Installation
5. Operation
6. Maintenance, Inspection, Cleaning
7. Troubleshooting
8. Transport, Storage, Preservation
9. Drawings and Parts Lists
10. Motor / Accessories (if they exist)
In some sections of 3 "Components", 4 “Installation” and 5 “Operation” a sequential numbering

of sections may not always be adhered to.
It is thus possible that point 3.3 "Pump Head" only contains section 3.3.3 "PTFE series", since
the other series treated in sections 3.3.* are not relevant for your specific metering or process
pump.
The page numbering in the footer is only carried out in sequence throughout a coherent
section.
The pages are numbered according to the example "Page 2/11" (Page 2 of a total of 11 pages
of the coherent section). In this way, the length of such a section can be determined.
The numbering of figures and the cross-references to figures and pages are only valid within a
coherent section.
The right header indicates the section in which the reader actually is at the moment,
e.g. “1 General remarks – 1.1 Safety Instructions”.
The item numbers used in the user manual in sections 1-8 are not identical
with the item numbers referred to in the parts lists and associated drawings
in Section 9!
18.01.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 1/2

1 General remarks
Assignment of the user manual
The metering or process pump type and serial number are referred to on the cover,
in the data sheet (section 1.2.1) and on the nameplate of the metering or process pump.
Marking
The marking on the pump refers only to the pump part.

The coupling and motor must be examined separately.
There must be a manufacturer declaration for the coupling.
The drive is subject to its own examination.
Ordering of spare parts
Only the use of original BRAN+LUEBBE spare parts will ensure trouble-free operation and
long service life of BRAN+LUEBBE products.
To ensure that parts can be delivered promptly and reliably, it is essential that the spare parts
department is provided with the following information:
• Serial No. (see cover, data sheet in section 1.2.1 or nameplate of the pump)
• Name of parts (see drawings and parts lists in Section 9)
• Parts Id. No. (see drawings and parts lists in Section 9)
18.01.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 2/2

1 General remarks
Introduction
The metering and process pump complies with the requirements of the machinery directive
2006/42/EC.
The pump has been subjected to a safety test and acceptance inspection.
In case of incorrect operation or misuse there is a risk of danger to
• life and limb of the operator,

• the pump and other material assets of the owner-operator,
• and the efficient operation of the pump.
All persons involved in setting up, putting into service, operating, inspecting, servicing and
repairing the pump must be appropriately qualified and observe this user manual exactly!
Your safety is at stake!
Symbols used
The following symbols are used in this user manual:
DANGER!
Designates an imminent danger. In case of non-observance of this
information, there is a risk of death or severe injuries.
WARNING!
Designates a possibly dangerous situation. In case of non-observance of
this information, death or severe injuries can occur.
CAUTION!
this information, severe injuries can occur.
ATTENTION!
this information, minor injuries can occur.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 1/8

1 General remarks
Designates an imminent danger. In case of non-observance of this

information, there is a risk of death or severe injuries.
Designates both general hazards and hazards in an Ex area.
Designates important user tips and other useful information.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 2/8

1 General remarks
Intended usage
The metering or process pump is an oscillating positive displacement pump. It serves the
purpose of conveying, dosing, compressing or mixing and/or filling of liquids and suspensions.
Do not use this pump as
• a generator, i.e. pressurised liquid is not allowed to drive the motor
• a device for cooling liquids
• a pulsator without a pressure valve
• a compressor for gases
• a machine for producing and filling foodstuffs and beverages if the pump is not indicated
as being expressly intended for this purpose by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH.
The pump and this user manual are intended exclusively for commercial use.
Adhere to the operating data and limit values specified in the data sheet (Section 1.2).
WARNING!
Severe skin injuries can result from dangerous (e.g. aggressive, toxic,
caustic) media!
Unsuitable media can damage the pump and escape into the surrounding
area.
If you intend to use dangerous media, the materials used for the pump parts
must have been designed for this kind of use.
Consult with SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH!
Unauthorised modifications to the pump are prohibited for safety reasons!
Any form of liability on the part of the manufacturer/supplier shall be excluded for damage
resulting from unauthorised modifications.
If you intend to carry out any modifications to the pump, please note that each modification
must be approved in writing by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH.
When replacing defective parts, only use original spare parts or standard parts approved by
the manufacturer.
DANGER!
When using the pump in areas where there is a risk of explosion, pay
particular attention to the sections marked .
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 3/8

1 General remarks
Emissions
The sound emission of metering pumps is not

determined exclusively by the constructional Gearbox type L (A)1 dB
design. It also depends on many different H1 60
operation-related parameters, such as the type J, K, KH, H2 65
and size of the pulsation dampers being used,
C, D, DH, H3, H4,
customer-specific piping, type of installation, 2 2 70
ProCam G12, G3 , D3
ambient temperature, and the physical 2
ProCam G4 72
properties of the product.
2
ProCam D4 73
The determination of the exact A-rated,
CS, DS, DSH, H5 75
equivalent continuous sound pressure level as a
2
series-related limit value is therefore only ProCam G2 77
possible to a limited extent. B 80
H6 89
Tables 1.1 and 1.2 give approximate values,
Table 1.1: Continuous sound pressure level
measured:
Metering Pumps-single machines
• at full capacity utilisation of the machines,
Drive unit type L (A) dB
• under normal operating conditions,
NOVAPLEX 020 90
• at room temperature,
NOVAPLEX 040 95
• with water as the product.
NOVAPLEX 160 100
The sound measurement was carried out in
Table 1.2: Continuous sound pressure level
accordance with DIN 45635 Part 1.
Process pump as Triplex
The actual max. sound pressure level must be
determined on site by the owner-operator.
The owner-operator is responsible for proper observance of the local, legal safety regulations
for noise.
Please note the following information if the determined sound pressure level exceeds
80 dB(A):
CAUTION!
Auditory damage due to noise.
Noise can result in loss of hearing or in other physiological impairments
(e.g. loss of equilibrium, inattentiveness).
Wear ear protection!
1 L (A) = max. sound pressure level at 1 m distance

2 The highest sound pressure level is produced by the drive (motor with variable speed controller).
For noise levels of drives see the manufacturers documentation (section 10)
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 4/8

1 General remarks
Sources of danger
The Bran+Luebbe metering and process pumps comply with all mandatory legal safety
requirements.
The dangers originating from the pumps have been reduced to a minimum by means of
suitable construction and design measures. However, residual risks (explosive atmospheres
and electrical, mechanical, thermal or biological hazards) cannot be excluded entirely during
transport, installation, maintenance and repair work or regular operation.
IMPORTANT!
Please note the warning and safety information included in the following
sections in order to prevent personal and material damage:
2 “Pump type”
3 “Components”
4 “Installation”
5 “Operation”
6 "Maintenance, Inspection, Cleaning"
8 "Transport, Intermediate Storage, Preservation"
Pumps must never be allowed to work against a closed fitting!
Install a safety valve in the pressure line before the fitting.
Workplaces
The workplaces of the operating personnel during production operations cannot be accurately
defined.
In the case of operating, maintenance and repair tasks, the area next to the pump and the
pump itself must be considered as being a workplace.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 5/8

1 General remarks
Authorised Operators
Only persons who have been authorised and trained by the owner-operator are allowed to
work on the pump. The minimum age for operators is 16.
The operator is responsible for third parties in the working area.
The responsibilities for the various activities performed on the pump must be clearly defined
and observed. Unclear competences are a safety risk.
The owner-operator must make the user manual available to the operator and ensure that the
operator has read and understood it.
IMPORTANT!
Maintenance, upkeep and electrical tasks should only be performed by
technically competent, trained and/or qualified personnel.
Technically competent, trained and qualified personnel are defined as those persons that have
sufficient knowledge in a specific field based on their specialised training and experience and
are familiar with the appropriate relevant work safety and accident prevention regulations and
the generally acknowledged technical regulations.
Personal Protective Equipment
CAUTION!
Oils, lubricants and cleaning agents can cause skin rashes and other
damage to health.
Hot surfaces, sprayed-out hydraulic oil and/or caustic media can cause
severe burns or acid burns.
Wear protective equipment especially when you are
performing any maintenance, inspection and cleaning
tasks!
Avoid skin contact.
Wash your hands thoroughly each time after coming
into contact with these substances.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 6/8

1 General remarks
Safety Measures at the Installation Location
Place the pump on a level, stress-free foundation or frame.
Secure piping adequately by means of supports or retaining clamps. Clean the piping.
Use appropriate internal company instructions and checks to ensure that the area surrounding
the workplace is clean and tidy at all times.
CAUTION!
Risk of burning due to hot surfaces.
The pump controls can become very hot when installed in areas with
ambient temperatures >40 °C.
Wear protective clothing when operating the pump.
Protective devices
Protective devices
• are installed for the safety of operating personnel,
• must not be modified, removed or bypassed by means of any modifications on the pump
under any circumstances.
The EMERGENCY-OFF switches on the pump can be used to shut down the pump
immediately in the case of an emergency or malfunction.
EMERGENCY-OFF switches are not included in the

SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH scope of supply! The owner-
operator must provide EMERGENCY-OFF switches and install them at
suitable places.
The EMERGENCY-OFF switches should be readily accessible and clearly visible.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 7/8

1 General remarks
Behaviour in case of emergency
An emergency exists whenever human life is endangered and/or other general risks exist. The
source of danger can be the pump itself or may have some other origin.
• Stay calm!
• Warn other personnel in the case of any danger - even when the danger is only presumed.
• In case of fires, use only suitable fire-extinguishing agents.
• In the case of an emergency or malfunction, the pump must be switched off immediately.
• Rectify the fault.
• The pump must not be put into operation again until the malfunction has been corrected,
and there are no personnel and/or objects in the immediate area of the pump.
17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 8/8

1 General remarks
1.1.1 Information sheet for the safe operation of metering and

process pumps in the NOVADOS, ProCam and NOVAPLEX
series in areas at risk of explosion
Table of contents
1. General remarks .................................................................................................. 2
2. Minimizing risks due to hot surfaces or sparks forming on

machine parts ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Installation and Start-up ................................................................................ 3
2.2 Intended operation ........................................................................................ 4
3. Minimizing risks due to electrostatic charging/spark and brushing

discharge ............................................................................................................. 7
4. Minimizing risks during and caused by servicing, repairs,

rebuilding or fitting of accessories ................................................................... 8
5. Operation in areas in which the presence of a cloud of

combustible dust is unlikely, but if it does occur will only
persist for a short period (Zone 22)................................................................... 9
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 1/9

1 General remarks
1. General remarks
Non-electrical risks originating from BRAN+LUEBBE metering and process pumps in areas at
risk of explosion, are minimized significantly by constructive design and arranging components
in accordance with the rules recognized for state-of-the-art technology and observing
harmonized standards.
Mechanical machine components are subject to unavoidable wear owing to movement and
friction processes dictated by physics and thus have only a finite lifetime.
Consequently, the following principles are a fundamental tenet for safe operation:
Operate metering and process pumps only within the permitted limits (see
data sheet/nameplate).
Avoid inadmissible operating practices or improper use!
Comply with the specified inspection intervals for your own safety as well
as to ensure fulfilment of the obligation of due care with respect to the
operator of the machine!
If you find it difficult or impossible (e.g. special manufacturing processes or inaccessible

production units) to comply with inspection intervals or the measures (e.g. machine shutdown)
required for this, talk to SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH about suitable measures to
guarantee the safety of your machines.
Requirements:
The machines are unchanged from their state when delivered by BRAN+LUEBBE.
• Any changes have been approved by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH in writing.
• The owner-operator accepts responsibility for all other changes.
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 2/9

1 General remarks
2. Minimizing risks due to hot surfaces or sparks forming on

machine parts
2.1 Installation and Start-up
• A reciprocating positive displacement pump must User manual

never be allowed to work against a closed fitting! Section 5.3
• Install a safety valve in the pressure line in the User manual

direction of flow upstream of a shutoff device. Sections 3.3 and
4.3
This is particularly applicable to the use of plunger pumps!
Adiabatic compression, shock waves and flowing gases can cause temperature
increases!
• Ensure there is adequate ventilation of the pump User manual

head and piping when starting up! Section 5.3
• Avoid air and gas bubbles forming in the pumping User manual
space and piping on start-up and during operation! Section 5.3
Read the detailed instructions for installation and start-up in Chapters 4

and 5 and follow the respective safety instructions!
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 3/9

1 General remarks
2.2 Intended operation
Weekly inspections/checks
• Oil level User manual

1. Gear oil Section 5.1 Section
2. Hydraulic oil (diaphragm pumps) 5.3
• Oil temperature User manual

1. Gearbox oil temperature or surface temperature of Section 5.1 Section
the gearbox housing1 3.3
2. Hydraulic oil temperature or surface temperature of
1
the oil tank (diaphragm pumps)
• Surface temperature (plunger pumps) User manual

Surface temperature of the pump head housing adjacent Section 3.3 Section
to the plunger packing. 4.3
(if there is a closed loop flushing system, the temperature
of the flushing medium)
• Diaphragm monitoring User manual

Section 3.3
• Leakage check User manual

1. Flange joints of suction and pressure valve Section 6
2. Flange joints of the pipe connections
• Plunger packing leakage in plunger pumps User manual

1. Ensure minimum leakage for adequate lubrication Section 3.3 Section
2. Avoid unacceptable leakage(depends on the 3.4
flammability of the gas and air mixture generated and
the ambient conditions)
3. Divert leaks (especially combustible fluids), e. g. in
closed tanks.
Monthly inspections/checks
• Cross-head seal User manual

(only H2 – H6 series) Section 3.1
• Bellows User manual

(NOVAPLEX and other models, if used) Section 3.1
1 If the surface temperature is read as an alternative to direct measurement of the oil temperature, the
measuring point must be below the oil fill level.
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 4/9

1 General remarks
Quarterly inspections/checks (every 3 months)
• Plunger restraint User manual

Section 3.5
Special inspections/checks
• Roller bearings User manual

Section 3.1
Check the roller bearings regularly using recognized test
methods
(e. g. structural sound measurement with appropriate
signal analysis and signal evaluation  see VDI 3832).
Monitoring intervals
In general, it is impossible to prescribe the interval to be
chosen between two diagnostic measurements. It
depends on:
 the operating conditions of the bearing
 the advance warning needed (which again should
consider the difficulty of tracking damage to a
bearing which has not yet been detected).
Intervals of a few weeks are usually acceptable in the
case of intermittent monitoring (offline systems).
However, the maximum degree of safety will only be
achieved by continuous monitoring with installed sensors
(online systems).
If diagnostic monitoring methods are used in online or
offline procedures, roller bearings can be replaced in
dependence on their condition on reaching defined signal
thresholds.
If a diagnostic check of the roller bearings is
impractical, alternative measures must be taken for
effective avoidance of unacceptable temperature
rises or sparks forming, e.g. by using temperature
and/or oil level sensors.
In this case, roller bearings should be renewed as a
preventive measure on reaching their nominal calculated
life (dependent on the gearbox or bearing model)!
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 5/9

1 General remarks
Special inspections/checks
• Coupling between motor and gearbox/drive unit User manual

Section 3.1
You must observe any instructions in the coupling
manufacturer's user manual!
Check for wear as instructed by the manufacturer!
Replace the coupling or any worn-out components if
these have reached the wear limits defined by the
manufacturer.
• Coupling(s) between gearboxes in multi-purpose User manual

machines Section 3.1
At the latest, check for wear as instructed by the

manufacturer at the 25.000 hours run point!
Replace the coupling or any worn-out components if
these have reached the wear limits defined by the
manufacturer.
You must read the detailed instructions for inspection and maintenance
work in Sections 3 and 5 and follow the respective safety instructions!
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 6/9

1 General remarks
3. Minimizing risks due to electrostatic charging/spark and

brushing discharge
• When installing the pump, ensure it is earthed in User manual

accordance with regulations! Section 4.1
• In Zone 1, do not fit any plastic notices which are User manual
larger than: Section 4.1
max. 100cm2 (explosion group IIA/IIB) max. 20cm2

(explosion group IIC)
• Clean surfaces with a damp cloth only! User manual

Section 6
• Check that the earth connection is firmly seated

every three months.
• You must renew the machine washers which are

marked in the installation drawings as guaranteeing
equipotential on reassembly after maintenance or
repairs.
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 7/9

1 General remarks
4. Minimizing risks during and caused by servicing, repairs,

rebuilding or fitting of accessories
• Observe maintenance instructions and follow the User manual

respective safety instructions. Section 1
Section 6
• Servicing, repairs and maintenance work must be

carried out in an explosion-free atmosphere if
possible!
• Use only approved tools in an explosive area!
• Use only original BRAN+LUEBBE spare parts!
• When you reassemble suction and pressure valves, User manual

ensure they are facing in the right direction (check Section 3.6
the arrow), especially in plunger pumps!
• If pumps are rebuilt without approval in writing from User manual

SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH, no claims Section 1
under warranty will be entertained!
• Pump fittings and accessories (e.g. drive and User manual

technical measurement monitoring systems) must Section 6
have an explosion protection designation that is at
least equal to the pump itself.
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 8/9

1 General remarks
5. Operation in areas in which the presence of a cloud of

combustible dust is unlikely, but if it does occur will only
persist for a short period (Zone 22)
ATTENTION!
Zone 22 is applicable only for non-conductive dusts! The contact
resistance must be equal to or greater than 1000 Ω∗m, or the specific
conductivity equal to or lower than 0.001 S/m (1/Ω∗m).
The minimum ignition (smoulder) temperature of a settled layer of dust
(5mm) must be equal to or greater than 200°C2
All afore-mentioned safety measures are applicable on principle to operation of a metering or

process pump in a Zone 22 hazardous area.
Additional measures:
• Prevent layers of dust building up on the surfaces of User manual

the pump! Section 6
• Remove all layers of dust immediately as soon as

they reach a thickness of 5mm!
• Only use methods of cleaning that avoid any

unnecessary dispersal of the layer of dust!
The user-owner is himself responsible for compliance with these measures and for laying
down regulations for suitable cleaning intervals and cleaning methods in accordance with the
German Health and Safety at work regulations (Betr.Sich.V) (or rather Directive 1999/92/EG).
The regulations agreed upon or internal company regulations should be recorded in the
respective explosion protection document.
2 Please note that the ignition (smoulder) temperature of a settled layer of dust is always significantly lower than the
ignition temperature of a cloud of dust!
Do not confuse the ignition (smoulder) temperature of a settled layer of dust with the auto ignition temperature of a
dust bed!
30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 9/9

1 General remarks
1.2 Technical data
1.2 Technical data
Data sheet and dimensional drawing / component for the ordered machine can be found on
the following pages.
17.07.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 1/1

Page 1 of 3
Date: 13.06.2019
Revision : 0
Sales Order No: 2838758 Sales Order Item: 000010 PUMP DATA SHEET
Sales Order Data
1 Sales Order No 2838758
2 Sales Order Item 000010
3 Customer Order No. / Date IMP/PU/18-19/D419006/129 / 06.03.2019
4 Serial Number 12001224
5 General Drawing Number GA283875810
6 Tag / Item no. P-3205
General Data / Site Conditions

7 Pump designation NOVADOS H2
8 Ambient Temperature min. 7.9 °C
9 Ambient Temperature max. 38.9 °C
10 Classification of haz. area HAZARDOUS
11 Hazardous class. (Machine) II3G C IIC T3
12 Quantity 1
13 Flowrate, max. required 56 L/H
14 Environmental Condition OUTDOORS
15 Environmental Condition Add N/A
Motor
16 Output 0.37 KW
17 Current / Voltage / Frequency 3 PH / 240/415 V / 50 HZ
18 Speed 1380 1/MIN
19 Variable speed (Range) N/A
20 Hazardous class. (Motor) EX EC IIC T3
21 International protection code IP55
22 Mounting Type B5
23 Frame Size 71
24 Flange OD 160 MM
25 Mounting Side on Gear A
26 Type 1MB1531-0CB32-3FA4-Z
27 Supplier SIEMENS
Surface Paint System

28 Gear 5 (IND STD SPECIAL COLOR)
29 Pumphead N/A
30 Motor MOTOR SUPPLIER STANDARD
31 Base Frame N/A
Surface Paint Top Color

32 Gear RAL 5010 - GENTIAN BLUE
33 Pumphead N/A
34 Motor RAL 5010 - GENTIAN BLUE
35 Base Frame N/A
Miscellaneous
36 Remark 1 CORROSIVE DUE TO PRESENCE OF
37 Remark 2 H2S(150PPM WT)/NH3(400PPM WT)/
38 Remark 3 CO2(3600PPM WT) IN LIQUID
39 Weight ~ 115 kg
Page 2 of 3
Date: 13.06.2019
Revision : 0
Stream Data -00
1 Fluid Name HYDROCARBON (SLOP OIL)
2 Concentration UNKNOWN
3 Flowrate, max. required 56 L/H
4 Flowrate, rated to API 67.2 L/H
5 Discharge pressure (max.) 11.1 BARG
6 Suction pressure 0.406 BARG
7 Ext. Safety Valve; set press. 42.4 BARG
8 Operating temperature (OT) min 8 °C
9 Operat. Temperature (OT) max. 45 °C
10 Density (at OT) 0.8 G/CM³
11 Viscosity (at OT) 0.8 (MIN) - 1.1 (MAX) CP
12 Compressibility 43 10EXP-6*1/BAR
13 Vapour pressure 0.3 (MIN) - 0.9 (MAX) BARA
14 NPSH availablity (System) 3.1 M
15 Fluid type CLEAN
Pump Head
16 Design DP2 - DOUBLE DIAPHRAGM
17 Pump head drawing no. HD2-0-08
18 Plunger Diameter 25 MM
19 Flow rate (at Veff) 71 L/H
20 Volum. efficiency rate (Veff) 94.5 %
21 Stroke Frequency 85 1/MIN
22 Pump head relief valve set 47 BARG
23 Hydrostatic Test Pressure 65 BARG
24 NPSH required (Pump) 2.5 M LC
25 Diaphragm monitoring device PT - 1/2 NPT / 4-20MA / HART
26 Lantern ring N/A
27 Heating jacket N/A
28 Air Bleed Valve N/A
29 Remark N/A
Pumphead Valves
30 Suction valve - type DOUBLE BALL
31 - Spring pressure N/A
32 Discharge valve - type DOUBLE BALL
33 - Spring pressure N/A
Pumphead Connectors
34 Suction - type FLANGE
35 - Standard ANSI B16.5
36 - Size / Rating 1/2 IN / 300 LBS
37 - Facing RF
38 - Orientation STRAIGHT
39 Discharge - type FLANGE
40 - Standard ANSI B16.5
41 - Size / Rating 1/2 IN / 300 LBS
42 - Facing RF
43 - Orientation STRAIGHT
Material for Pumphead

44 Front cover resp. housing 1.4571
45 Diaphragm PTFE
Page 3 of 3
Date: 13.06.2019
Revision : 0
Material for Pumphead
46 Valve Materials 1.4581 / 1.4571 / 1.4401
47 Process Connection 1.4571
48 Plunger 1.4462
49 Plunger Packing Design NBR
50 Valve Gasket FD10
51 Hydraulic Oil Qty. / Type 0.25 L / ISO VG 10
Pump Gear / Power End

52 Type / ratio H2/33/2
53 Max. Stroke Length 30 MM
54 Crank angle [°] 0
55 Stroke Length Adjustment EL.-PNEUMATIC
56 Adjustment -Input signal 4-20MA
57 Adjustment -Output signal 4-20MA
58 Stroke length indication 0-30MM
59 Emergency Manual Override N/A
60 Gear Oil Qty. / Type 2.8 L / ISO VG 100
, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - P r e s s ur e Transmitter
I. Type: EJA530E
2. Connection: 1/2" NPT Mole
3. Output Signal: 4-20mA HART Protocol
4. Output Connection: N20 Femole
Zuluftdruck : 2,5-6bor
rn supply oir pressure : 2,5-6bor
Anschluss/Connection : For pipe ~6 mm 00
Ei ns i qnoI : 014 - 2OmA

I Input signol : 0/4-20mA
r---llllll"'.=~==::::::=ll ~ _
1
~
Anschluss/Connection: M20xl.5
- :
......._.---------.---
I
V'-~ ,1,---. Pumpenkopf ~ 25x30 Hub

~] ,, 9 pumpheod ~ 25x30 sIroke
i
I 1-H ~
~~ ~ ~~~ b ~) Anschl. ANSI 1/2", 3001bs RF
conn. ANSI 1/2", 3001bs RF I: I 0
:r:
~,
::l: ...... . .,. .
I. Ct:l
....~~~J.Jt,JJ I ~~~
... h-tt-IJ//
11•
---.--------- I ? -
.liiiiiri.
~
1-
~
~2: II _ _+
,-·1··--+t---
1.~~ ~~\~,------ ~f---~- ~. L.JJ
~-1--1-r.-U----
~ ® 'I 1-a. n
~--4 - "' ~1--J r [:]
I
---'------__j~____!_--~+l....~~r~7 7~ m ~
V I II .0 T J \
000 / ~ II - c:::::=~~·-_1
.. 80 310 II I. 75
- .. 560 y_,JV
35 z~
50~ ....'I' I
,..
y
Auflogefläche
,...,
c::>
-
I . 0 _c::>
CO
,...,
c::> bose oreo
I - CO
- b Schwerpunkt (COG)
I f.\ Motormi I te center of grovily
I .......
W mo t or cent er I i ne COG X .. 200 mm
Iw ri\ Pumpenkopfmitte COG Y .. 88 mm
41 41 W pump heod center I i ne COG Z .. 188 mm
13 I
I
243 I
I
272
0,0,0
Tag-No.: P-3205
Erdung/eorthing ~
Trockengewicht mit Motor/Dry weight with motor: .. 115 kg

Qlmenge Getriebe/oi I quontity georbox : 2,8 I
Olmenge Pumpenkopf/oi I quantity pumpheod: 0,25 I
PRO[ ·IIODEL PUIIP .H2.2838l~IO
DESIGIED K.Die•er IU3.19
C] @ Projekl ion 150128·30
projeclion 150128·30
>Bran+Luebbe· TITLE I
DOSIERPUMPE/METERING PUMP
Tl TLE 2 NOVADOS H2
DRAll A.IOtOit 19.03.19
CHANGED A.IOtOit OB.U.It IIAT[RIAL IDENT. ·NO. REY. I
APPROVED K.Ditm OB.U.It FORIIAT SCALE SHEET
RELEASED A.IOtOit 08.U.19 A2 I: 5 1/1 DRAIING·NO. GA2 838 7581 0
2 Pump type
2.1 NOVADOS
2.1 NOVADOS
Purpose of the metering pump
The operating conditions and the pump design data available at the time of order are listed in
the data sheet in Section 1.2.1.
If the operating data are not fully specified by the customer, the particulars of pressure,
temperature, solid and viscosity entered in the factory must be maintained as limit values.
CAUTION!
Gearbox damage possible!
Do not use this pump
• as a cooling unit for liquids
• for compressing gases
• as a generator.
Construction of the metering pump
The metering pump is an oscillating

displacement pump.
It consists of a drive (A), the components

gearbox (B), pump head (C) and stroke
length adjustment (D) as well as other
possible attachments (see Fig. 2.1).
The function of the components is described

in Section 3.
The metering pump fulfils

European safety at work
and accident prevention
regulations.
A Drive
B Gearbox
C Pump head
D Stroke Length Adjustment
Fig. 2.1: NOVADOS
18.07.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 1/3

2 Pump type
2.1 NOVADOS
Safety instructions
WARNING!
Burns and other damage to health due to hot, dangerous medium.

Increased wear and tear on the pump head and on the gear unit.
If the permissible counter pressure is exceeded, the pipework can split

and hot or dangerous medium can spray out.
Take the necessary measures to prevent the permissible maximum

counter pressure from being exceeded, e.g. by installing a safety valve.
See Section 4.3.
Before opening pressurised parts (pump head, fittings, piping) be sure to:
• Relieve the pressure in all parts
• Prevent the drives from being switched on
• Thoroughly flush and clean the parts before opening if necessary
• Observe any local safety measures
• Take care when opening bleed valves.
18.07.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 2/3

2 Pump type
2.1 NOVADOS
The maximum permissible operating temperature is dependent on the permissible surface

temperature in the hazardous area (required zone, explosion group and temperature class,
see datasheet, Section 1.2.1) and the suitability of the materials and lubricants used.
When using pumps in areas at risk of explosion, take particular care to

avoid using inadmissible operating practices!
If this regulation is not observed, the defined temperature class will be
exceeded. See datasheet, Section 1.2.1.
Check the surface temperature of the gearbox at the hottest external
point or in the oil every week.
The gearbox must not be used if the oil temperature is higher than 90 °C!
Diaphragm pumps:
Check the hydraulic oil temperature on the diaphragm pump head every
week!
If no specific limit temperature is defined in the data sheet, a diaphragm
pump head must not be operated at hydraulic oil temperatures above the
specified maximum temperature.
See Table 2.1
Plunger pumps:
Check the surface temperature of the pump head weekly at the warmest
outside point.
If no specific limiting temperature is defined in the datasheet, a plunger
pump head must not be operated at a surface temperature of higher than
80 °C.
The maximum permissible temperature for the hydraulic oil of a diaphragm pump head in
failure-free operation is specified in Table 2.1 and the information in the data sheet, Section
1.2.1.
Section 1.2.1 Name Material Maximum

in data sheet temperature
in operation
°C
Housing Metal (e.g. 1.4571, 1.4581) + 80
(pump head cover) Plastic ( PVC, PP) + 40
Table 2.1: Max. permissible hydraulic oil temperature for a diaphragm pump head
18.07.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 3/3

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
3.1.12 Types H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, G3H, G4H
A Drive B Stroke Length Adjustment C Pumphead
Fig 3.1: 3D-dipiction
Construction and Function
The rotary motion of the drive (A) is

transmitted by a coupling to the worm shaft
(1) and reduced to the stroke frequency by
the worm wheel (2).
The rotary movement is converted into an

oscillating motion by means of the
crankshaft (3), the eccentric (4), the
connecting rod (5) and the crosshead (6).
The crosshead (6) is sealed with a sealing
ring (7).
The pump head (C) is mounted on the

1 Worm shaft 6 Crosshead
pump yoke (8). The plunger of the pump
2 Worm wheel 7 Sealing ring
head is driven via the crosshead (6). 3 Crankshaft 8 Pump yoke
4 Eccentric 9 Cover
The drive units can be expanded
5 Connecting rod 10 Guide bushing
horizontally to multiple pumps. In this case
the worm shafts (1) are connected by Fig 3.2: Cross section
couplings.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 1/6

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
Stroke Length Adjustment (B)
See Section 3.2.
Oil Filling
WARNING!
Gearbox/drive unit damage possible due to inadmissible temperature rise
and wear and tear!
The gearbox/drive units are delivered without being filled with oil.
Fill with oil prior to putting into operation (see Section 5.1 and 5.2).
DANGER!
Ignition of explosive gas-air mixtures (dust-air mixtures)
 Death, severe injury/burn

• Check the surface temperature of the drive unit at the hottest
external point or in the oil every week.
• The drive unit must not be used if the oil temperature is
o Gear oil (mineral)  higher than 90 °C
o Gear oil (synthetic)  higher than 100 °C
Check of the cross head seal
CAUTION!
Risk of injury!
Only carry out this work when the machine is not in use.
Prevent accidental starting of the machine!
Check the cross-head seal (7) in normal atmosphere quarterly, but monthly in areas at risk of
explosion (see Section 1.1.1).
To do this the cover (9) must be removed. In the case of wear, gear oil collects on the bottom
of the pump yoke (8).
The life cycle of the sealing ring is at least 8,000 operational hours.
A replacement is recommended after 16,000 operational hours.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 2/6

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
Roller bearings
The roller bearings fitted in your pump have been dimensioned according to internationally
recognized rules and regulations for a nominal working life of 25.000 hours.
Nevertheless, the working life achievable for roller bearings depends to a significant degree on
the actual operating conditions and can therefore be very different in practice.
• Ensure there is adequate lubrication!

• Follow instructions for checking and changing lubricants!
• Only use lubricants recommended by SPX Flow Technology
Norderstedt GmbH!
• Look out for unexpected noises developing, vibrations and
increased oil temperatures. These can be indications of incipient or
advanced damage to bearings!
• SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH recommends renewing
roller bearings after 25.000 operational hours, even if there are no
detectable signs of bearing damage!
Depending on their condition, roller bearings can be replaced by using recognized testing
methods.
For example:
Structural sound measurement with appropriate signal analysis and signal evaluation,
refer to VDI 3832.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 3/6

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
Avoid unacceptable temperature increases or sparks forming as a

result of bearing damage!
Check roller bearings regularly using recognized testing methods (e.g.
structural sound measurement with appropriate signal analysis and
signal evaluation  refer to VDI 3832).
Monitoring interval:
In general, it is impossible to prescribe the time interval to be chosen
between two diagnostic measurements.
It depends on:
• the operating conditions of the bearing,
• the advance warning needed (which again should consider the
difficulty of tracking damage to a bearing which has not yet been
detected).
Intervals of a few weeks are usually acceptable in the case of
intermittent monitoring (offline systems).
However, the maximum degree of safety will only be achieved by
continuous monitoring with installed sensors (online systems).
If diagnostic monitoring methods are used in online or offline
procedures, roller bearings can be replaced in dependence of their
condition on reaching defined signal thresholds.
If diagnostic inspection of the roller bearings is not possible,

alternative measures must be taken to prevent inadmissible
temperature rises or sparking effectively, e.g. by using temperature
and/or oil level sensors!
In this case, SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH recommends
preventive renewal of roller bearings after 25,000 operational hours.
Roller bearing grease
Gearboxes with stroke adjustment have grease-filled roller bearings with lifetime lubrication.
For maintenance instructions see Section 5.1
Please also observe the following instructions for couplings in the drive
chain!
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 4/6

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
Couplings in the drive chain
General safety instructions!

Couplings can fail if overburdened unexpectedly. This results in sudden
stopping.
On BRAN+LUEBBE metering pumps a primary danger of fire is made
unlikely by the type of construction and if special forms of coupling are
used (optional) it can largely be ruled out.
Prevent dangers of ignition which can occur through the undesired
stopping of a pump (e.g. operation as a cooling water pump;
uncontrolled warming of fluid mixtures when a mixing component is
missing).
Coupling between motor and gearbox
It is imperative to observe any instructions in the coupling

manufacturer's user manual!
Checks for wear:
• Carry out a check for free play and a visual inspection of the elastic
ring gear in line with manufacturer’s specifications.
• Only carry out this work when the machine is not in use.
• Prevent unintended starting of the machine.
Renew wear parts or the complete coupling as soon as the wear
threshold given by the manufacturer is almost reached or has been
reached.
Use only original spare parts.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 5/6

3 Components
3.1 Gearboxes
Coupling(s) between gearboxes in multi-purpose machines
The coupling housings between the gearboxes are sealed with an O-ring in the flange area of
the gearbox.
If the pump is operated correctly, no penetration of potentially explosive atmospheres is to be
expected.
There is no risk of ignition provided couplings are not used if the wear threshold has been
exceeded (see manufacturer's specifications).
Check couplings between gearboxes at the latest after 3 years or

25.000 operational hours:
• Carry out a check for free play and a visual inspection of the elastic
ring gear in line with manufacturer’s specifications.
Renew wear parts or the complete coupling as soon as the wear
threshold given by the manufacturer is almost reached or has been
reached.
Use only original spare parts.
Do not operate the pump without the O-ring seals between the flanges
of the gearbox!
• It is imperative to ensure that the O-ring seals are mounted
carefully and professionally when reassembling dismantled multi-
purpose machines.
• Replace damaged O-ring seals with original spare parts.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 6/6

BRAN+LUEBBE 3 Components
3.2 Stroke Length Adjustment
3.2.20 Pneumatic stroke length adjustment for gearbox types

C, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, KH, DH and DSH -
at standstill and in operation
1 Position controller
2 Plunger
3 Rod
4 Eccentric
5 Adjustment pivot
6 Crankshaft
7 Stroke length indicator
8 Marker
9 Locking screw (oil inlet)
A+B Chambers for operating

air
C+D Chambers for attenuation
E Connection C + D
F Set pressure (0.2 to 1.0 bar)
G Connections for supply air
(2.5 to 6 bar)
Electrical input signal

0/4 – 20mA
r Crank radius
H Stroke
Fig. 3.1: Cross section
Construction and function
For the construction and function of the stroke length adjustment see Fig. 3.1.
The pneumatic position controller (1) feeds operating air into the chamber (A) or (B). This
slides the crankshaft (6) on the longitudinal axis by means of the plunger (2) and the rod (3).
20.09.12 ST4 Rev. 03 Page 1/3

The adjustment pivot (5) is connected to the eccentric (4) and slides in the angled groove of
the crankshaft (6). This changes the crank radius “r” and the stroke “H”.
The stroke length is read off on the stroke length indicator (7) and the marker (8).
A hydraulic attenuation is integrated to stabilise the stroke length adjustment. The chambers
(C) and (D) are filled with oil in the factory and connected by a boring (E).
Oil Filling: gearbox type C (2x) approx. 1.5l

gearbox types KH, H2 approx. 0.25 l
gearbox types DH, H4 approx. 1.5 l
gearbox types DSH, H5 approx. 4.5 l
gearbox type H3 approx. 0.75 l
gearbox type H6 approx. 8.0 l
Type of oil: see Section 5.2 "Gear oil"
No oil change is necessary.
Setpoint setting
• Pneumatic controller
The set pressure is connected at the (F) connection (pipe outer diameter 6 mm).
0.2 - 1.0 bar set pressure accords to stroke min. - stroke max.
• Electro pneumatic controller
Input signal 0/4 ...20mA
Supply air
The supply air (2.5 - 6 bar) is fed in via the (G) connection (pipe outer diameter 6 mm).
ATTENTION!
Personal and material damage possible.
The pneumatic stroke length adjustment may only be operated if the
supply air pressure is limited to 6 bar by control or safety devices!
ATTENTION!
Material damage possible due to rod vibrations in the pneumatic system.
It is imperative that you connect both (G) connections to the supply air.
Inadmissible temperature rises possible.
20.09.12 ST4 Rev. 03 Page 2/3

ATTENTION!
Corrosion and failures possible.
Only use clean dry air.
If necessary install an air dryer and air purger upstream of the
connection (G).
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury from oil spurting out.
Only carry out inspections or maintenance work when
• the machine is shut down,
• the supply air (G) is closed off.
The chamber (C) is connected to the supply air (G) with a non-return
valve. Even if the supply air is closed off, the chambers (C) and (D) are
under pressure.
Depressurise the chambers (C) and (D) before opening them.

To do this, loosen the oil inlet/bleed screw (9) with 1 or 2 turns.
Wear protective equipment!
Position controller
The position controller (1) is preset in the factory.

Further instructions can be found in Section 10 "Accessories".
Attenuation
ATTENTION!
Gearbox/drive unit damage possible due to inadmissible temperature
rise and wear and tear in the case of vibrations in the pneumatic system!
Check the setting of the attenuation every six months or when the stroke
length indicator flutters.
The gearbox / drive unit must not be used if the oil temperature is higher
than 90 °C!
20.09.12 ST4 Rev. 03 Page 3/3

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
3.3.3 PTFE series – Double Diaphragm Assembly, vacuum and/or

liquid-coupled
The plunger seal (2) seals the

hydraulic chamber (B) between
plunger (6) and hydraulic housing (5)
from the atmosphere. The diaphragm
(7) seals the product chamber (A)
from the hydraulic chamber (B). The
hydraulic fluid in the hydraulic
chamber (B) and the diaphragm (7)
transmit the movement of the plunger
to the product in the product chamber
(A).
The pressure and suction valves (3+4)
are self-acting valves, which operate 1 Crosshead 9 Bleed valve
due to underpressure or overpressure. 2 Plunger seal 10 Overflow valve
The plunger (6) is clamped into the 3 Pressure valve 11 Hydraulic fluid reservoir
crosshead (1), thus transferring the 4 Suction valve 12 Drain Screw
5 Hydraulic housing
oscillating movement to the plunger
6 Plunger A Product chamber
(6). (See Fig. 3.1 and 3.2).
7 Diaphragm B Hydraulic chamber
• Suction stroke 8 Replenishing valve
Movement from front dead centre Fig. 3.1: Plunger in front dead centre
(Fig. 3.1) to rear dead centre (Fig.
3.2).
In the suction stroke, the pressure
valve (3) is closed. The product
flows out of the suction line into
product chamber (A) via the
suction valve (4) which has been
opened by the underpressure.
• Pressure stroke
Movement from rear dead centre
(Fig. 3.2) to front dead centre
(Fig. 3.1).
In the pressure stroke, the suction
valve is closed. Here, the product
flows from the product chamber
(A) into the pressure line via the
pressure valve (3), which is Fig. 3.2: Plunger in rear dead centre
opened by the overpressure.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 1/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
ATTENTION!
A limited pumping function of the pump can cause damage to the pump
head.
The operating pressure must be greater than 1 bar to ensure proper
operation of the bleed valve (see Section 3.3.3.2).
Hydraulic fluid
The hydraulic chamber (B) is oil filled at delivery.
Fill the reservoir (11) in accordance with the drawing (see Section 9) prior to
starting operation.
Unless otherwise indicated, fill hydraulic fluid reservoir (11) up to approx. 10
mm above the top of the replenishing valve or to the middle of the oil sight
glass with hydraulic fluid.
For hydraulic fluid see table 3.2, section 3.3.3.5.
Protective Cover
WARNING!
Risk of burning due to hot hydraulic oil spurting out.
Operate the pump only with the protective cover (lid) screwed onto the
hydraulic container.
Suction and Pressure Valve
Increased risk of explosion due to unintentional change of zone!

Whenever inflammable media are being pumped, long-lasting explosive
atmospheres can be created by leaks!
• Check the flange connection of the suction and pressure valves

weekly for leakage.
• In case of leaks, replace the seals with original spare parts
immediately.
NOTE!
Seals could become damaged during installation!
Recommendation:
Whenever the diaphragm is being changed, always replace the valve seals
with original spare parts.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 2/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
3.3.3.1 Replenishing valve
1 Housing 5 Spring 7 Diaphragm 11 Push rod

2 Lock nut 6 Spring plate 8 Replenishing valve
3 Valve ball 9 Spring s Setting
4 O-Ring 10 Control pin
Fig. 3.3: Construction of the Fig. 3.4: Function of the position control
Replenishing Valve
Construction of the replenishing valve
The spring (5) presses on the spring plate (6) and closes the valve seat of the housing (1) with
a valve ball (3) (Fig. 3.3). The opening pressure is lower than 0.05 bar.
Function of the position control
At the end of the pressure stroke the replenishing valve (8) is closed by the spring (9), control
pin (10) and push rod (11). At the end of the suction stroke the diaphragm (7) moves the
control pin (10).
The push rod (11) then releases the replenishing valve and the small bleed volume expelled
by the bleed valve is replenished (Fig. 3.4).
ATTENTION!
Material damage on the pump head possible.
A malfunction of the position control can result in excessive or
insufficient filling of the hydraulic chamber.
Always comply with the screw-in depth of the replenishing valve!
If a malfunction of the replenishing valve occurs, it can be removed and mounted as described
below.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 3/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
Removal and Mounting of the Replenishing Valve
2 Lock nut
3 Valve ball
8 Replenishing valve
9 Spring
10 Control pin
11 Push rod
12 Drain Screw
13 Bleed valve
Fig. 3.5: Removal and mounting of the replenishing valve
ATTENTION!
Careless adjustment of the replenishing valve will lead to faulty
operation and damage to the pump head.
The factory settings of the replenishing valve must not be changed
during operation!
The system is subject to only minor wear and is therefore almost
maintenance-free.
We strongly recommend that the replenishment valve is only adjusted if the pump head is
dismantled or partially dismantled (e.g. for a diaphragm change). In this case, you can check
the correct setting using a depth gauge.
For the setting "s" see the sectional drawing of the pump head in Section 9
"Drawings and parts lists".
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 4/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
The replenishing valve on an installed pump head is only to be set in exceptional cases and
then only by trained technicians!
This method is imprecise and the dimension set cannot be checked from outside.
Removal (Fig. 3.5):
Observe the safety instructions in Section 2 “Pump type”!
1. Close the suction and pressure lines and flush the pump head.
2. Disconnect the piping.
3. Unscrew the bleed valve (13).
4. Drain off the hydraulic fluid:
- In the case of a small pump head (without a drain screw):
a. Remove the pump head including the plunger from the gearbox.
b. Turn the pump head 180° to drain off the hydraulic fluid.
- For other pump heads use the drain screw (12).
5. Remove the nuts (13) uniformly crosswise and remove the front cover (14).
See Section 3.3.3.4 “Changing the diaphragm”.
6. Remove diaphragm (7) and if necessary the breaker plate.
7. Remove lock nut (2) and unscrew and remove replenishing valve (8).
8. Remove push rod (11), control pin (10) and spring (9).
9. Inspect all parts and if necessary clean or replace them (Fig. 3.3 to 3.5).
Mounting (Fig. 3.5):
1. Mount spring (9), control pin (10) and push rod (11).
2. Press control pin (10) back into the boring
3. Screw in the replenishing valve (8) until the valve ball (3) is in contact with the push rod
(11).
4. Release the control pin (10).
5. Turn back the replenishing valve (8) until the setting "s" for the control pin (10) is reached.
For the setting "s" see the sectional drawing of the pump head in Section 9
"Drawings and parts lists".
6. This sets the valve stroke (H).
7. Tighten lock nut (2) in this position.
8. If necessary mount breaker plate, diaphragm and front cover.
See Section 3.3.3.4 “Changing the diaphragm”.
9. Fill with hydraulic oil and screw in bleed valve (13).
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 5/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
3.3.3.2 Bleed valve
The bleed valve (Fig. 3.6) serves to

1 Housing
expel gas or air from the hydraulic 2 Valve insert
chamber automatically. 3 Lock nut
4 O-Ring
During the suction stroke the spring 5 Valve ball
(6) presses on the valve ball (5)and 6 Spring
closes the seat in the housing (1). H Ball travel
During the pressure stroke the valve C Hose connection
ball (5) is pressed against the spring
(6) and closes the seat in the valve
insert (2). The response pressure is
approx. 1 bar.
Fig. 3.6: Bleed valve
Setting the bleed volume
The bleed volume is determined by the

Plunger H Turn anti-
ball travel H (Fig. 3.6). H is set as
Diameter clockwise by:
follows:
1. Loosen lock nut (3). 5 and 8 mm 0.1 mm 50 °
2. Tighten valve insert (2) carefully all other 0.3 mm 120 °

until contact is made with the diameters
ball (5). Table 3.1
3. Turn valve insert (2) anti-clockwise

as indicated in Table 3.1.
4. Tighten lock nut (3) in this position.
Checking the bleed volume
The bleed valve works automatically when the plunger is at front and rear dead centre. Air
bubbles that form due to underpressure during the suction stroke, are expelled into the
hydraulic chamber (B) during ball travel (Fig. 3.6).
The bleed volume is approx. 3 - 10 ml per 100 strokes.
To check the bleed volume put a hose (inner diameter 6 mm) on connection (C) and measure
the volume of hydraulic oil escaping.
The hydraulic oil escaping during bleeding may splash against the cover of the hydraulic oil
reservoir.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 6/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
3.3.3.3 Overflow valve
Configuration:
The overflow valve shown in

Fig. 3.7 is used in the following
pump heads:
• for a stroke length of 20 or

30 mm for plunger diameters
of up to 42 mm
• for a stroke length of 60 mm

for plunger diameters of up
to 30 mm
The overflow valve shown in

Fig. 3.8 is used in the following
pump heads:
• for a stroke length of 20 or

30 mm for plunger diameters 1 Adjusting screw 1 Dust cap
of up more than 42 mm 2 Lock nut 2 Adjusting screw with
3 Spring lock nut
• for a stroke length of 60 mm 4 Housing 3 Housing
for plunger diameters of up 5 Valve cone 4 Spring
more than 30 mm 6 Screw fitting with seat 5 O-ring
7 Seal 6 Cone
• for a stroke length of more 7 Seal
than 60 mm. 8 Valve seat
Fig. 3.7: Overflow valve Fig. 3.8: Overflow valve
Function of the overflow valve
At the factory, the overflow valve is set at 20% above the operating pressure (see data sheet
section in Section 1.2). When the overflow valve opens, hydraulic liquid flows into the hydraulic
chamber. The pump head then operates on the hydraulics side within a circulating system.
ATTENTION!
Personal and material damage (pump head, gearbox/drive unit, piping)
possible.
The overflow valve does not replace the safety valve in the pressure line!
Always use a separate safety valve in the pressure line!
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 7/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
Impermissible heating of the hydraulic fluid can occur!

Prevent the overflow valve from opening for a longer period time. Ensure
a constant form of temperature monitoring by means of
• electrical alarm signal transmitting systems or
• regular checks.
For suitable limits for electrical alarm devices, see Section 6.2.
In special cases, e.g. suspension dosing, the overflow valve can act as a safety valve.
Nonetheless, these exceptional cases, which sometimes demand that the temperature of the
hydraulic fluid be monitored, should only be used after consulting
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH.
3.3.3.4 Double diaphragm assembly and diaphragm monitoring
1 Diaphragm 1 Diaphragm
2 Intermediate ring 2 Intermediate ring
3 Bleed screw
4 Monitoring device A Capillaries
5 Intermediate diaphragm space
Fig. 3.9: Diaphragm monitoring Fig. 3.10: Double Diaphragm
The double diaphragm (Fig. 3.9 and 3.10) consists of two diaphragms (1) and one metal
intermediate ring (2). There are two capillaries (A) in the intermediate ring. In part gauze
elements are arranged between the diaphragms (see Parts List, Section 9).
There is a connection in the mounted pump head between the intermediate diaphragm space
(5) and the monitoring device (4) via the capillaries (A) and channels in the front cover (Fig.
3.9 ).
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 8/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
A rupture of the double diaphragm results in an increase of pressure in the intermediate

diaphragm space (5) close to the operating pressure.
This increase in pressure is shown on the manometer of the monitoring device (4) (Fig. 3.9).
A contact manometer can be used either to stop the metering pump or to have an audible
signal.
Whenever the liquids to be pumped are explosive or toxic, the diaphragm monitoring becomes
a very important factor.
Risk of a double diaphragm rupture occurs when a rupture of one of the

two diaphragms is detected too late.
Hydraulic oil from the diaphragm pump head can then flow out and
contaminate the medium.
Ensure a constant form of diaphragm monitoring by means of
• regular checks.
Ensure the required explosion protection in the case of electric

installations.
Whenever electric alarm transmitter devices or sensors are being
connected or installed, ensure strict compliance with valid standards
and local regulations!
WARNING!
Risk to persons and the environment!
Whenever toxic substances are being conveyed with the pump, toxic
gases can, in the case of PTFE diaphragms, penetrate the diaphragm
and contaminate the hydraulic oil.
The outgassing of toxic substances from the hydraulic oil endangers
persons and the environment.
• Protective equipment and breathing protection must always be worn
when carrying out maintenance work of any kind on the pump head.
• Change the hydraulic oil at regular intervals.
• Ensure proper waste disposal of the used hydraulic oil.
Alternative:
Use stainless steel diaphragms!
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 9/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
ATTENTION!
If a diaphragm pump head is pressurised while in standstill, this can lead
to the diaphragm being damaged.
Avoid the pump head being pressurised for a longer period of time by
closing the suction line.
Changing the diaphragm
For changing the diaphragm see Fig. 3.11 to 3.13.
Dismantling
Observe the safety

instructions in Section 2
“Pump type”!
1. Close the suction and pressure lines

and flush the pump head.
2. Disconnect the piping.
3. Unscrew and remove the bleed valve
(9).
4. Drain off the hydraulic fluid:
- In the case of a small pump
head (without a drain screw):
a. Remove the pump head
including the plunger from
the gearbox.
b. Turn the pump head 180° to
7 Diaphragm
drain off the hydraulic fluid.
9 Bleed valve
- For other pump heads use the 12 Drain screw
drain screw (12). 13 Nut
14 Front cover
5. Remove the nuts (13) uniformly 15 Monitoring device
crosswise and remove the front 16 Bleed screw
cover (14). 17 Screw
6. Dismantle the diaphragm or double Fig. 3.11: Changing the diaphragm

diaphragm (7).
7. Check the intermediate ring for damage. Replace if necessary.
8. Make sure that the capillaries are free. Clean and blow through if necessary.
9. Dismantle the monitoring device (15) and the bleed screw (16).
Check and clean. Replace if damaged.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 10/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
ATTENTION!
Personal and material damage possible!
If both diaphragm layers are ruptured, discharge medium may have
entered the hydraulic chamber. Possible consequences:
• corrosion on the pump head
• other form of chemical attack of the medium being conveyed on the
functional parts of the pump head.
In this case, clean all parts of the hydraulic chamber.
Mounting
Single-layer diaphragm:
1. Insert the diaphragm (7) with the corrugated side facing the
front cover (14) (see Fig. 3.12) or in the case of a dome-
shaped diaphragm with the spherical cap facing the
hydraulic housing (Fig. 3.13).
Double diaphragm:
1. Fit the diaphragms (7) and the intermediate ring (2) in

Fig. 3.12 in the following sequence:
• diaphragm
• intermediate ring and gauze package (if there is one)
• diaphragm.
Whereby the corrugated side of each diaphragm faces the Fig. 3.12: Mounting the
front cover (14) or in the case of a dome shaped diaphragm diaphragms
the spherical cap faces the hydraulic housing.
ATTENTION!
Incorrect mounting of the diaphragm
leads to incorrect functioning of the
diaphragm monitoring.
The drilled holes toward the monitoring
device must line up exactly with the
drilled holes in the front diaphragm and
in the intermediate ring.
Fig. 3.13: Mounting the

diaphragms
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 11/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
2. Mount the front cover (14):

a. Grease the threads of the screws (17) with Molykote or a similar compound.
b. Tighten the nuts (13) uniformly crosswise up to the required torque (see stamp marks
on the front cover or parts list, Section 9).
3. Screw in the oil drain screw (12).

4. Evacuate the double diaphragm or fill it with intermediate fluid.
5. Fill hydraulic chamber with oil and screw in the bleed valve (9).
ATTENTION!
Changing the diaphragm in diaphragm pumps without stroke length
adjustment:
If these instructions are not observed, the diaphragms could be
destroyed when the machine is started up!
1. Fill the hydraulic chamber with hydraulic fluid via the dismantled
bleed valve (9),
2. position the plunger for each pump head in the front dead centre
position (diaphragm side),
3. then screw in the bleed valve (9).
The adjustment of the plunger position is carried out via the motor clutch
or the motor fan impeller.
Alternative in the case of supply pressure:
1. Move the plunger of each pump head to the rear dead centre position
2. Fill with hydraulic fluid, whereby the diaphragms are positioned in the rear dead centre
position due to the supply pressure (gearbox side).
3. Screw in the bleed valve (9).
4. To stabilize the diaphragm unit, and also to check the function of the replenishing valve,
turn the plunger through one complete suction and pressure stroke using either the
coupling or the motor fan.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 12/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
Evacuating the double diaphragm
For the evacuation of the double

diaphragm see Fig. 3.14.
• At a supply pressure of less than

2 bar on the suction side:
- Loosen bleed screw (16) one turn

(the thread has to be sealed with
approx. 2 layers of Teflon tape).
- Check if pressure rupture
monitoring device (15) is firmly
tightened.
- Fit hose (clearance width 6 mm)
on the nipple of the bleed screw
(16).
- Evacuate intermediate space (5) of
the double diaphragm to an
1 Diaphragm
absolute pressure of 0.5 bar using
2 Intermediate ring
a water jet pump or a vacuum 5 Intermediate diaphragm space
compressor (18). 15 Monitoring device
16 Bleed screw
- Tighten the bleed screw (16) firmly.
18 Vacuum compressor or water jet pump
Fig. 3.14: Evacuating the double diaphragm
• Evacuation of the chamber is not necessary if there is a supply pressure of more

than 2 bars on the suction side:
- Open bleed screw (16) before start-up. The diaphragms will be pressed together by
the supply pressure if the bleed screw is open.
- Tighten the bleed screw (16) firmly shortly after start-up to ensure that the monitoring
device (15) is effective.
Due to the permeation liquid gases or similar liquids may cause a slow increase of pressure in
the intermediate diaphragm space (5):
If the pressure in the intermediate diaphragm space of is slightly greater than

the suction-side supply pressure, a renewed evacuating operation must be
carried out.
However, if the pressure in the intermediate diaphragm space is
approximately equivalent to the operating pressure, a case of diaphragm
rupture has then occurred.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 13/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
Filling the double diaphragm with intermediate liquid
In order to decrease friction between the diaphragms, the intermediate space of the double
diaphragm is filled with intermediate liquid (e.g. hydraulic fluid see Page 16).
This is carried out by vacuum (Fig. 3.15) or supply pressure (Fig. 3.16).
Filling by vacuum:
1. Connect hose (6 mm clearance width) of

tank (21) to nipple of bleed screw (16).
2. Connect hose (6 mm internal diameter)
of vacuum compressor or vacuum pump
(18) to the nipple of the bleed screw (20).
3. Fill tank (21) with intermediate liquid.
4. Loosen bleed screws (16) and (20) one
turn.
5. Start vacuum compressor. Now
intermediate liquid will be sucked into
the intermediate diaphragm space (5).
6. When intermediate liquid enters the
hose to the vacuum pump, stop filling 1 Diaphragm
2 Intermediate ring
and close the bleed screw (20).
5 Intermediate diaphragm space
7. Close the bleed screw (16). 15 Monitoring device
16 Bleed screw
Filling by supply pressure 18 Vacuum pump or water jet pump
19 Bleed unit
20 Bleed screw
1. Connect hose (6 mm clearance width) of
21 Tank
tank (21) to nipple of bleed screw (16).
Fig. 3.15: Filling by vacuum
2. Fill tank (21) with intermediate liquid.
3. Loosen bleed screws (16) and (20) one
turn.
4. Apply supply pressure (A) of max. 0.3
bar to tank (21). Now intermediate liquid
will be pressed into the intermediate
diaphragm space (5).
5. When the intermediate liquid escapes
from bleed screw (20), stop filling and
close bleed screw (16).
6. Start up pump. Apply discharge fluid so
that the pump reaches the desired
operating pressure.
7. After approx. 1 minute of operation close A Supply pressure max. 0.3 bar (only Fig. 3.16)
bleed screw (20).
Fig. 3.16: Filling by supply pressure
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 14/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
After about 2 hours of operation, check monitoring device (15). If the pointer moves, open
bleed screw (20) to release excessive intermediate liquid.
3.3.3.5 Hydraulic fluid
The type and volume of hydraulic fluid is given in the data sheet,
Section 1.2.
ATTENTION!
Incorrect grades of hydraulic oil cause damage to the pump head and to
the gearbox/drive unit!
Use the specified grades of hydraulic oil only!
Operate the pump only within the specified operating limits (max.
pressure, max./min. operating temperature).
Checking the fluid level
CAUTION!
Oils and lubricants can cause skin rashes and other forms of injury to
health.

Avoid skin contact.
• Check the hydraulic fluid level monthly.
See also the pump head drawing, Section 9!
A dipstick is used to check the level.
The marking on the dipstick indicates the minimum level of the hydraulic fluid.
If there is no specification on the drawing, the level should be approx. 10mm above the top
of the bleed valve or in the centre of the oil sight glass.
If the level drops:
• Check the plunger seal on the atmosphere side and replace it if damaged.
• Check the plunger for wear grooves.
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 15/16

3 Components
3.3 Pump head
Loss of hydraulic oil can be caused by a defective plunger seal on the

pump head.
If no electrical monitoring system is connected,
• Check the hydraulic oil level of the pump head weekly.
Replace damaged sealing elements with original spare parts
immediately.
Compensate any loss of hydraulic oil.
• Check the hydraulic oil temperature on the diaphragm pump head
weekly!
If no specific limit temperature is defined in the data sheet, a
diaphragm pump head must not be operated at hydraulic oil
temperatures above the specified maximum temperature.
See Section 2, Table 2.1)
Preventative maintenance
The diaphragms and the hydraulic fluid should be replaced approx. every 8000 operating
hours (1 year of continuous operation).
Standard hydraulic fluids are listed in Table 3.2:
Type of fluid Manufacturer’s name Viscosity Oil operating range

(SPX name)
2
mm /s °C °F °C °F
Mineral oil SHELL Morlina Oil 10
10 40 104 -10 to +80 14 to 176
(H-L ISO VG10)
CASTROL Hyspin AWS10 10 40 104 -10 to +80 14 to 176
SPINESSO 10 10 40 104 -10 to +80 14 to 176
MOBIL Oil Velocite No.6 9.5 40 104 -12 to +80 10.4 to 176
WINTERSHALL Wiolan HN 10 10 40 104 -12 to +80 10.4 to 176
Silicon oil WACKER AK 50 38 40 104 +25 to +100 77 to 212
WACKER AP 100 60 40 104 +50 to +160 122 to 320
WACKER AS 4 12 -20 -4 -50 to +50 -58 to 122
Mineral oil for SHELL Aero Fluid 41 15 40 104
extremely low MOBIL Aero HFF 15 40 104 -50 to +100 -58 to 212
temperatures
CASTROL Aero HF 585B 15 40 104
Synthetic high 30 40 104 +20 to +160 68 to 320
temperature oil Petro-Canada CALFLO AF
2.3 160 320 (200) (392)
Non-toxic
CASTROL Optileb HY 32
hydraulic fluid 30.5 40 104 0 to +100 32 to 212
(Certification acc. to NSF H1)
(food)
Table 3.2 Standard hydraulic fluids
03.07.14 ST4 Rev. 09 Page 16/16

3 Components
3.4 Plunger seal
3.4.13 With lantern ring
Configuration:
Pump head with diaphragm in

compliance with drawings
HD.... and PU....
The plunger (3) is guided between the

gear crosshead and the guide strip (7).
The U-packing rings (4+6) and the

O-ring (5) are self-clamping seals
(see Fig. 3.1).
• Tighten the screws (8) for the ring 1 Housing

(2) with the torque indicated in the 2 Ring
assembly drawing (see Section 9). 3 Plunger
4 U-packing ring
The chamber in the ring (2) is 5 O-ring
connected to the hydraulic fluid 6 U-packing ring
7 Guide strip
reservoir via the boreholes (A) in the
8 Screw
housing (1) and is completely filled with
fluid. A To hydraulic fluid reservoir
Fig. 3.1: Plunger seal
A hose with a 6 or 10 mm outer diameter can be inserted into the borehole (A) to test the leak
tightness of the U-packing ring (4).
For the plunger seal used in the pump head, see "Drawings and parts list" in
Section 9 and Data Sheet 1.2.1.
WARNING!
Possible damage to plunger!
Local surface hotspots can occur if the plunger seal runs dry.
• Avoid dry runs. Ensure that the plunger is adequately lubricated.
• Check the level of the hydraulic oil weekly or use electric level
sensors.
18.11.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 1/1

3 Components
3.5 Plunger restraint
3.5.14 Gearbox types H2, J, K, KA
Configuration:
Pump head: • Plunger

• Diaphragm
Function
Fixed plunger restraint
Mounting
CAUTION!
1 Crosshead
Risk of injury!
2 Screw nut
Only carry out this 3 Plunger
work when the 4 Clamping ring
machine is not in use. A End of bore
Prevent accidental Fig. 3.1: Plunger restraint

starting of the
machine!
1. Slide screw nut (2) and clamping rings (4) onto plunger (3).
2. Slide plunger (3) into the borehole of the cross-head (1).
ATTENTION!
Material damage to the pump head and gear unit possible.
The plunger (3) must be fully inserted to the end of the borehole (A).
3. Screw screw nut (2) onto the crosshead (1) and tighten.
Impact sparks may be generated if the plunger restraint is not correctly

fitted or if the restraining elements (2) work loose.
Local surface hotspots can occur.
Check the mounting elements (2) quarterly for tight fitting.
22.08.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 1/1

3 Components
3.6 Valves
3.6 Valves
Configuration: Pump head (see Fig. 3.1)
For the valves used in the pump head see

Section "Drawings and parts lists"
Function
The suction and discharge valves are self-

acting valves, which operate due to
underpressure or overpressure.
For the principle of operation,

see Section “Pump head” Fig. 3.1: Pump head
Mounting
CAUTION!
The following applies for plunger pumps:
If valves are inserted the wrong way round, this could lead to breakage of
the pump head.
The following applies for diaphragm pumps:

If valves are inserted the wrong way round, the overflow valve opens.
The hydraulic fluid heats up. This causes increased wear and tear.
The diaphragms could be damaged!
Pay attention to the direction arrow of the valves (see Fig. 3.1 to 3.8).
• Suction valve: arrow points towards the product chamber

• Pressure valve: arrow points away from the product chamber
Impermissible heating of the hydraulic fluid can occur!

Prevent the overflow valve from opening for a longer period time. Ensure
a constant form of temperature monitoring by means of
• regular checks.
01.08.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 1/3

3 Components
3.6 Valves
3.6.1 Ball version
Fig. 3.2: Triple Ball Valve – Cross section Fig. 3.3: Double Ball Valve – Cross section
and view and view
Fig. 3.4: Single Ball Valve – Cross section

and view
3.6.2 Cone version
Fig. 3.5: Cone valve with spring – Cross Fig. 3.6: Cone valve without spring -Cross
section and view section and view
01.08.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 2/3

3 Components
3.6 Valves
3.6.3 Plate version
Fig. 3.7: Plate valve - Cross section Fig. 3.8: Plate valve - View
01.08.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 3/3

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
4.1.1 Installation of machines
Prior to Installation
1. Check the packaging of the metering or process pump for external damage.
2. Open the packaging.
3. Check the metering or process pump and its accessories for external damage.
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH must be notified about any form
of damage immediately.
Installation Location
If no alternative installation conditions have been agreed in the data sheet (Section 1.2), the
installation must be carried out in dry rooms without aggressive atmospheres.
In the case of outdoor installation, protection against precipitation, sandstorms and direct
sunlight must be provided.
If no alternative limit values have been agreed in the data sheet, the following values apply:
ProCam series:
Ambient temperature min.: 0 °C
Ambient temperature max.: +40 °C
Novados series, type H1, H2, H3, H4

Ambient temperature min.: -20 °C
All other series and types

Ambient temperature min.: -20 °C
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 1/6

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
Foundations and Installation
WARNING!
Note the overall weight of the metering/process pump!
(see the machine drawing for details)
The foundations must be dimensioned in such a way as to bear the load
of the overall weight of the pump plus all potential additional loads!
In particular, observe the max. permissible floor load when installing the
pump in buildings!
It might be necessary to make an installation that is vibration dampened
in order to prevent damage to parts of the building, system or machine
caused by vibration stimulus.
The height of the foundation should be selected so that it is easy to carry out any operating or
maintenance tasks.
Stroke length adjustment, stroke length display (if available), oil filling and oil draining, oil level
inspection and plunger seal must be easily accessible.
When installing, make sure there is sufficient clearance space for maintenance work (e.g. for
lifting equipment for dismantling operations during repair work) around and above the metering
or process pump.
Fig. 4.1: Installation plan for NOVADOS series
The space
requirements are
standard values
recommended by
SPX Flow Technology
Norderstedt GmbH!
Fig. 4.1: Installation plan for NOVADOS series
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 2/6

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
NOVADOS H1 – H4 H5, H6 B
A 0.8 m 1m 1,2 m
B 0.8 m 1m 1,2 m
C 0.4 m 0.5 m 0,8 m
D 0.4 m 0.5 m 1,2 m
E* 0.8 m 1m 1,2 m
* E= space above the pump
N-020 N-080
NOVAPLEX
N-040 N-160
A 1.2 m 1.5 m
B 1.2 m 1.5 m
C 0.8 m 1m
D 1.2 m 1.5 m
E*
Motor 1.2 m 1.5 m
horizontal
E*
Motor 1.5 m 1.8 m
vertical
Fig. 4.2: Installation plan for NOVAPLEX & NOVAPLEX Integral
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 3/6

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
NOVAPLEX W-020 W-080

W-320
Vector W-040 W-160
A 1.2 m 1.5 m 1.8 m
B 1.2 m 1.5 m 1.8 m
C 0.8 m 1m 1.2 m
D 1.2 m 1.5 m 1.8 m
E*
Motor 1.2 m 1.5 m 1.8 m
horizontal
E*
Motor 1.5 m 1.8 m 2.2 m
vertical
Fig. 4.3: Installation plan for NOVAPLEX Vector
1. Place the metering or process pump on a foundation, frame, etc. so that it is free from
stress.
ATTENTION!
Especially when at standstill, the roller bearings in the pump can be
damaged by adjacent equipment units.
Protect these roller bearings against vibrations by means of a suitable
(vibration-damping) foundation.
Install the pump in such a way that the maintenance staff can check the
oil level without any problems.
2. Screw the pump onto the fastening holes with fastening screws.
Whereby they should be aligned so that the plunger axis is horizontal and the valve axis is
vertical.
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 4/6

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
Electrical Connection
DANGER!
Electric shocks can kill you!
Any work on the electrical equipment must only be carried out by expert
electrical personnel!
Electrical connections must comply with local regulations.
• Dangerous voltages can be present due to faulty earthing.
Carry out all work only when the system is de-energised!
• Prevent electrostatic charging!
Connect all electrically conductive parts securely to the equipotential
bonding device.
• If not included in the scope of supply, install an EMERGENCY OFF
device.
Without an EMERGENCY OFF device, accident prevention is not
sufficiently guaranteed in the case of malfunction or incorrect
operation of the pump.
• Use only those types of EMERGENCY-OFF switches that correspond
to the equipment safety class (see data sheet, Section 1.2).
• Provide overload protection or temperature monitoring.
1. Check the voltage, frequency, speed and power.
2. Note the direction of rotation of the drive.
All earths, potential equalisation connections and monitoring devices

are to be connected electrically.
Connection of the Pipework
1. Clean the pipes thoroughly before connecting.
2. Connect the pipes so as to be free from stress.
3. Connect the pipework so that it is easy to remove the valve and dismantle the pump head.
4. Support the pipe weight by means of retaining clamps.
5. Compensate for pipe expansion by means of pipe bends.
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 5/6

4 Installation
4.1 Installation
CAUTION!
Oscillating positive-displacement pumps can cause vibrations in the
case of freely suspended pipework sections. Pipework can break off and
injure you severely.
Secure the pipework at an adequate number of points with supports
and/or retaining clamps.
Do not use the pipes as a climbing aid!
Lantern ring
CAUTION!
Damage to the pump head and gearbox /drive unit possible!
The following applies for pumps heads with a lantern ring:
Lubricate the lantern ring with a suitable liquid.
(See Section 4.3.2. “Installation examples”)
General remarks
Danger through static charging!

When setting up in zone 1, do not attach any plastic signs or stickers
which are larger than
100 cm² (Gas group II A / II B) or 20 cm² (Gas group II C).
1.12.16 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 6/6

4 Installation
4.2 Suction and pressure lines
WARNING!
The suction and pressure

lines must be properly de-
signed and connected to
the pump head.
Otherwise the pump head

can be seriously damaged.
The pumps must never be

allowed to work against a
closed fitting!
Q Flow
Install a safety valve in the t Time
pressure line before the a Pressure stroke
fitting. b Suction stroke
Fig. 4.2: Flow of a pump head
When opening safety and bleed valves, liquids and vapours must only
be allowed to escape in areas where neither persons nor materials can
be damaged.
Please note that when inflammable liquids or vapours escape, there can
be a risk of explosion in the outlets of the safety and bleed valves.
When designing the suction and pressure lines, care must be taken to ensure that cavitation,
overload and excessive demand do not occur due to the pulsating flows of the metering pump
(Fig. 4.2).
05.08.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 1/2

4 Installation
Prevention Cause Result Remedy

of
Cavitation • pressure falling below • loud noise • avoid high suction lifts
the vapor pressure of • excessive valve wear
the product • overload • keep the pipe length
as short as possible
Overload • pressure peaks • permanent damage • sufficient nominal
exceed the operating • forced rupture diameters
pressure
• fit pulsation damper
Excessive • suction or pressure • inaccurate metering
demand line too long • loud noise • fit pressure sustaining
• suction pressure is • excessive valve wear valve
higher than discharge
pressure • decrease viscosity
• pressure sustaining
valve missing
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH will calculate the pipe work
system on request.
For this, the following information will be required:
Product characteristics:
• Density
• Vapor pressure at working temperature
• Viscosity
• Settling speed, if product is a suspension
System data:
• Geodetic height
• Pressures on the suction and pressure side
• Length of pipe work
• Diameter of pipe work
• Number of bends
• Fittings
• Pipe work isometrics
05.08.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 2/2

4 Installation
4.3 Installation examples
4.3.1 Suction and Pressure Lines
The recommended accessories for installation on the suction and pressure side are listed in
Fig. 4.3.1:
1 Metering pump
2 Pulsation damper
3 Manometer
4 Shut-off valve
5 Filter
6 Safety valve
7 Suction tank
8 System pipework
Fig. 4.3.1: Suction and Pressure Lines
ATTENTION!
To avoid personal injury and damage to the pump or related equipment,

we recommend the installation of a safety valve!
Installation of the Safety Valve

(Fig. 4.3.2)
Aim:
To prevent the maximum permissible counter

pressure from being exceeded.
Mounting position:
Between the pump pressure connection and

the first shut-off valve. If a pulsation damper 1 Metering Pump
is fitted, the safety valve is fitted after the 4 Shut-off valve
6 Safety valve
pulsation damper.
Fig 4.3.2: Safety valve
06.08.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/3

4 Installation
Mounting of Pulsation Dampers

(Abb. 4.3.3)
Aim:
Dosing with fewer pulsations;
prevention of cavitation and overload.
Mounting position:
Directly in front of the suction connection or

behind the pressure connection of the
pump head. 1 Metering pump
2 Pulsation damper
Fig. 4.3.3: Pulsation damper
Installation of the Pressure

Control Valve (Fig. 4.3.4)
Aim:
Prevention of excessive conveyance and

excessive mass acceleration.
Mounting position:
1 Metering pump
Vertically at the end of the pressure line.
4 Shut-off valve
6 Safety valve
9 Pressure control valve
Fig. 4.3.4 Pressure control valve
Prevent the pump from running dry during operation!
If this is not done, explosive gas mixtures can form inside the pump
head.
If necessary, install protective equipment to prevent lack of product, e.g.

• level switch in the supply or intermediate tank (if necessary, an
additional foot valve.)
• flow monitors in the suction line
When product is lacking, the protective equipment must activate the

automatic shut off of the pump or generate an alarm which will lead to
the immediate shut off of the pump by the operator.
06.08.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 2/3

4 Installation
Installation of a Foot Valve

(Fig. 4.3.5)
Aim:
To prevent the suction line from running dry

in the case of high suction lifts.
Mounting position:
Vertically near the bottom of the reservoir.
1 Metering pump
10 Foot valve
Fig. 4.3.5: Foot valve
Installation of a Surge Tank

(Fig. 4.3.6)
Aim:
Reduction of suction lift.
Mounting position:
Same level as the metering pump.
Filling:
Via a feed pump (12) with max./min. control.
11 Surge tank
12 Feed pump
Fig. 4.3.6: Surge tank
06.08.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 3/3

5 Operation
5.1 Lubricant and lubricant change
5.1.19 Gear types H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, G3H and G4H
WARNING!
Gear unit damage
possible due to
inadmissible
temperature rise and
wear and tear!
The gear units are
delivered without
being filled with oil.
Fill with oil prior to
putting into service!
see Section "Gear H2 gear
oil"
Oil quantity:
see data sheet
Oil brand:
see Section "Gear oil"
First filling
1. Remove bleed screw (1) or H4 gear

locking screw (8)
2. Fill in oil to the middle of the

sight glass (6)
3. Screw in the bleed screw (1) or

locking screw (8)
4. Switch on the drive (A) for a

moment
5. Check the oil level on the sight

glass (6) and top it up if
necessary .
H5 gear
1 Bleed screw 7 Nipple

2 Locking screw 8 Locking screw
6 Sight glass A Drive
Fig. 5.1: Options oil filling H gear
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 1/6

5 Operation
Checking the oil level
Oil level with the gear unit off: middle of sight glass (6).
Oil must also be visible in the in sight glass (6) during operation.
Always keep the oil sight glass (6) clean of any soiling!
DANGER!
Shortage of oil, loss of oil or too lower oil pressure result in
impermissible temperature increases!
• If no electrical monitoring system is connected, check
o the oil level in the gearbox/drive unit every week
• the surface temperature of the gearbox/drive unit every week at

the warmest external point or in the oil
• Replace any damaged sealing elements such as the bellows or
groove rings with original spare parts immediately
• Compensate any loss of oil
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 2/6

5 Operation
Changing the oil
Every 16000 operational hours (continuous operation) or after 2 year of service life
(intermittent operation).
If the operational oil temperature exceeds 80 °C, an oil change is recommended after 8000
hours of operation (continuous operation) or after 1 year of operation (intermittent operation).
Alternatively the working life of the oil can be determined by half-yearly oil analyses (e.g. by
the lubricant manufacturer).
Recommendation during oil change:
After the oil has been drained off, remove the sight glass (6) and clean the
glass pane.
If the glass pane is so soiled that it cannot be cleaned, sight glass (6) must
be replaced.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 3/6

5 Operation
Oil draining
ATTENTION!
Gear oil heats up during normal operation and can spurt out when being
drained. Severe burns to the face and hands are possible.

Avoid skin contact.
Always wash your hands thoroughly after coming into
contact with these substances.
Use sufficiently large collecting containers.
Open the locking screw (2) and drain off the oil.
Oil filling
1. Switch off the drive (A)
2. Remove the bleed screw (1) or locking screw (8)
3. Fill in oil to the middle of the sight glass (6)
4. Screw in bleed screw (1) or locking screw (8)
5. Switch on the drive (A) for a moment
6. Check the oil level on the sight glass (6) and top it up if necessary .
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 4/6

5 Operation
Gears with an electronic level sensor (optional)
Only a qualified member of staff is allowed to make the electrical connection

of the level sensor.
1. Switch off the drive
2. Remove bleed screw (1) or locking screw (8)
3. Fill in oil to the middle of the sight glass (6)
4. Screw in bleed screw (1) or locking screw (8)
5. Switch on the drive (A).
There should be no switching signal from the level sensor indicating oil deficiency after filling.
Should there nevertheless be a switching signal,
6. Dheck the electrical connection of the sensor and its wiring diagram or
7. Slowly fill in small amounts of oil bit by bit until the switching signal of the sensor stops.
Multiple pumps
In the case of multiple pumps the procedures first filling, checking the oil level and oil draining
described above should be carried out for each individual gear separately.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 5/6

5 Operation
Roller bearing grease1
The roller bearing (3) of the crankshaft is

lubricated with a high-performance grease (4).
Two radial shaft seal rings (5) seal off the gear
oil.
It is recommended that the grease and the

radial shaft seal rings are replaced after
25000 operational hours.
See Section “Maitenance,

Inspection, Cleaning” for
instructions on how to replace the 3 Roller bearing
bearing. 4 High-performance grease
5 Radial shaft seal rings
It is imperative when mounting the replacement
parts to ensure that the roller bearing (3) and Fig. 5.3: Crankshaft bearing
the complete inside of the bearing housing and
the radial shaft seal rings (5) are filled with
sufficient grease.
You may only use grease that is approved by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH
(see Table 5.1).
Manufacturer Name of grease Basic oil viscosity in Temperature range

mm²/s (cSt) at approx.
40 °C / 104 °F
- 20 °C to + 120 °C
SHELL Alvania EP 2 189
- 4 °F to + 248 °F
Table 5.1: Lubricants
WARNING!
Gear damage!
After 36 months of use or 25000 operating hours replace
• the roller bearing of the crankshaft
• the radial shaft seal rings
• the high-performance grease
with original spare parts.
See Section "Maintenance, Inspection, Cleaning".
1 Except the H2 gear type and gears with a fixed stroke length
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 6/6

5 Operation
5.2 Gear oil
5.2.4 For gearbox types H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, G3H and G4H
ATTENTION!
The temperature of the gear oil should NOT exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during
operation.
If a higher oil temperature is reached during operation, the service life of
the oil will be reduced!
Comply with the notes in Section “Lubricant and lubricant change”.
For ambient temperatures of between 0 °C and +40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F)
Suitable are gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 100 to 220 mm2/s (cSt) at approx.
40 °C (104 °F).
You will find examples of oil types in Section “Lubricant tables”, Table 5.1.
For ambient temperatures of between -40 °C and +50 °C

(- 40 °F and 122 °F)
Suitable are multi-grade gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 70 to 100 mm2/s (cSt) at
approx. 40 °C (104 °F).
For ambient temperatures of between -20 °C and +60 °C

(- 4 °F and 140 °F)
Suitable are gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 220mm²/sec. (cSt) at 40 °C (104 °F).
26.09.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 1/1

5 Operation
5.2 Gear oil
5.2.10 Lubricant Tables
NOTE!
The gear oils listed in the tables below are only some examples!
Lubricant Table 5.1
Examples of gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 100 mm2/sec. (cSt) at approx. 40 °C
(104 °F):
Brand Gear oil mm²/sec. (cSt) at approx. 40 °C (104 °F)
BP BP Energol GR-XP
100
ESSO Spartan EP A nominal oil viscosity of 220mm2/s
(cSt) is recommended for continuous
MOBIL Mobilgear ambient temperatures of between 30 °C
and 40 °C (86 °F and 104 °F).
SHELL Shell Omala S2 G 100
Physiologically safe
CASTROL Optileb GT100
NSF H1 authorised
Table 5.1
Lubricant Table 5.2
Examples of gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 220 mm2/sec. (cSt) at 40 °C (104 °F)
and a viscosity index of at least 90:
BP BP Energol GR-XP 220
ESSO Spartan EP 220

220
MOBIL Mobilgear 630
Table 5.2
04.11.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/3

5 Operation
5.2 Gear oil
Lubricant Table 5.3
Examples of gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 320 mm²/sec. (cSt) at 40 °C (104 °F)
and a viscosity index of at least 90:
BP Energol GR-XP 320 320
ESSO Spartan EP 320 315
MOBIL Mobilgear 632

320
Table 5.3
Lubricant Table 5.4
Examples of multi-grade gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 70 to 100 mm2/sec. (cSt)
at approx. 40 °C (104 °F):
DEA Deagear SX 75W-90 97
ESSO GX 75W-90 100
SHELL Spirax S5 ATE75W-90 77
Table 5.4
Lubricant Table 5.5
Examples of gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 220mm²/sec. (cSt) at 40 °C (104 °F)
and a viscosity index of approx.150:
BP Enersyn HTX 220
SHELL Omala S4 GX 220

220
MOBIL Mobilgear SHC XMP 220
CASTROL Tribol 1510 / 220
Table 5.5
04.11.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 2/3

5 Operation
5.2 Gear oil
Lubricant Table 5.6
Examples of gear oils with a nominal viscosity of approx. 320 mm²/sec. (cSt) at 40 °C (104 °F)
and a viscosity index of approx.150:
SHELL Omala S4 GX 320 320
TRIBOL 1510 / 320 320
MOBIL Mobilgear SHC XMP 320 335
Table 5.6
04.11.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 3/3

5 Operation
5.3 Startup procedure
5.3.1 NOVADOS
The following instructions must be followed before starting a metering pump:
1. Check oil filling (see Section 5.1).
2. Readjust stroke length with indicator dial if necessary, e.g. after transport (see Section 3.2).
3. Add hydraulic fluid to diaphragm pump heads (see Section 3.3).
4. Check whether the metering pump is protected against overpressure.

For safety valves see Section 4.3.1.
Whenever a risk of explosion exists during the installation phase, carry

out the direction of rotation check only if the pump head and pipeworks
have been filled with fluid and have also been completely bled!
Switching on the drive for a short time in the case of an unfilled pump
results in impermissible temperature increases on the pump head and
pipeworks.
Electrical Connection
DANGER!
Electric shocks can kill
you!
The motor must only be
connected by qualified
personnel!
1. Connect the motor (1).
2. Check the direction of rotation of the

1 Motor
drive motor (1).
2 Gearbox
An arrow on the fan cover of the motor
and the gearbox indicates the direction Fig. 5.1: Depiction of the direction of the
of rotation (see Fig. 5.1). motor
23.09.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/3

5 Operation
ATTENTION!
An enormous rise in pressure can result in an inadmissible build-up of
heat in the pump head and cause damage to parts of the pump head.
• Do not start up the pump with closed shut-off valves in the pressure
and suction lines.
• Install a safety valve in the pressure line.
• Do not close the shut-off valves in the pressure and suction lines
when the pump is still in operation.
For machines with frequency converters, the following information
applies:
Do not change any data (e.g. frequency range and torque
characteristics) adjusted by factory until you have consulted with
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH first!
Prevent the presence of gas bubbles in the product chamber of the

pump head and in the suction and pressure line system!
When the pump is started up and is being operated, the product
chamber of the pump head and the suction and pressure line system
must be filled with liquid at all times.
If this cannot be guaranteed by the owner-operator, he must then
provide for the necessary monitoring measures.
One option is the use of a bleed valve on the pump head (not part of the
standard equipment!).
The explosion protection category indicated on the rating plate of the

pump does not apply to the conveying area of the pump head!
Whenever inflammable media are being conveyed, make sure that an
explosive gas-air mixture cannot be created in the conveying area of the
pump head at any time.
Prevent air from entering the suction line under all circumstances!
If the owner-operator cannot guarantee this, he must then provide for
the necessary monitoring measures capable of initiating automatic
shutdown of the pump. For example, by means of
• a level switch in the suction container,
• a flowmeter in the suction line.
The use of an admission pressure pump including functional monitoring
is also recommended. See Section 4.3.1.
23.09.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 2/3

5 Operation
Adiabatic compression, shock waves and flowing gases can cause

temperature increases.
Explosive atmospheres and dust that has collected can ignite!

Whenever high-pressure gases in pipes are suddenly relieved of
pressure, shock waves are created that can result in an extreme build-up
of heat during changes of direction in elbows or flanges.
Startup
1. If there is a separate oil pump:

1.1 Start oil pump.
1.2 Check oil flow.
2. Open all shut-off devices in the suction and pressure lines.
3. If the pump head is equipped with a lantern ring, lubricate the lantern ring in accordance
with Section 4.3.2 or supply it with a suitable flushing liquid in accordance with Section
4.3.3.
4. Open all shut-off devices if heating or cooling pipes are present.
5. Make sure that the product to be conveyed is available.
6. Adjust the stroke length to "0".
7. If the drive motor speed is variable, set motor (1) to lowest speed.
8. Start drive motor.
9. Slowly increase speed and stroke length to the “Maximum”.
10. Allow the metering pump to run without pressure so that the pipework is well vented.
11. Check the seals on the pump head and pipework for leaks during startup.
If the pump has inadequate suction, because the suction height is too great,
• supply pressure must be generated on the suction side, or
• the suction height must be reduced. See Section 4.3.1.
When the suction and the pressure lines are filled and vented,
1. increase the pressure slowly up to the operating pressure.
2. set the rpm and stroke length to the required values.
23.09.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 3/3

5 Operation
5.4 Adjustment of the capacity
5.4.1 Adjustment of the capacity for metering pumps with variable

stroke lengths
The stroke length to be set for a required capacity is calculated from the max. stroke length,
the required capacity and the max. capacity.
The max. capacity is calculated by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH from the
following data:
• An assumed volumetric efficiency of 98% and

• a number of strokes, which has been calculated from the nominal speed of the drive motor.
Under normal operating conditions, it is sufficient to determine the stroke length using the
following equation:
capacity required (l/h)

stroke length setting (mm) = stroke lengthmax. (mm) •
capacity max. (l/h)
Stroke max: see Data sheet, Section 1.2.

Capacity max: see Data sheet, Section 1.2.
Capacity required: specified by the owner-user of the metering pump
Example
The following values are assumed in the example: Stroke max. : 20 mm

Capacity max .: 245 l/h
Capacity required : 200 l/h
200
stroke length setting = 20 •
245
stroke length setting = 16.33 mm
Under special operating conditions however, such as:
• High operating pressures and

• low plunger diameters,
the stroke length setting calculated above should be corrected, as it depends on operating
data such as operating pressure, viscosity, length of suction and pressure lines, arrangement
etc. An exact configuration of the stroke length setting to capacity can therefore only be
determined under operational conditions.
When normal operating conditions prevail, you can continue directly with
Section 5.4.1.1.
12.08.13 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 1/5

5 Operation
Correcting the stroke length setting by determining the capacity
To determine the capacity during operation, you measure
• the volume that is pumped in 100 strokes, and

• the actual number of strokes.
Two possible ways of measuring the volume are described below:
Measuring the volume on the suction side (Fig. 5.1)
Prior to the measurement:
1. Fill and vent suction and pressure

lines.
2. Operate the metering pump for a short
time.
3. Adjust the stroke length to 16.33 mm
or as calculated in the example.
Measurement
4. Open shut-off valves (3) and (4). 1 Pump head

2 Burette
5. Fill the burette (2) up to the calibration 3 Shut-off valve
mark. 4 Shut-off valve
6. Close the shut-off valve (4). 5 Suction tank
7. Meter 100 strokes from the burette (2). Fig. 5.1: Measuring the volume on the suction side
Measurement result = V100 strokes (cm3)
Measuring the volume on the pressure

side (Fig. 5.2)
Prior to the measurement:
1. Fill and vent suction and pressure lines.

2. Operate the metering pump for a short
time.
3. Adjust the stroke length to 16.33 mm or
as calculated in the example.
Measurement
4. Set the overflow valve (3) to operating 1 Pump head

pressure. 2 Burette
3 Overflow valve
5. Close the shut-off valve (4).
4 Shut-off valve
6. Meter 100 strokes from the burette (2). 5 Safety valve
Measurement result = V100 strokes (cm3) Fig. 5.2: Measuring the volume on the pressure side
12.08.13 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 2/5

5 Operation
Determining the number of strokes under operating conditions
The actual number of strokes is required for converting the measured volume to the measured
capacity:
• Count the actual number of strokes per minute.
Capacity in operation
The Capacity op. is calculated from the Volume V100 strokes (Fig. 5.1 or 5.2) and the actual
number of strokes. For the example calculation, it is assumed that V100 strokes = 2150 cm3 and
the actual number of strokes = 150 strokes/min.
actual number of strokes • 60

capacity op. = V100 strokes • (l/h)
100 • 1000
150 • 60
capacity op. = 2150 • l/h
100 • 1000
capacity op. = 193.51 l/h
Determining the stroke length setting under operating conditions
The corrected stroke length setting is calculated from the Capacity op. and the stroke setting
calculated in the example on Page 1:
capacity required
stroke length setting corr. = stroke length setting theo. •
capacity op.
200
stroke lengthsetting corr. = 16.33 •
193.51
stroke length setting corr. = 16.87 mm
12.08.13 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 3/5

5 Operation
5.4.1.1 Determining the flow rate curve (metering pumps)
Another way in which to determine the appropriate stroke length setting for the required
capacity is to use a flow rate curve. A flow rate curve can be produced very easily for the
specific operating conditions due to the linear dosing characteristic of the pump:
• Calculate the corrected or normal stroke

length setting for a required capacity Required capacity
2 10
(l/h)
according to the method described under
5.4. Repeat the calculation for a further Corrected (normal)
required capacity. stroke length setting 6 16
(mm)
The example values in Table 5.1. are
based on a max. stroke of 20 mm and an Table 5.1: Example
operating pressure of 200 bar.
• Enter the values into a graph, which capacity (l/h)
has the corrected or normal stroke

length setting as its x-axis and the
capacity as its y-axis.
stroke length s (mm)
• Draw a straight line through the two

capacity (l/h)
points.
The straight line does not pass
through the origin. A straight line
through the origin would correspond
to the theoretical capacity of a
volumetric efficiency of 100%, which
does not take into account the
operating conditions.
stroke length s (mm)
The flow rate curve is only valid as long as the operating conditions (e.g.
operating pressure and type of medium) stay the same!
12.08.13 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 4/5

5 Operation
5.4.1.2 Adjusting the capacity for process pumps
The stroke in process pumps cannot be changed. The adjustment of the capacity can only be
effected by changing the stroke frequency or the input speed (e.g. by using an asynchronous
motor with a frequency converter).
If the process pump is not equipped with a variable-speed drive, the capacity cannot be
changed either.
The capacity that can be expected at maximum operating pressure can be found in the
capacity protocol. The data in the capacity protocol applies only to the conveyance of water.
The values for the conveyance of other media could be much lower. This is particularly
applicable to compressible media (e.g. liquids with high gas content).
12.08.13 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 5/5

6.1 Inspection work NOVADOS & NOVAPLEX
6.1.1 Maintenance and Inspection
General remarks
The performance of regular, complete and conscientiously performed maintenance, inspection

and cleaning work by technically competent, trained and qualified personnel guarantees
trouble-free operation of the pump, increases the product quality and avoids interruption to
production.
CAUTION!
Improper maintenance of the pump can result in personal and material
damage.
Have all maintenance, inspection and cleaning work carried out by
technically competent, trained or qualified personnel only.
Fundamentally, all maintenance, inspection and cleaning work on the pump must only be
carried out with the pump in a properly protected, safe condition.
CAUTION!
Prior to performing any maintenance, inspection and cleaning work, all
connections of the pump to sources of energy must be disconnected.
In particular, isolate the connections to the pneumatic source and the
electrical connection.
Make sure that all auxiliary systems, drives and additional equipment (piping, pipework) of the
pump to be maintained / repaired are switched off and depressurised.
On completion of the maintenance, inspection and cleaning work, all external objects such as
tools, cleaning agents, cleaning rags, etc. must be removed from the pump area.
After maintenance, inspection and cleaning work has been completed, check whether all
protective devices have been re-installed and are fully operational again.
Checks during production are also necessary in addition to the maintenance, inspection and
cleaning work. (See Table 6.1 to 6.6)
Drive
The name and the type of drive can be found in the data sheet (see Section 1.2).
Since the drive is not a BRAN+LUEBBE product, please observe the maintenance regulations
of the manufacturer. These documents are included in Section 10 "Accessories".
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 1/10

Gearboxes
The following Table 6.1 includes information regarding checks and maintenance.
Applicable for the NOVADOS series, types B, BS, C, CS, D, DA, DF, DH, DS, DSH, J, K, KA,
KH, KK, H1.
What When Who Reference

Normal (Section)
Zone
atmosphere
Oil level Check weekly Operator 5.1.
Surface
temperature
Check - weekly Operator 5.1.
gearbox housing
(oil temperature)
Oil change
1
B1, BS annually
every 8,000 h
1 1 Specialist 5.1.
B , BS , C, CS, D, DA, F, half-yearly
DF, DH, DS, DSH, J, K, KA, every 4,000 h
KH, KK, H1
Bellows
B, BS, CS, DS, Check monthly Operator 3.1.
DSH, KA, KK,
H1, (J, C2)
Plunger restraint Check half-yearly quarterly Operator 3.5
in accordance with
Coupling Check
manufacturer instructions
(between motor Specialist 3.1.
when the wear limit is
and gearbox) Change
reached
after 25,000 h at the latest in
Coupling(s) Check accordance with manufacturer
instructions Specialist 3.1.
(between multiple
gearboxes) when the wear limit is
Change
reached
Toothed belt Check every 4,000 h monthly

Specialist 3.1.
KK Change every 8,000 h
Table 6.1: Maintenance Intervals Gearboxes
h = hours of operation
1 In adverse conditions half-yearly oil change

2 Special model for operation in - zones
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 2/10

Gearboxes of the H series
Applicable for the NOVADOS series, types H2, H3, H4, H5 and H6.

Normal (Section)
-Zone
atmosphere
Surface
temperature
gearbox housing
(oil temperature)
every 2 years3
Oil change 3
Specialist 5.1.
every 16,000 h
Check quarterly monthly

Crosshead seal Specialist 3.1.
Change every 16,000 h
in accordance with
Coupling Check
manufacturer instructions
(between motor Specialist 3.1.
when the wear limit is
and gearbox) Change
reached
after 25,000 h at the latest in
Coupling(s) Check accordance with manufacturer
instructions Specialist 3.1.
(between multiple
gearboxes) when the wear limit is
Change
reached
Table 6.2: Maintenance interval for H series gearboxes
3 Applies only to oil operating temperatures up to max. 80°C.

If the operational oil temperature exceeds 80°C, an oil change is recommended after 8.000 hours of operation
(continuous operation) or after 1 year of operation (intermittent operation).
Alternatively the working life of the oil can be determined by half-yearly oil analyses
(e.g. by the lubricant manufacturer).
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 3/10

NOVAPLEX and NOVAPLEX Integral drive units
Applicable for the NOVAPLEX / NOVAPLEX Integral series, types NT010, NT020, NT040,
NT080 and NT160.

(Section)
Normal
atmosphere -Zone
Surface
temperature
gearbox housing
(oil temperature)
annually4
Oil Change 4 Specialist 5.1.
every 8,000 h
in accordance with
Check
Coupling(s) manufacturer instructions
Specialist 3.1.
(in drive chain) when the wear limit is
Change
reached
Check quarterly monthly
Crosshead seal Specialist 3.1
Change every 16,000 h
Bellows5 Check half-yearly quarterly Operator 3.1
Table 6.3: Maintenance intervals NOVAPLEX drive units

4 Alternatively the working life of the oil can be determined by half-yearly oil analyses
(e.g. by the lubricant manufacturer).
5 Not for NOVAPLEX Integral
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 4/10

Observe the following instructions for all gearboxes and drive units:
DANGER!
Shortage of oil, loss of oil or too lower oil pressure result in
impermissible temperature increases!
• If no electrical monitoring system is connected, check
o the oil level in the gearbox/drive unit every week
o the surface temperature of the gearbox/drive unit every week at

the warmest external point or in the oil
• Replace any damaged sealing elements such as the bellows or
groove rings with original spare parts immediately
• Compensate any loss of oil
Roller bearing
The roller bearings fitted in your pump have been dimensioned in accordance with
internationally recognized rules and regulations.
In the NOVADOS series, the nominal, rated life cycle of the roller bearing is approx.
25,000 operational hours.
In the NOVAPLEX/NOVAPLEX Integral series, the nominal, rated life cycle of the roller
bearing is approx. 50,000 operational hours6.
Nevertheless, the working life achievable for roller bearings depends to a significant degree on
the actual operating conditions and can therefore be very different in practice.
6 Special model crosshead pivot bearing as roller bearing:

The nominal, rated life cycle of this roller bearing is approx. 25,000 operational hours.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 5/10

• Ensure there is adequate lubrication!

• Follow instructions for checking and changing lubricants!
• Only use lubricants recommended by SPX Flow Technology
Norderstedt GmbH!
• Look out for unexpected noises developing, vibrations and
increased oil temperatures. These can be indications of incipient or
advanced damage to bearings!
• SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH recommends renewing
roller bearings when the nominal, rated life cycle is reached, even if
there are no detectable signs of bearing damage!
Depending on their condition, roller bearings can be replaced by using recognized testing
methods.
For example:
Structural sound measurement with appropriate signal analysis and signal evaluation,
see VDI 3832.
Recommended Who Reference

Roller bearing
replacement intervals (Section)
NOVADOS series
Roller bearing (crankshaft worm every 25,000 h Specialist 3.1
gear and crosshead) every 36 months
NOVAPLEX,
NOVAPLEX Integral series
every 50,000 h Specialist 3.1
Roller bearing (crankshaft,
every 72 months
connection-rod main bearing)
Special model every 25,000 h

Specialist 3.1
Roller bearing (crosshead pin) every 36 months
Table 6.4: Maintenance intervals roller bearings
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 6/10

Avoid unacceptable temperature increases or sparks forming as a result

of bearing damage!
Check roller bearings regularly using recognized testing methods (e.g.
structural sound measurement with appropriate signal analysis and
signal evaluation  refer to VDI 3832).
In general, it is impossible to prescribe the time interval to be chosen
between two diagnostic measurements. It depends on:
• The operating conditions of the bearing,
• The advance warning needed (which again should consider the
difficulty of tracking damage to a bearing which has not yet been
detected).
Intervals of a few weeks are usually acceptable in the case of
intermittent monitoring (offline systems).
However, the maximum degree of safety will only be achieved by
continuous monitoring with installed sensors (online systems).
If diagnostic monitoring methods are used in online or offline
procedures, roller bearings can be replaced in dependence on their
condition on reaching defined signal thresholds.
If diagnostic inspection of the roller bearings is not possible, alternative
measures must be taken to prevent inadmissible temperature rises or
sparking effectively, e.g. by using temperature and/or oil level sensors!
In this case SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH recommends the
preventive replacement of roller bearings if they have reached their
nominal, calculated service life!
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 7/10

Diaphragm pump head (hydraulic actuation)

Normal (section)
-Zone
atmosphere
Hydraulic oil Fill level
monthly weekly
fluid check
Oil Operator
temperature weekly 3.3.
check
annually
Oil change Specialist
every 8,000 h
Plunger seal Check see “fill level check of
Operator
hydraulic fluid”
3.3.
Change annually
Specialist
every 8,000 h
Flange joints Leak
of suction and tightness monthly weekly Operator
pressure valve check
Seal
not tight/leakage7 Specialist
replacement
Flange joints Leak
of the pipe tightness monthly weekly Operator
connections check
Diaphragms Check weekly Operator
annually 3.3.
Replacement
every 8,000 h Specialist
of diaphragm
every 4,000 h8
Table 6.5: Maintenance intervals diaphragm pump head
Chapter ”Plunger Seal” see Section 3.4.
Section “Hydraulic fluid“ for diaphragm pump head

see Sections 3.3.3.5, 3.3.6.5, 3.3.7.4, 3.3.9.4, 3.3.11.5.
7 Recommendation:
Whenever the diaphragm is being changed, always replace the valve seals with original spare parts
8 Applies to diaphragm pumps for metering of low volumes (see Section 3.3.10)
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 8/10

If no electrical monitoring devices are connected, check the hydraulic oil

temperature on the diaphragm pump head every week!
A diaphragm pump head must not be used if the oil temperature exceeds
the prescribed maximum temperature!
See Section 2, Table 2.1.
Loss of hydraulic oil can be caused by a defective plunger seal on the
pump head.
If no electrical monitoring devices are connected, check the hydraulic oil
level of the pump head every week.
Replace damaged sealing elements with original spare parts
immediately.
Compensate any loss of hydraulic oil.
Plunger pump head

(Types plunger piston / double-acting disc piston)

Normal (section)
-Zone
atmosphere
Housing
temperature near Check weekly Operator 3.3.
plunger seal
If there is a
Temperature
closed loop
measurement, weekly Operator 4.3.
flushing
flushing medium
system
Plunger seals Leak tightness
weekly Operator
check 3.4.
Seal replacement if unacceptable leakage Specialist
Flange joints Leak tightness
monthly weekly Operator
of suction check
and pressure
valve Seal replacement if unacceptable leakage Specialist
Flange joints
Leak tightness
of the pipe monthly weekly Operator
check
connections
Table 6.6: Maintenance intervals plunger pump head
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 9/10

6.1.2 Cleaning
Prevent static charging!

Keep the pump free of dust by regular cleaning.
Clean plastic components with a damp cloth only!
In the case of operation in Zone 22:
• Prevent layers of dust building up on the surfaces of the pump!
• Remove all layers of dust immediately as soon as they reach a
thickness of 5mm!
• Only used methods of cleaning that avoid any unnecessary
dispersal of the layer of dust!
CAUTION!
Aggressive cleaning agents can cause skin rashes and other damage to
health. Corrosion damage to metal parts is possible.
Whenever you pump hazardous (caustic, aggressive or toxic) media,
there may still be residues of these in the pump head.
These can cause skin rashes and other forms of injury to health.
Avoid skin contact.
Clean the pump with chemically compatible cleaning
agents only
Clean the gearbox/drive unit or rather gearbox/drive unit parts with cold cleaning agents
(e.g. WBC 16)
CAUTION!
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces of the gearboxes/drive units.
Do not clean gearboxes/drive units until they have cooled down!
Clean the pump head or pump head parts with water only.
Protect the environment!

Handling and disposal of mineral oils and cleaning agents are subject to
legal regulations.
Take old oil and cleaning waste materials to an authorised waste collection
point.
11.05.15 ST4 Rev. 06 Page 10/10

6.2 Technical information and examples for the most

important inspection work on BRAN+LUEBBE
metering and process pumps
Table of contents
6.2.1 Inspection intervals - general ....................................................................................2
6.2.2 Potentially explosive areas

Particular importance of inspections in explosion-hazardous areas...................3
6.2.2.1 Inspection areas in Ex areas ........................................................................4
6.2.2.2 Use of sensors / permanent electronic monitoring

of components or operating fluids ................................................................4
6.2.2.3 Selection of suitable sensors .......................................................................4
6.2.2.4 Additional inspection and maintenance work ...............................................5
6.2.3 Pump head ..................................................................................................................6
6.2.3.1 Diaphragm equipment condition monitoring .................................................6
6.2.3.2 Hydraulic oil ..................................................................................................8
6.2.3.3 Overflow valve ............................................................................................13
6.2.4 Gear / Drive unit ........................................................................................................14
6.2.4.1 Gear oil (temperature and fill level) ............................................................14
6.2.4.2 Crosshead seal ..........................................................................................19
6.2.4.3 Plunger restraint .........................................................................................21
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 1/23

6.2.1 Inspection intervals - general
Inspections are intended to prevent damage to machines that could lead to
• a risk for life and limb

• environmental pollution due to hazardous materials.
The intervals between the inspections have been selected in such a way as to ensure safe
continuous operation of the machine under the installed and operational conditions. Wear and
tear or fault conditions on the machine can be detected in good time.
Comply with the specified inspection intervals for your own safety as well
as to meet the obligation of due care with respect to the operator of the
machine!
If you find it difficult or impossible (e.g. special manufacturing processes or inaccessible

production units) to comply with inspection intervals or the measures (e.g. machine shutdown)
required for this, talk to SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt about suitable measures to
guarantee the safety of your machine and processes.
This could entail:
• Using suitable sensors (permanent monitoring)

• Carrying out alternative methods of inspection
• Determination of system-specific inspection intervals that make allowance for the
operational conditions and re-evaluation of potential hazards:
Allowance must made for the question of what potential hazards could arise if a wear, fault or
defect condition is detected too late or not at all thus causing damage to the machine (e.g. if a
component breaks or snaps off or inadmissible heating of operating materials or components
occurs).
The measures mentioned for ensuring safety of the machinery can also be carried out by the
user himself on his own authority. This does, however, require the appropriate specialist
expertise. Approved state-of-the-art technology and applicable rules and regulations must be
used when selecting the sensors and carrying out the alternative methods of inspection.
The highest degree of safety is generally achieved by using sensors that have an automatic
electronic self test or by installing redundant sensor systems.
Any measures undertaken by the user himself to ensure safety of the machinery and that
deviate from the operating and inspection regulations of the original user manual must be
documented.
Potential hazards within the scope of the Accident Prevention Regulations (UVV) must be
evaluated. Any resulting warning or safety instructions or any operational procedures that
deviate from the original user manual must be made available to the operator of the
machinery.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 2/23

In particular Directive 1999/92/EC must be allowed for in explosive atmospheres.
6.2.2 Potentially explosive areas.

Particular importance of inspections in explosion-hazardous
areas
As a basic principle the operation of machinery and equipment in explosion-hazardous areas

represents a higher safety risk. Mixtures of air with combustible/flammable substances such as
gas or dust could be ignited by sparks, flames or hot surfaces. The risk of explosion depends
on the frequency with which explosive atmospheres can occur and on the ignition energy or
ignition temperature required to ignite the explosive mixture.
Allowance must not only be made for the hazard posed by electrical components (e.g.
sparking during switching processes, extreme heat build-up due to currents caused by an
overload or short circuit) when evaluating the risk.
Mechanical components with moving parts also represent a hazard because elevated
temperatures or sparking can occur due to operational malfunctions, wear and tear or the
breakdown of components (e.g. in the case of frictional or striking processes between metals).
In addition allowance must be made for hazards caused by electrostatic discharges on
surfaces that could become charged (e.g. plastics).
The requirements for machinery and equipment with regard to their safe operation in
explosion-hazardous atmospheres are defined exactly in the European Directive 94/9/EG (also
called ATEX).
BRAN+LUEBBE metering and process pumps marked for use in

Ex areas comply with the requirements of the Directive 94/9/EC.
Whereby the metering and process pumps intended for use in Ex areas are classified as
Category 2G or 3G (under certain circumstances also 3D).
The required machinery safety is achieved by means of "safe construction". This means that
there is no risk of ignition under normal operational conditions nor if a predictable failure
occurs (e.g. normal wear and tear, temporary opening of the over overflow valve in the
diaphragm pump head).
It is unavoidable that an element of risk also remains in explosion-

hazardous areas.
These operating instructions are intended to reduce the remaining element
of risk to a minimum. As a consequence inspection and maintenance
regulations are of particular importance.
The highest possible level of safety can only be achieved if the prescribed
inspection and maintenance work is adhered to and executed meticulously.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 3/23

Texts marked with the sign generally indicate potential hazards in EX areas and their
prevention.
Inspection and maintenance work in Ex areas that require particular attention are also marked
with this sign (see Section 1).
6.2.2.1 Inspection intervals in Ex areas
The general meaning of inspection intervals has already been described in Section 6.1.1. This
also applies without restriction to Ex areas.
Shorter intervals are prescribed for some inspection work on applications in Ex areas than is
the case for applications in non-explosive areas.
This allows for the higher potential risk of certain equipment components in Ex areas.
The tables in Section 6 compare the required intervals for different inspection and
maintenance work for operation in non-explosion-hazardous atmospheres with those for
operation in Ex areas.
6.2.2.2 Use of sensors / permanent electronic monitoring of components

or operating fluids
Due to the safe constructive design of BRAN+LUEBBE metering and process pumps there is
no normative regulation requiring permanent monitoring of components or operating fluids with
sensors for applications in the equipment category 2G or the temperature classes T1 to T4.
Visual and manual execution of the mandatory inspections (e.g. control measurements of
temperatures and fill levels) are sufficient to fulfil the level of safety required for the equipment
category mentioned.
However, in many cases permanent electronic monitoring makes the required inspections
considerably easier, thus affording an even greater level of safety.
6.2.2.3 Selection of suitable sensors
Contact SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for advice on the most suitable sensors for
your pump, application and system control.
Should you select the sensors yourself, please pay particular attention to the following
instructions:
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 4/23

Only ever use sensors that are suitable for use in your Ex area and that have
the appropriate approval!
Comply with the applicable standards and regulations for the connection of
electrical devices!
When specifying limits for oil temperatures, consider a safety distance of

20K to the limits of the respective temperature class in the hazardous area!
(See section 6.2.3.2 and 6.2.4.1 )
6.2.2.4 Additional inspection and maintenance work
The following work must be carried out in Ex areas in addition to the standard inspection and
maintenance work:
• Couplings in the drive chain must be regularly inspected and replaced in

compliance with the individual manufacturer’s specifications.
This applies to the following couplings:
Series Coupling
NOVAPLEX Coupling between drive motor and reduction drive and

coupling between reduction drive and drive unit (see
Section 3.1)
NOVAPLEX Integral Coupling between drive motor and integrated reduction

drive (see Section 3.1)
NOVAPLEX Vector Coupling between drive motor and integrated reduction

(if there is one) drive (see Section 3.1)
NOVADOS Coupling between drive motor and gearbox

(see Section 3.1)
• Roller bearings must be regularly inspected using approved testing methods (e.g.
structure-borne sound measurement with appropriate signal analysis and signal
evaluation  refer to VDI 3832).
In general, it is impossible to prescribe the time interval to be chosen between two

diagnostic measurements. It depends on:
The operating conditions of the bearing and the advance warning needed (which again
should allow for the severe consequences of non-detected bearing damage). Intervals of a
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 5/23

few weeks are usually acceptable in the case of intermittent monitoring (offline systems).
However, the maximum degree of safety will only be achieved by continuous monitoring
with installed sensors (online systems).
If diagnostic monitoring methods are used in online or offline procedures, roller bearings
can be replaced in dependence on their condition on reaching defined signal
thresholds.
If diagnostic inspection of the roller bearings is not possible, alternative measures must be
taken to prevent inadmissible temperature rises or sparking effectively, e.g. by using
temperature and/or oil level sensors!
In this case SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH recommends the preventive
replacement of roller bearings if they have reached their nominal, calculated service life!
Please refer to Section 6 for specifics regarding the bearings of the gearbox and drive unit
series concerned and their expected service life.
6.2.3 Pump head
6.2.3.1 Diaphragm equipment condition monitoring
Instructions concerning the diaphragm equipment condition monitoring

see Section 3.3
BRAN+LUEBBE multi-layer membranes have been designed in such a way that incipient
cracks or breaks caused by operational wear and tear initially occur only on the diaphragm
that is in contact with the product. The second diaphragm (safety diaphragm) ensures that any
contamination of the product with hydraulic oil or any potential sequential damage is as good
as impossible.
In most applications it is not necessary to switch off the pump, safe operation is still
guaranteed for a short time.
The remaining life span of the safety diaphragm after the diaphragm in contact with the
product has broken depends on several factors:
• cause of the damage to the diaphragm

• physical properties of the discharge medium (aggressiveness, solids content)
• operating conditions (discharge pressure, primary pressure, temperature, pressure
pulsation)
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 6/23

In any case the pump must be switched off as quickly as possible and it must be repaired
professionally.
If you are discharging hazardous or toxic mediums, switch the pump off
immediately when the break signal is given!
Devices for diaphragm monitoring
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH uses the following devices for diaphragm
monitoring.
Special models or manufacturers are available on request of the customer.
Monitoring device Standard / Option Recognition Model

diaphragm defect
Manometer S Visual inspection • Various nominal sizes

(Manometer indicates • Various accuracy
virtual discharge classes
pressure) • With / without oil filling
Contact manometer O • Electric alarm and/or • Standard

emergency stop • Intrinsically safe
function
• Pressure resistant
• Visual inspection casing
(additional)
Pressure switch O • Electric alarm and/or • Standard

emergency stop • Intrinsically safe
function
• Pressure resistant
casing
Manometers are intended as standard solutions for all application areas and can be used
safely and without problem even in explosion-hazardous areas.
Contact manometers or pressure switches are used for triggering electric alarms or an
automatic machine switch-off.
Due to the safe constructive design of BRAN+LUEBBE diaphragm pump heads and their
approved areas of application there is no normative regulation requiring the use of these alarm
devices. However, their use makes the inspections required for safe operation considerably
easier, thus affording an even greater level of safety because permanent monitoring is
possible.
Determination of the inspection intervals for diaphragm monitoring
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 7/23

The interval (1 week) prescribed by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for diaphragm
monitoring allows for medium to high hazards, such as those that occur in Zone 1 explosion-
hazardous areas (see 6.1.1).
This fulfils the required level of safety for the equipment category to be used.
For the far rarer applications with the highest hazard, the user should provide for permanent
electronic monitoring. e.g. by using a pressure switch.
6.2.3.2 Hydraulic oil
The hydraulic oil transmits the piston displacement onto the diaphragm and is thereby one of
the most important components of a liquid driven diaphragm pump head. The hydraulic oil is
heated to the so-called operating temperature by the frictional heat that occurs on the piston
seals and in the hydraulic liquid itself during pumping.
Additional heat development occurs by:
• the temperature of the discharged medium (heat exchange)

• ambient temperature
• heat conduction from the gearbox
• failures e.g. opening of the overflow valve / cavitation in the hydraulic chamber
This is why hydraulic oil temperature in particular is of vital importance. Continuing failures can
be recognised by a rising temperature of the hydraulic oil.
A sufficient minimum level of hydraulic oil is as equally important for ensuring the basic
function of the displacement transmission.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 8/23

Limit temperature(s)
Definitions:
Working temperature range (min. /max.). Application temperature range

hydraulic oil (min. / max.).
These values are specified in the data These are material property values that
sheet and might include required limit restrict the safe use of the oil with regard to
temperatures e.g. for temperature classes its flow behaviour (viscosity) and ageing.
in ex-areas or design temperatures of the
pump head construction.
• Standard: Max. admissible hydraulic oil temperature is 80° C

• High temperature applications: Max. admissible hydraulic oil temperature is specified
in the data sheet.
Carrying out temperature control measurements
Ideally a temperature control measurement should be made directly in the hydraulic oil. Any
commercial thermometers or temperature sensors that are approved for immersion in fluids
are suitable for this.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury from squirting hot hydraulic oil!
Only remove the cover of the oil reservoir when the machine is not in
use!
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 9/23

Measurement of the temperature while the machine is in operation:
As an alternative, the measurement of the oil

temperature can be carried out on the outer
side of the oil reservoir housing. The
measuring point must be below the oil fill
level. Carry out several measurements at
different points to ensure a true reading (Fig.
6.1).
Any commercial contact thermometers that

are approved for measuring on metallic
surfaces are suitable. Electronic devices in
which the measuring sensors have short Fig. 6.1: Control of the hydraulic oil
temperature
response times are particularly
measurement on the outer side of
recommended (Fig. 6.2). the oil reservoir
The accuracy of the measurement is

optimised if a heat-conductive paste is used.
The difference between the temperature in
the hydraulic oil and the surface temperature
of the oil reservoir housing can be neglected.
Only ever use calibrated

measuring devices!
Never use contact-free

temperature sensors under
Fig. 6.2: Control of the hydraulic oil
any circumstances (radiation
temperature
pyrometer)! measurement on the outer side of
These devices give false the oil reservoir
readings on metal surfaces.
Fig. 6.3: Example of an electronic contact

thermometer
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 10/23

Determination of the inspection intervals for hydraulic oil monitoring
The interval (1 week) prescribed by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for temperature
monitoring of the hydraulic oil is sufficient to fulfil the level of safety required for general
operation and also that for operation with medium to high hazards, such as those that occur in
Zone 1 explosion-hazardous areas.
For applications that require a higher level of safety, the user should install an electronic
monitoring system.
Permanent monitoring of the hydraulic oil temperature:
Permanent electronic monitoring of the hydraulic oil temperature affords a maximum level of
safety and ease of inspection. Installation of a PT-100 sensor into the oil reservoir, in
compliance with Diagram 6.4, is an economical solution that is easy to realise.
Depending on the hazard potential of the pump application, the sensor used should be
connected electrically in such a way that an alarm is triggered in a switch room or an
automatic shutdown of the machine is triggered if the defined maximum temperature is
reached.
Other types of temperature sensors can be used as an alternative to the PT-100 sensors.
Types that combine the temperature and the fill level measurements in one sensor are also
possible.
1 PT-100 Temperature sensor

2 Hydraulic fluid reservoir
Fig. 6.4: Sensor installation
Specifying limits for alarm signals with permanent monitoring of the

hydraulic oil in Ex areas
Limit of the oil temperature for alarm signals / machine shut-off
Temperature class T1 / T2 / T3 T4 T5
Hydraulic oil 180 °C 115 °C 80 °C
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 11/23

Fill level of the hydraulic oil

A sufficient amount of hydraulic oil is extremely important for the fulfilment of the basic function
of the diaphragm pump head. Loss of hydraulic oil can be caused by a defective plunger seal
for example, or by leaks in the diaphragm restraint or by leaks in the reservoir. As oil loss due
to the signs of wear mentioned above is usually very slow and as, depending on the type of
pump head, there is a sufficient amount of reserve oil, an inspection interval of 1 month is
prescribed for normal applications.
An inspection must be carried out weekly for applications with higher safety requirements (e.g.
Zone 1 explosion-hazard areas) in order to ensure the required level of safety.
Inspection of the fill level of the hydraulic oil is carried out visually depending on the type of oil
reservoir
• By removing the oil dipstick.

Optimum filling level: the level on the dipstick is above the marking.
• By means of a transparent cover.
Optimum filling level: approx. 10mm above the top edge of the bleed valve.
• By means of an inspection window in a metal cover.
Optimum filling level: approx. 10mm above the top edge of the bleed valve.
• By means of an oil gauge glass in the side of the container.
Optimum filling level: Middle of the sight glass.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury from squirting hot hydraulic oil!
Only remove the cover of the oil reservoir when the machine is not in
use!
A sudden total loss of hydraulic oil can occur in the case of a double diaphragm break, for
example, or extreme damage on the plunger seal. Permanent electronic monitoring of the fill
level of the hydraulic oil is recommended in order to ensure timely recognition of such rare
failures or to make inspections and service work easier.
There are different types of suitable sensors:
• vibrating fork sensors

• capacitive sensors
• opto-electrical sensors
• float switches
These can either be installed in the cover or in the side of the oil reservoir depending on
sensor type and size of the pump head.
SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH staff would be glad to advise you on the best choice
of sensor for your pump head type, your application and the electronic system control you use.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 12/23

Plunger seal
The plunger seal in diaphragm pump heads is a multi-piece construction with a so-called
locking ring. The locking ring provides lubrication and cooling of the actual sealing elements
(various types of lip seals) using the hydraulic oil. This means that damage on the plunger seal
can be recognised by the regular inspection of the hydraulic oil fill level as described above.
6.2.3.3 Overflow valve
The overflow valve is a safety device intended to prevent damage to the diaphragm as well as
to the complete pump head in the case of an unforeseeable increase in pressure in the piping
system (e.g. in the case of a fault status in the process or unintentional closing of the pressure
line).
IMPORTANT!
The overflow valve is NOT a substitute for the safety valve in the
pressurised tubing!
The opening pressure of the overflow valve is set by the manufacturer at 10% higher than the
working pressure of the pump head. When the overflow valve opens, hydraulic oil flows out of
the working chamber and into the reservoir. If the valve is open permanently the hydraulic oil
circulates in pump head. This fault status in the pump head drastically reduces the pumping
effect on the medium to be pumped or stops it altogether.
ATTENTION!
An overflow valve that is open permanently causes wear and tear

(leakage)!
Inadmissible heating of the hydraulic oil and the pump head impair the
life span of the complete pump.
Prevent the overflow valve from opening continuously!
Occasional opening of the overflow valve (e.g. during start-ups or process-related fluctuations
in the working pressure) is not at all critical, as long as the max. permissible temperature of the
hydraulic oil is not exceeded.
If the overflow valve in your application opens too often despite rectification
of process-related faults, ask SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH to
inspect the layout of the pump and piping system.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 13/23

6.2.4 Gear / Drive unit
6.2.4.1 Gear oil (temperature and fill level)
The gear oil lubricates and cools all moving parts in the gearbox/drive unit, the bearings and
shaft seals. The frictional heat that is generated is transferred to the gearbox/drive unit
housing by the oil.
Heat is dissipated on the surface of the housing to the ambient air by means of convection.
This leads to a heat equilibrium with an appropriate oil operating temperature for longer
operational periods.
The oil operating temperature that occurs depends on
• the design and size of the gearbox/drive unit

• their load factor
• the ambient temperature
• the coefficient of heat transfer at the place of installation (among other things
dependent on airflow rates and humidity).
In addition the oil temperature can be influenced by the discharge of hot media due to heat
transfer via the pump head mounting and the housings of the gearbox/drive unit.
The viscosity of the oil changes depending on the temperature:
• Low temperatures cause higher viscosity  semi fluid oil.

• High temperatures cause low viscosity  fluid oil.
This temperature-dependent viscosity is specified in the so-called viscosity index.

The viscosity index can vary considerably in the same viscosity class (nominal viscosity,
measured at 40°C) depending on the chemical composition and the quality of the oil.
A distinction is made between:
• mineral oil
• partial or full synthetic oils
• unblended and blended oils (oils upgraded by blending in additives).
Moreover the operating temperature of the oil that arises influences its maximum service. This,
however, depends to a great extent on the quality of the oil used.
In order to achieve optimum oil distribution and lubricating effect on the gearbox parts and the
bearings, gear oil in BRAN+LUEBBE gearbox/drive units may only be used within specific
temperature limits.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 14/23

Higher wear on the gearbox parts, bearings and shaft seals can result if temperatures are
outside of this range, because oil that is too fluid does not provide a sufficient lubricating film,
for example, or oil that is too viscous can no longer lubricate the parts needing lubrication
sufficiently.
Oil qualities suitable for the various ambient temperature ranges are listed in a table for the
respective gearbox and drive unit types. For the reasons mentioned above, the oil temperature
limits must be complied with!
ATTENTION!
Inadmissible oil operating temperatures lead to a considerable reduction

in the service life of the oil and lead to premature wear of the sealing
elements used.
• The gearbox/drive unit must not be used with the following oil
temperature:
o Gear oil (mineral)  over 90 °C
o Gear oil (synthetic)  over 100 °C
If this temperature limit cannot be complied with due to extremely high ambient temperatures,
oil cooling must be provided.
Even the use of high blend synthetic oils with an excellent viscosity index may not provide
sufficient lubrication in cases of extremely low ambient temperatures. Pre-warming of the oil
before a machine start-up or permanent tempering is necessary in such cases.
Continuous cooling/tempering of the gearbox/drive unit oil can usually only be achieved with
external lubrication of the gearbox/drive units using the appropriate intercepting and supply
pipes, oil pump(s), oil filters and a suitable heat exchanger. SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt
GmbH staff would be glad to advise you regarding the planning of the best oil supply system
for your pump application.
Carrying out temperature control measurements
Ideally a temperature control measurement should be made directly in the gear oil. Any
commercial thermometers or temperature sensors that are approved for immersion in fluids
are suitable for this.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury from squirting hot gear oil and moving parts inside the
gearbox/drive unit!
Only measure the oil temperature when the machine is not in use!
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 15/23

NOVADOS series: Remove the oil filling plug or the dipstick from the oil filling opening.
Insert the measuring sensor into the oil filling opening vertically, until it
dips into the gearbox oil (Fig. 6.5).
Make sure the measuring sensor is

dipped in long enough to get a
measured value that is as accurate as
possible.
Only ever use calibrated

measuring devices!
The temperature measurement can

also be carried out as described below
if the machine cannot be shut down for
process reasons or if special filters are
installed in the oil filling opening Fig. 6.5: Measuring the temperature of the gear oil
(special models). in a NOVADOS gearbox with the machine
shut down.
Measurement of the
temperature while the machine is in operation
NOVADOS and NOVAPLEX series:
As an alternative, the measurement of the oil temperature can be carried out on the outer side
of the gearbox/drive unit housing.
The measuring point must be below the oil fill level. Carry out several measurements at
different points to ensure a true reading.
Suitable measuring points are shown in Fig. 6.6 and Fig. 6.7
Any commercial contact thermometers that are approved for measuring on metallic surfaces
are suitable. Electronic devices in which the measuring sensors have short response times are
particularly recommended. The accuracy of the measurement is optimised if a heat-conductive
paste is used.
The difference between the temperature in the gear oil and the surface temperature of the
gearbox/drive unit housing can be neglected.
Only ever use calibrated measuring devices!
Never use contact-free temperature sensors under any circumstances

(radiation pyrometer)!
These devices give false readings on metal surfaces.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 16/23

Fig. 6.6: NOVADOS series Fig. 6.7: NOVAPLEX series

Suitable measuring point T for controlling the Suitable measuring point T for controlling the
temperature of the gear oil from the outer temperature of the drive unit oil from the outer side of
side of the housing the housing
Determination of the inspection intervals for gear oil monitoring
The interval of 1 week prescribed by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for
temperature monitoring of the gear oil allows for operation with medium to high hazards, such
as those that occur in Zone 1 explosion-hazardous areas, for example.
For applications that require a higher level of safety, the user should determine shorter
intervals within the scope of his own hazard analysis or he should install an electronic
monitoring system.
No control measurement of the gearbox oil temperature is required under normal operating
conditions (no or only low hazard) and ambient temperatures of between 0°C and 40°C if a
lubricant is used that has been approved for operation by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt
GmbH.
Continuous monitoring of the gear oil temperature
Continuous electronic monitoring of the gear oil temperature affords a maximum level of safety
and ease of inspection.
Installation of a PT-100 sensor in the housing of the gearbox/drive unit is an economical
solution that is easy to realise.
The installation point in the housing of the gearbox/drive unit depends on the type of
gearbox/drive unit and the type of temperature sensor selected.
Please contact SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for installation examples for your
pump application.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 17/23

automatic shutdown of the machine is triggered if the defined maximum temperature is

reached.
Other types of temperature sensors can be used as an alternative to the PT-100 sensors.
Specifying limits for alarm signals with permanent monitoring of the

hydraulic oil in Ex areas
Limit of the oil temperature for alarm signals / machine shut-off
Temperature class T1 / T2 / T3 T4 T5
Gear oil (mineral) 90 °C 90 °C 80 °C
Gear oil (synthetic) 100 °C 100 °C 80 °C
Fill level of the gearbox/drive unit oil
Lubrication and cooling of all moving parts in the gearbox/drive unit, the bearings and shaft
seals is only guaranteed if there is sufficient lubricant.
Insufficient lubricant causes higher wear on these components and can even lead to the total
loss of the whole gearbox/drive unit.
Insufficient lubrication can also lead to inadmissible heating of the gear oil itself as well as of
the gearbox/drive unit components and housing surfaces!
Insufficient lubricant or loss of the lubricant can occur in the case of wear on the seals of the
drive shaft or the crosshead seal.
The way in which the fill level control is carried out depends on the gearbox/drive unit type,
either a dip stick or a gauge glass is used
(see Section 5.1.).
Determination of the inspection intervals for monitoring the fill level of

the gearbox/drive unit oil
The interval (1 week) prescribed by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for monitoring
the fill level of the gear oil is sufficient to fulfil the level of safety required for general operation
and also that for operation with medium to high hazards, such as those that occur in Zone 1
explosion-hazardous areas.
intervals within the scope of his own hazard analysis or he should install an electronic
monitoring system.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 18/23

Continuous monitoring of the fill level of the gear oil
Continuous electronic monitoring of the gear oil fill level in the housing of the gearbox/drive
unit affords a maximum level of safety and ease of inspection.
There are different types of suitable sensors:
• vibrating fork sensors

• capacitive sensors
• opto-electrical sensors
• float switches
The installation point in the housing of the gearbox/drive unit depends on the type of
gearbox/drive unit and the functional principle of the temperature sensor selected.
Please contact SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH for installation

examples for your pump application.
automatic shutdown of the machine is triggered if the defined minimum fill level is reached.
6.2.4.2 Crosshead seal
NOVADOS series, gearbox type H2 to H6

NOVAPLEX Integral series
The crosshead in these models is sealed with a heavy-duty seal. There is only little wear
under normal operating conditions and if oil filling of the gearbox is carried out as prescribed
and a service life of over 8000 operational hours can be expected.
In the case of wear on the seal, gear oil collects on the bottom of the pump head mount. This
can be seen in a visual inspection. For this the cover of the pump head mounting must be
removed.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury!
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 19/23

Determination of the inspection intervals for controlling the crosshead

seal
The time interval specified by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH is:
• 3 months for normal applications with low potential hazard

• 1 month for applications with medium to high hazards
(e.g. in Zone 1 explosion-hazardous areas)
intervals within the scope of his own hazard analysis.
If there is continuous electronic monitoring of the gear oil fill level, visual inspection of the
crosshead seal is not necessary.
If there is an increasing occurrence of insufficient lubricant, the crosshead seal must be

inspected by a specialist and if necessary replaced.
NOVADOS SERIES, gearbox type H1
The crosshead in this model is sealed with bellows. If there is wear on the bellows or if it is
damaged, gear oil can escape and then collect on the underside of the bellows or on the
bottom of the pump head mounting.
Inspect the bellows visually for damage or oil build-up. For this the cover of the pump head
mounting must be removed.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury!
Determination of the inspection intervals for controlling the bellows
The interval prescribed by SPX Flow Technology Norderstedt GmbH is 1 month for normal
operating conditions and for applications with medium to high hazards (e.g. in Zone 1
explosion-hazardous areas).
If there is continuous electronic monitoring of the gear oil fill level, visual inspections of the
bellows is not necessary.
If there is an increasing occurrence of insufficient lubricant, the bellows must be inspected by a
specialist and if necessary replaced.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 20/23

NOVAPLEX series:
The crosshead in this series is sealed with bellows. If there is wear on the bellows or if it is
damaged, drive unit oil can escape and then collect on the underside of the bellows or on the
bottom of the pump head mounting.
Inspect the bellows visually for damage or oil build-up. For this the cover of the pump head
mounting must be removed.
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury!
Determination of the inspection intervals for controlling the bellows

• 1 month for applications with medium to high hazards
If there is continuous electronic monitoring of the oil fill level in the drive unit, visual inspection
of the bellows is not necessary.
If there is an increasing occurrence of insufficient lubricant, the bellows must be inspected by a
specialist and if necessary replaced.
6.2.4.3 Plunger restraint
The plunger restraint functions as a mechanical coupling of the crank drive on the pump head.
The plunger restraint allows the oscillating motion of the crosshead to be transmitted to the
discharge medium.
2 different constructional versions of plunger restraints are used depending on the size of the
gearbox/drive unit and the type of pump head:
• Fixed plunger restraint

• Self-centring plunger restraint
See also Section 3.5.
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 21/23

Both versions are extremely robust and if mounted correctly and under normal operating
conditions of the pump can usually be operated over longer periods of time without any
recognisable wear and tear.
However, faulty mounting or tough operating conditions (frequent start-ups, cavitation in the
suction pipe or in the hydraulic chamber of the pump head) can lead to
• loosening of the screw connections (both types) and

• enlargement of the axial play (self-centering version).
This leads to progressive wear and even to breaking of the plunger restraint. Consequential
damage to the pump head and gearbox /drive unit is possible.
As higher frictional heating or sparking is to be reckoned with as a result of the wear

processes described above, these must be avoided under all circumstances in explosion-
hazardous areas!
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 22/23

Carrying out the inspection of the plunger restraint
ATTENTION!
Risk of injury!
Fixed plunger restraint
The mounting nut must be tightened firmly! It must not be possible to turn the piston in the
restraint by hand or to move it axially.
The end of the piston shaft must rest against the bottom of the bore in the crosshead (see
Figure in Section 3.5).
If you are not sure of the correct state of the plunger restraint, remove it completely and install
it carefully following the instructions in Section 3.5!
Self-centring plunger restraint
The mounting screws must be tightened with the torque specified in Section 3.5 (check this
with a torque wrench)!
The axial play of the plunger must not deviate from the specified value.
If mounted correctly the plunger can be turned by hand, but movement in the axial direction is
hardly noticeable (both are usually very stiff in large machines or large plunger diameters).
Such manual control of the self-centering plunger restraint suffices completely for an
inspection.
It is possible to carry out an exact measurement of the axial play by fixing a dial gauge on the
plunger shaft in such a way that the measuring sensor rests vertically on the clamping collar of
the plunger restraint. In the case of pressureless piping systems, the plunger can be moved
backwards and forwards to the front dead-point position by turning the drive shaft by hand
(e.g. on the fan wheel of the electric motor). The difference between the dial gauge readings
for forward and return stroke is approximately the existing axial play.
If you are not sure of the correct state of the plunger restraint, remove it completely and install
it carefully following the instructions in Section 3.5!
Determination of the inspection intervals for controlling the plunger

restraint

• 3 months for applications with medium to high hazards
27.05.15 ST4 Rev. 05 Page 23/23

7 Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
Fault Possible causes Remedy
No flow rate • No voltage at the motor: Check fuses and leads

• Motor defective: Repair or replace motor
• Coupling broken: Replace the coupling and eliminate
the cause of the overload
• No product available: Fill suction container
• Suction or pressure line shut

off: Open the shut-off devices
• Filter or suction line blocked: Clean filter or suction line.
• Pump valve fitted incorrectly: Fit pump valve in the direction of the
arrow
• Pump valves dirty or
damaged: Clean or replace pump valves
• Gas/air in product chamber: Increase suction pressure; vent
and/or fill product chamber.
• Counter pressure too high: Check setting of safety valve. Check
pressure line for length and nominal
diameter. Carry out pipework
calculation. (See Section 4.2)
• Suction lift too high: Reduce suction lift and, if necessary,
create supply pressure or install a
surge tank. (See Section 4.3.1)
Only metering pump:

• Stroke set at "0" mm: Adjust stroke length.
Flow rate • Supply pressure higher than

too high counter pressure: Fit pressure control valve. possibly
install a pump pressure valve with a
stronger spring load.
• Suction or pressure lines too
long or nominal diameter too
small: Enlarge nominal width or install air
receiver/pressure storage device
• Wrong stroke length: Check and, if necessary, recalculate
stroke length.
09.08.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/2

7 Troubleshooting
Fault Possible causes Remedy
Flow rate • Pump valves dirty or

too low damaged: Clean, re-grind or replace pump
valves
• Safety valve leaking: Clean safety valve; repair or replace
damaged parts.
• Safety valve operates
because of excessive
pressure loss in pressure Enlarge nominal width or install air
line: receiver/pressure storage device
• Stuffing box leaking: Tighten stuffing box( see Section
3.4.1) possibly replace sealing rings
and at the same time check plunger
for wear
• Gas/air in product chamber: Increase suction pressure; vent
• Cavitation: Increase suction pressure; vent
Only metering pump:

• Wrong stroke length: Check and, if necessary, recalculate
stroke length.
Diaphragm pump head:
• Bleed, refill or overflow valve

leaking: Clean valves, repair damaged parts
• Gas/air in product or
hydraulic chamber Bleed product or hydraulic chamber
Flow rate • Contamination of the product: Flush the pipework possibly fit filter
unstable
• Pump valve seat, valve ball
or cone damaged: Re-grind or replace valve
• Varying supply pressure or
changes in viscosity: Check operating conditions
09.08.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 2/2

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.1 Transport
General remarks
During the trial run performed by the factory, the gearbox is filled with a type of oil that
possesses preservation properties.
The oil is drained again prior to shipping. However, the internal parts of the gear unit remain
covered by a thin oil protection coating.
Be sure to use a proper form of transport in order to prevent damage to the

pump in packaged and/or unpackaged condition!
During transport and later during storage the pump must be protected
against moisture, salt-water, rain, sand storms, and direct sunlight.
Only use suitable transport equipment to transport the pump, such as:
• elevating trucks, fork-lift trucks and/or lifting cranes and
• transport ropes and lifting chains that are approved for the respective weight of the pump
that is being transported.
For dimensions and weights of the pump or pump parts see shipping order/machine drawings
(Section “Technical Data” and “Drawings and Part Lists”).
Delivery
1. Upon delivery, check the packaging for any signs of damage.

Complaints about external damage to the packaging must be reported to the respective
transport company immediately.
2. Remove the packaging.
3. Remove all fastening screws and fastening elements on the packaging
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 1/12

8.1 NOVADOS
Safety instructions for transport
Before transporting the pump, please pay attention to the following instructions:
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to falling load!
Parts of the body can be crushed when the load is set down.
Do not stand beneath the load, and maintain an adequate safety distance.
Remain outside the danger zone when the load is being lifted.
Wear a safety helmet, safety shoes and safety gloves.
• Do not use sling steel cables or chains around the pump!

• Make sure that the transport ropes have been attached correctly and
have sufficient load-carrying capacity.
• Do not screw transportation bolts into the threaded holes in the gear
unit or pump head housing to lift the entire pump!
• Do NOT use the lifting eyes of a fitted electric motor to lift or transport
the pump!
• When transporting with a lifting crane:
Only attach load attachment rigging (transport ropes and/or lifting
chains) to the lifting eyes that are fitted to the base frame of the pumps.
Do not release the transport suspension equipment until the pump has
been securely anchored at the installation location.
Transport
1. Place transport ropes around the pump (see lifting suggestions on following pages)
2. With multiple pumps:
Secure load attachment rigging (transportation cables and/or lifting chains) to the provided
lifting eyes on the base frame
3. Slowly lift the pump above the centre of gravity
4. During transportation, make sure that the pump remains in a horizontal position and that it
cannot slip out of the transport suspension equipment
5. Carefully and slowly set down the pump(s) at the installation location
6. Ensure that the pump cannot tip over
7. Align pump in its final position
8. Remove transport ropes and other auxiliary equipment
9. Secure pump in intended installation location.
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 2/12

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.1.1 Lifting suggestions for transporting the NOVADOS H series
Individual and multiple pumps (up to 3

pumps of identical size) can be lifted out of
the packaging and transported.
In order to do this the transport ropes must

be attached to the pump in suitable
locations.
The load must be distributed around 3 to 4

support or fastening points (attachment
points) and the centre of gravity of the
pump must be inside these points (A, B and
C).
(See Fig. 8.1 and 8.2).
Suitable attachment points for slinging with

transport ropes are;
• Motor attachment flange (A)

(motor next to motor attachment
flange),
• Gear unit housing (underside) (B) and
• Pump head (C)

Fig. 8.1: Lifting suggestions with transport ropes
Fig. 8.2: Attachment points
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 3/12

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.1.2 Slinging the transport ropes
Fig. 8.3: Slings around motor attachment flange and gear unit housing
Fig. 8.4: Sling around pump head Fig. 8.5:

Finished slings with 3 attachment points and internal
centre of gravity
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 4/12

8.1 NOVADOS
To compensate for different transport cable

lengths, use adjustable lifting chains /see
Fig. 8.6).
Fig. 8.6: Transport ropes with lifting chain
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 5/12

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.1.3 Lifting suggestions for different pump types
NOVADOS, Type H1
Individual pump with manual stroke adjustment
Individual pumps of type H1 can be lifted with slings at only 2 attachment points.
Depending on the weight of the pump head and the motor, the pump may be in a slightly tilted
position when it is lifted.
This is not critical provided that the transport ropes are carefully slung around the attachment
points and the pump cannot slip out.
1. Attachment point: Sling around the motor connection flange.
2. Attachment point: Sling around the pump head or the pump holder
(with extremely large diaphragm pump heads).
Fig. 8.7: Fig. 8.8:

NOVADOS H1 with diaphragm pump head NOVADOS H1 with piston pump head
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 6/12

8.1 NOVADOS
NOVADOS, Type H1
Individual pump with pneumatic or electric stroke adjusting facility
In the case of pumps with a pneumatic or electric stroke length adjuster,

please ensure that the transport ropes do not damage the lines of the stroke
length adjuster or the controller!
1. Attachment point (A): Sling around the motor connection flange.

2. Attachment point (B): Sling around the pump head or the pump holder
(with extremely large diaphragm pump heads).
3. Attachment point (C): Sling around the connecting flange
between the gear unit housing and the stroke length adjuster
Fig. 8.9: Slings around pump type H1 with Fig. 8.10: Slings around pump type H1 with
pneumatic stroke length adjuster electric stroke length adjuster
Multiple pumps with max. 6 pumps

2. Attachment point: Sling around the connecting flange
between last and next to last gear unit housings.
3. Attachment point: with 2-way pump:
Sling around all pump heads or pump yokes.
3-way (or more) pump:
Sling around middle pump head or pump yoke.
Fig. 8.11: Slings around 2-way pumps Fig. 8.12: Slings around 3-way pumps
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 7/12

8.1 NOVADOS
NOVADOS, Types H2, H3 and H4

Multiple pumps up to max. 3 pumps

with 3-way pump:
between last and next to last gear unit housing.
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 8/12

8.1 NOVADOS
NOVADOS, Types H5 and H6

Individual pumps with manual, pneumatic and electric stroke length adjuster
In the case of pumps with a pneumatic or electric stroke length adjuster,

please ensure that the transport ropes do not damage the lines of the stroke
length adjuster or the controller!
For lifting suggestions with attachment points and slings see Figs. 8.1 – 8.6.
Multiple pumps with max. 3 pumps

between last and next to last gear unit housing.

with 3-way pump:
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 9/12

8.1 NOVADOS
NOVADOS, Types J, C and CS

Multiple pumps with 2 or more pump heads and with manual, pneumatic or electric
stroke adjustment
In the case of pumps with pneumatic stroke adjustment, ensure that the
transport ropes do not damage the oil supply pipelines!
• Remove motor in order to prevent

damage to the ventilation plate
• 1st & 2nd attachment points:

Loop two transport ropes around the
upper gear unit housing.
Place sling tight against the housing at
both sides (area of flange connection to
pump yoke) and tighten.
See Fig. 8.17 & 8.18, Pos.1
• 3rd Attachment point:

Attach transport rope in a loop around
the motor connection flange and lead
upwards at the front of the gear unit.
See Fig. 8.17 & 8.18, Pos.1
Ensure that the loops are firmly

seated!
If transport rope length adjustment is
required:
• Use adjustable lifting chains;
• Secure all 3 transport ropes to a 3-
strand lifting chain.
See Fig. 8.6
The arrangement shown in Fig. 8.17 allows

Fig. 8.17: Lifting suggestion with transport
the pump to be lifted close to the centre of
ropes
gravity and transported.
The slight tilting of the pump during the

lifting procedure is non-critical, provided
that the load is lifted slowly and swinging is
avoided.
Fig. 8.18: Loop-shaped transport rope slings
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 10/12

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.2 Storage
1. Storage in dry and well ventilated rooms
WARNING!
The roller bearings in the pump can be damaged by adjacent
equipment units in particular when the machine is stationary.
Protect these roller bearings from vibration using a suitable
(vibration-damping) foundation.
A storage period of up to 2 years is possible without the need of any special precautionary
measures.
2. Storage in rooms with high levels of humidity
The pump must be sealed air-tight in plastic film and be protected from condensation by
means of a suitable quantity of silica gel. A storage period of up to 2 years is then possible.
If such protection is not possible, carry out the following measures:
1. Fill the gear up to the maximum level with gear oil1 or a corrosion protection oil.
2. Fill the hydraulic reservoir on the pump head up to the maximum level with hydraulic
oil. See Data Sheet and Section “Pump Head”.
3. Coat all exposed areas on the plunger, crosshead and all surfaces inside the pump
yoke with corrosion protection oil.
4. If the motors are not electrically connected, place silica gel bags in the terminal boxes.
Make sure you replace the silica gel2 regularly.
5. Change the oil once a year to ensure preservation.
Before putting the pump into operation the preservation oil must be replaced
with the recommended high-quality oil in the specified quantity.
See Data Sheet “Lubricant and lubricant change”.
Then observe the oil change intervals indicated in the Section "Maintenance,
Inspection, Cleaning".
3. Storage outdoors
In addition to the measures mentioned in Item 2, protection against precipitation,

sandstorms and direct sunlight must be provided.
1 See Data Sheet

2 See the manufacturer’s instructions
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 11/12

8.1 NOVADOS
8.1.3 Preservation
Preservation of installed pumps
Fill up the pump with oil of the recommended quality in the specified quantity
(see Data Sheet and Section “Lubricant and lubricant change”).
The following applies for diaphragm pump heads:

Fill the reservoir with hydraulic oil in order to prevent condensation build-up
(see Data Sheet and Section “Pump Head”).
The following applies to electrical stroke adjustment:

Apply voltage to the heating resistors or electric position controllers
(see Data Sheet and Section “Stroke Length Adjustiment”).
If the start of operation is delayed, the pump must be switched on for approx. 15 min. every
month in order to wet all the exposed places in the gear unit with oil again.
WARNING!
In the case of plunger pump heads, damage to sealing elements and to
the plunger is possible!
The plunger must not be used if dry!
Make sure that the plunger is coated by the product or a flushing
medium.
Remove the plunger from the cross head. Move the plunger to the front
dead centre position.
Change the oil once a year.
It will be necessary to change the oil before the pump is finally commissioned.
The specified oil-change intervals must then be observed (see Section “Maintenance,
Inspection, Cleaning”).
29.04.13 ST4 Rev. 07 Page 12/12

9 Drawings and parts lists
9 Drawings and Parts Lists
Machine drawings and part lists for the machine can be found on the following pages.
If you want to order spare parts, you will find the respective item numbers on the relevant
drawing.
The part identification number for the item number can then be taken from the parts list.
18.07.13 ST4 Rev. 00 Page 1/1

, - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - P r e s s ur e Transmitter
I. Type: EJA530E
2. Connection: 1/2" NPT Mole
3. Output Signal: 4-20mA HART Protocol
4. Output Connection: N20 Femole
Zuluftdruck : 2,5-6bor
rn supply oir pressure : 2,5-6bor
Anschluss/Connection : For pipe ~6 mm 00
Ei ns i qnoI : 014 - 2OmA

I Input signol : 0/4-20mA
r---llllll"'.=~==::::::=ll ~ _
1
~
Anschluss/Connection: M20xl.5
- :
......._.---------.---
I
V'-~ ,1,---. Pumpenkopf ~ 25x30 Hub

~] ,, 9 pumpheod ~ 25x30 sIroke
i
I 1-H ~
~~ ~ ~~~ b ~) Anschl. ANSI 1/2", 3001bs RF
conn. ANSI 1/2", 3001bs RF I: I 0
:r:
~,
::l: ...... . .,. .
I. Ct:l
....~~~J.Jt,JJ I ~~~
... h-tt-IJ//
11•
---.--------- I ? -
.liiiiiri.
~
1-
~
~2: II _ _+
,-·1··--+t---
1.~~ ~~\~,------ ~f---~- ~. L.JJ
~-1--1-r.-U----
~ ® 'I 1-a. n
~--4 - "' ~1--J r [:]
I
---'------__j~____!_--~+l....~~r~7 7~ m ~
V I II .0 T J \
000 / ~ II - c:::::=~~·-_1
.. 80 310 II I. 75
- .. 560 y_,JV
35 z~
50~ ....'I' I
,..
y
Auflogefläche
,...,
c::>
-
I . 0 _c::>
CO
,...,
c::> bose oreo
I - CO
- b Schwerpunkt (COG)
I f.\ Motormi I te center of grovily
I .......
W mo t or cent er I i ne COG X .. 200 mm
Iw ri\ Pumpenkopfmitte COG Y .. 88 mm
41 41 W pump heod center I i ne COG Z .. 188 mm
13 I
I
243 I
I
272
0,0,0
Tag-No.: P-3205
Erdung/eorthing ~
Trockengewicht mit Motor/Dry weight with motor: .. 115 kg

Qlmenge Getriebe/oi I quontity georbox : 2,8 I
Olmenge Pumpenkopf/oi I quantity pumpheod: 0,25 I
PRO[ ·IIODEL PUIIP .H2.2838l~IO
DESIGIED K.Die•er IU3.19
C] @ Projekl ion 150128·30
projeclion 150128·30
>Bran+Luebbe· TITLE I
DOSIERPUMPE/METERING PUMP
Tl TLE 2 NOVADOS H2
DRAll A.IOtOit 19.03.19
CHANGED A.IOtOit OB.U.It IIAT[RIAL IDENT. ·NO. REY. I
APPROVED K.Ditm OB.U.It FORIIAT SCALE SHEET
RELEASED A.IOtOit 08.U.19 A2 I: 5 1/1 DRAIING·NO. GA2 838 7581 0
H2 H2
JJt-
~ \ (Hotor-H21
1 5 2 3
3 2 1 30
CM-029F
(Abschluß-H21
"
CM-029G Anziehdrehmoment = HA
(Hotor-H21 FUr Größe und Werkstoff siehe StUckllstel
4623130 Tlghtenlng torque =HA
For slze and material see parts IIst!
gn,~~
Schraubengröße I Schraubenmaterlall HA
screw - slze I screw - material/ HA
" UNC I B.B I 45 Nm

H2 " UNC I A193BBH I 52 Nm
" UNC I 1.4301 I 13.5 Nm
" UNC I A4/316 I 13.5 Nm
264130
)S UNC I B.B I B3 Nm
--P )S UNC I A193BBH I 91 Nm
3 6 5 21 )S UNC I 1.4301 I 25 Nm
)S UNC I A4/316 I 25 Nm
H6 /B.B I BNm
H6 I A2-70 I SNm
H2 H6 I A4-70 I SNm
CM-029P
1Hotor-H21 5 MB I B.B I 19Nm
MB I A2-70 I 12 Nm
MB I A4-70 I 12 Nm
H10 I B.B I 40 Nm
CM-029CC H10 I A2-70 I 25 Nm
IH2-PI H10 I A4-70 I 25 Nm
CM-029K 2467910
(Hotor-H21 H12 I B.B I 70 Nm
H12 I A2-70 I 42 Nm
H12 I A4-70 I 42 Nm
2 4
IH2-PI
Pos. 7 mit Dichtungsmittel am Gewinde montiert I
7642389 pos. 7 wlth seallng compound at the theat mounted 5 2 22 Bill ATEX-Ausfii'INID • Sehrallbin zur B1futlgung
d1r Kuppll11gsnlbe llllt LocHte 243 gesichert
For ATEX appllc1Hon • Screws for coupllng-hub Ausführung s. Auftrag

11011Hng lrl SICUrld wlth LocHt1 243 deslgn acc. order
(Deckel 8-Seltel
CM-02900
IH2-PI
7 610 94 2 3 8
Version A Version B
53
sw 36
NPT 112"
53
Teil 2 mit Körnerschlägen gesichert

Teil 2 mit Körnerschlägen gesichert Pos.2 secured with center punchmarks
Pos.2 secured with center punchmarks
--
Lt'l
...:t
2
3--
Sitz mit Kugel ~5 (HM) einschlagen Sitz mit Kugel ~5 (HM) einschlagen
seat pounded with globe ~5 HM seat pounded with globe ~5 HM
G 112 G 112
Wenn nicht anders gekennz., alle OberfLangaben als Mittenrauhwerte Ra in ~m.

lf not otherwise designated, roughness average for all surfaces given as Ra in ~m.
Oberfläche DIN ISO 1302 Maße ohne Toler.angaben DIN ISO 2768- m k
surface DIN ISO 1302 Tolerierung DIN ISO 8015
alle Kanten gratfrei 0.05 bis 0.4 For dimensions without tolerances refer to
nach DIN ISO 13715 DIN ISO 2768 - m k
.----"""T----""T"---1all edges free of burs 0.05 up to 0.4 Tolerancing DIN ISO 8015
DESIGNE 06.01.89 according to DIN ISO 13715
BRAN-tlUEBBE TITLEI BAUSATZ ENTLUFTUNGS-
TITLE 2 ASSEMBL y
DRAWN N.Kuhtz REV. 1
CHANGED V.MIIdenberger
APPRDVED U.Ahl f DRAWING-ND.
RELEASED V.MIIdenber er 01-0559
a a a a
a
Unterlegscheiben (Fabrikat NORD-LOCK) als

Potentialausgleichsverbindung.
Anzahl, Anordnung und Größe gem. Maschinenausführung.
Bei Montage / Demontage beachten.
a Washer (make: NORD-LOCK) for potential equalisation.
a Quantity, arrangement and size acc. to machine.
Take care of during assembling / dismantling.
a a
a
a a a
Pos. 090
Pos. 090
Kunden-Anschluß Potentialausgleich / Erdung
Connection for customers equipotential bonding / earthing system
Anzugsmomente / Recommended torque values [Nm]

DRAWN H. ROHLFS 21.12.2004 TITLE 1 POTENTIALAUSGLEICHSVERBINDUNGEN REV. 1
M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M14 M16 M18
CHANGED H. ROHLFS 06.06.2005 TITLE 2 POTENTIAL EQUALISATION JUNCTIONS DRAWING-NO.
1,8 3,6 6,2 14,9 28 50 80 123 171
M20 M22 M24 M27 M30 M33 M36 M39 M42 APPROVED H. ROHLFS 06.06.2005 FORMAT SCALE SHEET
DI-0744
241 334 415 604 820 1100 1430 1840 2316 RELEASED H. ROHLFS 06.06.2005 A4 X:X 1/1
NPT -Gewinde NPT -Gewinde G-Gewinde
a a a
für Rohr 6 AD für Rohr 6 AD

for pipe 6 OD for pipe 6 OD
Version x a Rohr AD I pipe OD Version x a Rohr AD I pipe OD

für Rohr 6 AD E 114 NPT 6 mm Swagelok A G114 6 mm Swagelok
for pipe 6 OD
F 112 NPT 6 mm Swagelok B G112 6 mm Swagelok
Version G 114 NPT 114" Swagelok ( G114 114" Swagelok

x a Rohr AD I pipe OD
H 1/2 NPT 114" Swagelok D G112 114" Swagelok
K 114 NPT 6 mm Swagelok
L 112 NPT 6 mm Swagelok
M 114 NPT 114" Swagelok Kom.-Nr. I Job-No.
Normung x siehe Auftrag
N 112 NPT 114" Swagelok Uroriginal/ Original-No.
acc. to order
Dl-0743
DESIGNE
BRAN-tlUEBBE rtrLEI Bausatz f. Uberwachungsger. Swagelok

TITLE 2 assembly I Swagelok
DRAWN H.Rohlfs REV. 0
CHANGED C.Hormann
APPROVED H.Rohlfs DRAWING-NO.
RELEASED C.Hormann Dl-0776
Option 1
A
Manometer/pressure gauge
Schalter/switch
(z.B./ e.g. WIKA) Option 2
(z.B./ e.g. FEMA)
( Option 3 Option 4 Option 5

•
30 -..!!:::!:p,:Jtlill~~
10
8-..""._-
41-45
2122 31
Schalter/switch
(z.B./ e.g. United Electric Option 6
•
H100/ J120) 30
33 1 2
• siehe Maschinenstückliste
refer to pump partslist
:. .
0
Ei
_........
. ..
..
M::
....
:!
1-;
.
-.. ...
';':i
. ...
......... =
w w
0
0 z·:
.-..
z:;l
=:i:
.... :.
-
a:~
0
~.!
a:.,.
a.. .! i
.
....
·= •
.e....=•
.!
i:
·-... .
~ 0
-!':.
t
:;
. ..
.4! 'I
!! 0
~~
..
·-..........
~
...e
...
PROE ·IIODH GETRIEBLH2·00

28.11.00
~
z
BRAN+LUEBBE TITLE I
Getriebe
•...
.: DRAIN J.Finh 02.11.01
TITLE 2
IIATER IAL
GEAR
REV. I
....0~ CHANGED
...a.. APPROVED J.Finh 23.11.01 FORIIAT SC ALE DRAWING·NO. H2- 05
'
RELEASED J.Finh 18.12.01 A4 1:5
PROI·IIOOIL
01.05.01
"'z BRAN+LUEBBE IITL[ I
Adapter
•"'
...:
';>
DRAIN J.Fioh 25.02.02
FIFLI 2 STOKE ADJUSTMENT
...
0
CHANGED MArERIAL RIY. I
"'0.. APPROYED D.Peterseo 02.01.02 FORMAT DRAIING·NO. H2- OA5
RELEASED D.Peterseo 02.01.02 A3
106 113
r r
C Al
X
Ausfuhrung AIDESIGNA '
A1ialspiel:
0.111111
AXIAL CLEARANCE:
0.111111
X
3:5
Ausfuhrung BI DESIGN B
mi I Dichtungs11iltel eingesefl
ritted 1ilh seal ing compoUid
B-B
c-c
t•
••I•
~!
l'
••
..
II
!•
-~f
...! ,
:,II
j
..r•••
I!
I!
rf >Bran+Luebbe- Bas i1getr iebe H1
ba1ic earH2
f"1 rfh\ Pre~eklio1 ISOI21·3G
-c:::::fW prOJICiitl I$0121·3G
:i
·-·
111.6
!.II ..,, •.~.H1·0B1
Al
..
~
._
ii H2-00
H2-03
.
i !:
•• H2-04
·~
·=...·= H2-05
..........• -•
i!
I
I
-;: I
I
-I
I
I I --------------------,
1
1 -=._ :
:---- 1~ :---------1---
1 -- I I
J I --------------------·1
feste Kolbeneinspannung schwimmende Kolbeneinspannung

fixed plunger adjustment self-aligning plunger adjustment
1:2 1:2 0.05-0. I
Spiel eingestel II
5.2 5. I mit Pos: 6.~ und 6.5
cleoronce odjusled
by pos. 6.~ ond 6.5
Kolben---+---e
plunger
Kolben Kreuzkopf Kreuzkopf

plunger crosshead crosshead
PROE ·IIOD[LDUMMY.H3·081.M.IIPPEL 6.3 6. I
PROE ·IIODH 10L8[N[INSPAINUIG.H2
PROE ·IIODH GETRIEBLH2·00
DESIGMED D.Pelersu 22.02.01
~
z
>Bran+Luebbe® Tl TLE I
Verbinder
iii TITLE 2 connector
c DRAIN JJi•te 31.08.01
a::
a
CHAMGED I.Shr• 23.05.12 MATERIAL IDENT. ·NO. REY. 5
....0
a:: APPROYED D.Pelersu 30.07.12
~
FORMAT
u
SCAL[
I :2
SH[[T
I/I
DRAIING·NO. H2- 0EI
RELEASED D.Pelersu 30.07.12
--------------------,--------_j
L------t---------------------------_j
~ ~o_qu.:_z:a_J!!.!.!..!,J~_J!!.ll~~n!....
Joqg-~·z :~lnJpun1nz
Anziehdreh11oment: I
lighlening lorque:
--@-- '
~ 60 Nm
~
60 Nm
111.8
X
2: I
mu. ßetriebsdruck: 50 bor

mox. operoling pressure: 50 bor
I
I! max. Pruefdruct:
max. lest pressure:
75 bor
75 bor
rf >Bran+Luebbr
1 2flt
Nembranpuko 15x30 Hub
diaphrampu11p had
1-E3--@~~:1:::::: :=m::~
:i
·-·
111.0
!.II API'IOIED l.lllli!ll'
IELEISED I.LIIIi!lll Al ..,, •.~.HD1-0-08
"'iii
:;:::
c:
GI
:2.
-::~:
c:..a
oe
uo.::J
.....C..GI
GI ..Cl
..>:..Cl
_g_3
......
IIIC:
:::>lU
E'-
111-
t;o
""
GI+-
..... c:
C:GI
0111
uc:
GIO
.c::U
1-C:
.GI
::<:+-
LLJ.C=
t- e ._
oo.::J"
z GI GI
..a.C::
>-..Cl ....
1 3 2
a::
GI+-
:::1 :::1 I
< -+.<:::
'0
1- c:+-
!:!::! ~·:;
O::lll-a
Q. 0 GI
o~:t:
a::: ~·e
a.. ,. '-
.._GI
Glc..
-~~
c..o
oc:
W/~ V////~
'-GI
c..._
c:ta
.2 Ul
I
• ~*
,.._
..._ GI
~"
'\.
--
e:::>
'-111
oo
c:u
·- 111
.":a
.E""CC
--- o-------
"' " "
----1~ - - - - :
" 1\.
------
'\. " '\.
r------- t- --
.....tac:,.
E!! ~~
""-"~~
uc:
=-
c:'-
·):GI
- 0..
V'///~
..._r " I
~ .... 0
V//ß.
taC::
'-
"Cl
111
\
\
I "\ 0
:c
1- \ I "\
"\ I "
" i "
I "
DESIGNED W.Naundorf 14.01.86
I
BRAN+lUEBBE TITLE 1 Bausatz KH
I.!J
z
): DRAWN
TITLE 2 assembly KH
K.Sturm 08.09.99
<
c:: MATERIAL
Cl
I
CHANGED K.Sturm 08.09.99 IIDENT.-NO. IREV. 0
Cl
<
u APPROVED U.Ahlf 08.09.99 FORMAT SCALE SHEET DRA WING-NO.
I
RELEASED K.Sturm 09.09.99 A4 2:1 1/1 JK-013
os.ou•
>Bran+Luebbe· IITL[I
Membran Mehrlogen-
DRAll I. Iiiie 23.01.03
IITLE 2 diophrogm sond•ich-
CHAIIGED J.·u.n ..seo 22.09.1' MATERIAL REY. I
APPROYED H.Lodiges 22.09.1' TORilAI
RELEASED H.Lodiges 22.09.1' A3 DRAIIIIG·IIO. PN- 0186
..
~
._
ii
.
i !:
••
·~
·=...·=
..........• -•
i!
-;:
14
PROE ·IIODEL Y[ITIL.PY32·0128

22.07.94
Tl Tl[ I
~
z
>Bran+Luebbe® Ve nt i I
iii TITL[ 2 volve
c DRAIN J. ·U. U011st1 24.01.01
a::
a CHAIG[D IIAT[RIAL ID[NT. ·NO. R[Y. 2
....0
a:: APPROY[D H.Lodiges 06.06.02 FORMAT SCAL[ SH[[T
~
RHUSED H.Lodiges 06.06.02 u 2: I I/I
DRAIING·IO. PV32- 0128
.
.!
.: .
-...........
~~
.
.. -
"'.!
:~.....
.-..... .....
I';
--
...,
...
...
-=
....
0 ... ·- ~
-~~-
.....
Cl: :1 -
c::
..
..., . ·-
....
-
a=
Q.
';" ~
~
•
..
~
2:i
a..
...·-.........
~ ~
~:.
.!
~
-
•
~
i!.
.. ~
.!':
·- :;
·-:• •...
';; .
..=~
...e·-
~
.~:
-...
PROE ·IIOOH Y[NTIL.[NTL.Y·0173

09.09. 92
C»
z:
BRAN+LUEBBE TITLE I Ve nt i I Entlueftungs-
•
c
a:
~
DRAIN
CHANGED
C.Huhte
J. ·U. Th011sen
OS.OI.OO
24.10.08
Tl JL[ 2
MATERIAL
valve venling
IDENT.·NO. REY. 4
....0
a: APPROYED H.Ladiges 27.10.08 FORMAT SCAL[ SH[[T
CL.
DRAWING·NO. V- 0 I 73
'
RHEASED H.Ladiges 27.10.08 A4 2: I I/I
.•
.: .
!i
- ..
.......
.:!
-::
....
.
1-;
-..
. ..
";':i
..
.......... =
w w
0
0 z·:
-J;
... ·-
GI: :: -
......
c::
- ..·-
...... ~
a:: ~-:
a.. 0 -
g:i
a.
.....
! i.
·= ..
.....
e•
.! :
i :
..
~
.!~
0
·-.. w
. ..
.~ 'I
~·
·-.....
~~
... ~
...
e
...
...
PROE ·IIODH NACH.YENT.Y.0200

13.11.90
~
z
BRAN+LUEBBE Tl HE I
Ve nt i I Nachfuell-
•...
-c DRAWN H. Hi II ig 28.08.00
TI HE 2
MATERIAL
valve replenishing
REY. 0
....0~ CHANGED
...
a.. APPROVED H.Lodiges OU6.02 FORIIAT SCALE DRAWING·NO. V- 0200
'
RHEASED H.Lodiges OU6.02 A4 2: I
Page 1
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS
Customer: C5600 Information

SPX Flow Techology (India)Pvt.Ltd Type: BL_PUMP_NOVADOS_H2
Address G-72,73, RIICO Industrial Area Customer Order No.: 2838758 . 000010
MANSAROVA Serial No. : 12001224
302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet : GA283875810
INDIA
Leve Qty Item Description/Remarks Drawing Base Material Number UoM

l Number Material
1 1,000 0001 MOTOR 0,37 1400 415S ExnAIIT3 VARIOUS BL2838758-10-1 EA
1 1,000 0002 GEAR BOX Novados H2 VARIOUS GEAR_NOVADOS_H2_A EA
1 1,000 0003 CONNECTOR H2-GETR.-MOT. CM-029 H VARIOUS BL243157S EA
B5-71/160 (----)
1 1,000 0004 ASSEMBLY H2-GETR./DECKEL STAND. CM-029 O VARIOUS BL243253S EA
1 1,000 0005 CONNECTOR PUKO-GETR. / TYP B H2-0E1 VARIOUS BL427211S EA
M.ADAPTERRING/FESTE EINSPANNUNG
1 1,000 0009 PUMP HEAD NOVADOS H2 VARIOUS BL_PUMPHEAD_H2_A EA
1 1,000 0090 EARTHING, GROUNDING BOLZEN VARIOUS BL079856S EA
STANDARD
M10 (F.GETRIEBE + GRUNDRAHMEN)
1 1,000 0090 EARTHING, GROUNDING DI-0744 VARIOUS BL155437S EA
POTENTIALAUSGLEICH
H2/G3H-GETRIEBE (NORD-LOCK
SCHEIBEN)
1 1,000 0099 WARNINGS SCHI-1031 VARIOUS BL155604S EA
1 1,000 0100 PLATE, LABEL API SCHI-1061 STAINLESS BL155485 EA
STEEL
E/D LARGE/GROSS/STANDARD
Page 2
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0002 GEAR BOX Novados H2 VARIOUS GEAR_NOVADOS_H2_A EA
2 1,000 0030 GEAR BOX Novados H2 Pneumatisch H2-05 VARIOUS GEAR_PNEUMAT_H2_A EA

Page 3
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
2 1,000 0030 GEAR BOX Novados H2 Pneumatisch H2-05 VARIOUS GEAR_PNEUMAT_H2_A EA
3 1,000 0001 GEAR BOX STANDARD H2-0B2 VARIOUS BL427228S EA

H2-02B-33/2
3 1,000 0002 ASSEMBLY EL.PNEUM.FERNVERST. H2-0P1 B VARIOUS BL654357S EA
3 1,000 0003 ADAPTER H2-0A5 VARIOUS BL427080S EA
Page 4
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0001 GEAR BOX STANDARD H2-0B2 VARIOUS BL427228S EA
H2-02B-33/2
4 1,000 0001 HOUSING H2-1 EN-GJL-250 BL650085 EA

(GG25)
;; / /
4 1,000 0002 BUSHING, SOCKET H2-11 EN-GJL-250 BL420715 EA
(GG25)
4 1,000 0003 CROSSHEAD H2-9 1.0503 BL420193 EA
(C45)
4 1,000 0004 PIN 16 M6 X 36 DIN 7 11SMnPb30 BL102009 EA
+C
(9SMnPb28
K)
4 1,000 0005 CONNECTING ROD H2-52 EN-GJS- BL322960 EA
400-15
(GGG40)
4 1,000 0006 ECCENTRIC J-8 EN-GJS- BL226009 EA
600-3
(GGG60)
4 1,000 0007 PIVOT J-9 1.7131 BL227601 EA
(16MNCR5)
4 1,000 0008 CRANK SHAFT J-357 EN-GJS- BL225002 EA
600-3
(GGG60)
4 1,000 0009 DRIVER, TAPPET H2-31 EN-GJS- BL225019 EA
600-3
(GGG60)
4 1,000 0010 PIN 5 H8 X 16 DIN 7 11SMnPb30 BL102116 EA
+C
(9SMnPb28
K)
4 1,000 0011 WORM WHEEL 33/2 J-403 CC484K BL223007 EA
(2.1060.03)
4 1,000 0012 WORM SHAFT 33/2 K-70 1.7131 BL224037 EA
(16MNCR5)
4 1,000 0016 GASKET, SEALING H2-4 CORK BL420164 EA
(RGC 210)
4 1,000 0017 SCREENING H2-6 STEEL BL420165 EA
4 1,000 0018 SCREW, BOLT M 18 X 1,5 Plastics BL155118 EA
(black)
TYP L1.0406-52
Page 5
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 2,000 0030 BEARING 6203 DIN 625 OTHER BL120003 EA
4 1,000 0031 BEARING 51204 DIN 711 OTHER BL120012 EA
4 1,000 0032 BEARING 6303.2ZR DIN 625 OTHER BL120096 EA
RILLENKUGELL.FETTGESCHM.
4 2,000 0035 PARALLEL KEY A 5 X 5 X 26 DIN 6885 ST50-1K BL100101 EA
F.K,J,KH-GETR.
4 2,000 0040 WASHER, DISC 28 X 40 X 2 DIN 988 STEEL BL101552 EA
4 1,000 0041 WASHER, DISC 8,4 DIN 6340 STEEL BL101711 EA
4 2,000 0042 WASHER, DISC 28 X 40 X 0,1 DIN 988 STEEL BL101519 EA
4 1,000 0045 RING J-358 1.0503 BL227050 EA
(C45)
4 1,000 0046 WASHER, DISC 37 X 47 X 2,5 DIN 988 FEDERSTA BL101713 EA
HL
4 8,000 0048 WASHER, DISC 6,4 DIN 125 A4-70 BL101504 EA
4 1,000 0049 WASHER, DISC 28X 40 X1 DIN 988 STEEL BL101545 EA
4 2,000 0051 SCREW, BOLT M 8 X 25 ISO 4017 8.8 BL100247 EA
DIN933 ALT
4 8,000 0053 SCREW, BOLT M 6 X 16 ISO 4017 A4-70 BL180028 EA
DIN933 ALT
4 2,000 0054 PLUG M10 PE BL100965 EA
4 1,000 0055 RETAINING RING, CIRCLIP 47 X 1,75 DIN 472 FEDERSTA BL101714 EA
HL
HL
4 1,000 0061 SCREW, BOLT G 3/4 DIN 910 A4-70 BL100108 EA
HL
4 2,000 0065 SEAL RING A 17 X 40 X 7 DIN 3760 FPM BL150513 EA
(FKM,VITO
N)
F.GETR.+PUKO
4 1,000 0067 SEAL RING A 45 X 60 X 8 DIN 3760 FPM BL150518 EA
(FKM,VITO
N)
F.GETR.+PUKO
4 1,000 0069 SEAL RING C 26 X 32 DIN 7603 FD12 BL150235 EA
Page 6
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0075 O-RING 66,68X 3,53 NBR BL152215 EA
DIN933 ALT
4 3,000 0092 PLUG F. 10MM GPN300F5 PE BL180718 EA
4 1,000 0096 SCREW, BOLT G 1/2, 100MBAR GN552.1(G Plastics BL653665 EA
ANTER) (orange)
GN-552.1-31-G1/2-100
4 1,000 0104 SEAL RING A 21 X 26 DIN 7603 CU BL150060 EA
4 1,000 0105 SCREW, BOLT G 1/2 DIN 910 5.8 BL100105 EA
4 1,000 0106 INSPECTION GLASS G 3/4 A18 ROT GN543.2- Plastics BL155123 EA
18-G3/4-A-
RT
MIT REFLEKTOR
4 1,000 0107 NIPPLE G 3/4-20 316/1.4571 BL170295 EA
4 1,000 0108 CAP 20X30 GPN211 TPE BL420959 EA
4 1,000 0109 SCREW, BOLT G 1/4 X8 DIN 910 A4-70 BL053498 EA
VERSCHLUß LATERNE/DICHTUNG
S.LANGTEXT
4 1,000 0110 SEAL RING A 14 X 18 DIN 7603 CU BL150062 EA
4 1,000 0111 ADAPTER H2-51 1.4305 BL422017 EA
4 1,000 0113 GASKET, SEALING 27 X 33 X 2 CRO-3/4 PVDF BL076993 EA
165196 = TEILE-NR.
Page 7
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0002 ASSEMBLY EL.PNEUM.FERNVERST. H2-0P1 B VARIOUS BL654357S EA
4 1,000 0001 INTERMEDIATE PIECE H2-45 EN-GJL-250 BL220114 EA

(GG25)
4 1,000 0002 CYLINDER J-365 ST52 BL220038 EA
4 1,000 0003 ROD, SHAFT J-366 1.4571 BL220039 EA
4 1,000 0004 PISTON, PLUNGER J-369 11SMNPB3 BL220041 EA
0
(1.0718,9S
MNPB28)
4 1,000 0005 PISTON, PLUNGER J-368 C 45 BL220040 EA
4 1,000 0006 RING J-371 1.0503 BL220043 EA
(C45)
4 1,000 0007 PISTON, PLUNGER J-370 11SMNPB3 BL220042 EA
0
(1.0718,9S
MNPB28)
4 1,000 0008 COVER J-372 1.0503 BL220044 EA
(C45)
4 1,000 0009 ASSEMBLY G 1/8 JK-013 1.4571 BL429016S EA
F.PNEUM.VERSTELLBAUSÄTZE
4 1,000 0010 RING J-375 1.4571 BL220047 EA
4 1,000 0011 SCALE J-373 1.4571 BL220045 EA
4 1,000 0012 SUPPORT J-374 STEEL BL220046 EA
4 1,000 0014 LEVER J-376 OTHER BL220048 EA
4 1,000 0015 BOLT CS-77 1.4571 BL229569 EA
4 1,000 0016 WASHER, DISC S 10 FEDERSTA BL101730 EA
HL
4 1,000 0017 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION WE18LR STEEL BL170154 EA
4 5,000 0018 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION GE6LR ST/A3C BL170245 EA
4 1,000 0019 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION R1/8 KEG. WE8LLR ST/A3K BL170246 EA
4 1,000 0020 VALVE RHZ6LRED STEEL BL170145 EA
4 1,000 0022 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION T6L ST/A3C BL170146 EA
DIN933 ALT
DIN933 ALT
DIN933 ALT
4 1,000 0026 SETSCREW M 6 X 8 DIN 916 A4-70 BL102155 EA
Page 8
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0027 GASKET, SEALING J-377 FD3 BL150338 EA
4 1,000 0029 PLUG VKA18CF STEEL BL155124 EA
4 2,000 0030 CLAMPING DEVICE 18 X 40 STEEL BL100543 EA
4 1,000 0031 SCRAPER 18 X 28 X 7 NBR 90 BL150339 EA
4 1,000 0032 O-RING 18 X 2 NBR BL152004 EA
4 4,000 0033 O-RING 64 X 3 NBR BL152064 EA
4 5,000 0034 RING 18,20X 3,53 NBR BL152342 EA
4 2,000 0035 RING 59,70X 5,33 NBR BL152343 EA
4 3,000 0036 BUSHING, SOCKET 18 X 20 X 15 MB1815DU OTHER BL150340 EA
4 1,500 0037 TUBE, PIPE 6 X 1 M.ZEUGN.3.1 1.4571 BL840172 M
4 0,500 0038 TUBE, PIPE 8 X 1 1.4571 BL825158 M
HL
4 8,000 0040 SEAL RING A 10 X 13,5 DIN 7603 CU BL150063 EA
4 1,000 0041 CONTROLLER EL/PNEUM. IP65 SRI986 OTHER BL074385 EA
EING.0/4-20MA, AUSG.4-20MA EEXIA
ATEX
4 1,000 0042 SETSCREW M 8 X 60 DIN 551 5.8 BL102018 EA
4 1,000 0043 NUT M 8 (A3D) ISO 4032 8/A3D BL100282 EA
DIN934 ALT
4 1,000 0044 NUT M 8 DIN 1587 STEEL BL100430 EA
4 2,000 0045 SEAL RING DIN 7603 FD12 BL150231 EA
4 2,000 0046 SCREW, BOLT G 1/8IN DIN 908 A4-70 BL100097 EA
4 4,000 0047 SCREW, BOLT M 6 X 25 DIN 938 8.8 BL100554 EA
4 4,000 0048 NUT M 6 ISO 4032 8/ZC (ZN) BL100630 EA
DIN934 ALT
Page 9
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0009 ASSEMBLY G 1/8 JK-013 1.4571 BL429016S EA
F.PNEUM.VERSTELLBAUSÄTZE
5 1,000 0001 PIN J-363 1.4571 BL220056 EA

5 1,000 0002 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION TE8LLR 1.4571 BL170253 EA
5 1,000 0003 O-RING 3,1 X 1,6 NBR BL152108 EA
Page 10
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0003 ADAPTER H2-0A5 VARIOUS BL427080S EA
4 1,000 0001 COVER H2-34 1.0503 BL225035 EA

(C45)
F.TIEFTEMP.(-40°C)
4 1,000 0002 BUSHING, SOCKET H2-35 1.0503 BL420366 EA
(C45)
DIN933 ALT
4 1,000 0017 PIN 5 H8 X 16 DIN 7 11SMnPb30 BL102116 EA
+C
(9SMnPb28
K)
4 1,000 0027 O-RING 95 X 4 NBR80 BL080629 EA
4 3,000 0029 GASKET, SEALING H2-18 ALUMINIUM BL420169 EA
(Al)
4 2,000 0034 PLUG F. 10MM GPN300F5 PE BL180718 EA
Page 11
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0003 CONNECTOR H2-GETR.-MOT. CM-029 H VARIOUS BL243157S EA
B5-71/160 (----)
2 1,000 0001 COUPLING KLT14 TT16 BOWEX 24 PA/STEEL BL242109 EA

BOWEX 24
2 4,000 0002 SCREW, BOLT M8 x 35 DIN938 A4-70 BL101821 EA
2 8,000 0003 NUT M 8 ISO 4032 A4-70 BL100283 EA
DIN934 ALT
2 1,000 0030 SPACING RING 16,1 X 4 VARIOUS BL654344S EA
Page 12
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
2 1,000 0030 SPACING RING 16,1 X 4 VARIOUS BL654344S EA
3 1,000 0001 SPACING RING 16,1X 4 DI-853 STEEL BL000583 EA

Page 13
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0004 ASSEMBLY H2-GETR./DECKEL STAND. CM-029 O VARIOUS BL243253S EA
2 4,000 0002 WASHER, DISC 8,4 DIN 125 A4-70 BL101505 EA

DIN933 ALT
2 1,000 0005 O-RING 102 X 4 NBR BL152024 EA
2 1,000 0022 COVER H2-91 EN-GJL-200 BL420919 EA
(GG20)
2 1,000 0023 SCREW, BOLT M 8 X 1 DIN 910 5.8 BL651746 EA
2 1,000 0024 SEAL RING A 8 X 11,5 DIN 7603 CU BL150714 EA
Page 14
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0005 CONNECTOR PUKO-GETR. / TYP B H2-0E1 VARIOUS BL427211S EA
M.ADAPTERRING/FESTE EINSPANNUNG
2 1,000 4.0 ADAPTER H2-17 1.4408 BL420168 EA

PUMPENKOPF/PUMPENHALTER (CrNiMo)
2 1,000 5.1 TENSION ELEMENT 12 X 15 STEEL BL100490 EA
2 1,000 5.2 NUT SI-25 1.0503 BL390314 EA
(C45)/ZN
Page 15
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0009 PUMP HEAD NOVADOS H2 VARIOUS BL_PUMPHEAD_H2_A EA
2 1,000 0000 MAIN PARTS 25x30 (50bar) HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL674033S EA

2 1,000 0002 FRONT COVER 25 X 20 / 20/25 X 30 PN-3100A 1.4571 BL323140 EA
2 2,000 0005 VALVE STANDARD PV32-0128 1.4581 BL062062 EA
, DICHTG.FD10
2 1,000 0011 DICHTUNGSSET 25 X 30 ( 50BAR) H2 .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333CS EA
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F STANDARD
2 1,000 0055 DIAPHRAGM MONITORING MAX. 100 BAR DI-0787 A VARIOUS BL655264V0001S EA
2 1,000 0060 CONNECTING PIECE 1/2IN 300LBS ANSI PN-1785 1.4571 BL059298 EA
B16.5
/PHC_004/B=25/A=106
2 1,000 0070 CONNECTING PIECE 1/2IN 300LBS ANSI PN-994 1.4571 BL078174 EA
B16.5
/ PHC_004 / PN-2171A
Page 16
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
2 1,000 0000 MAIN PARTS 25x30 (50bar) HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL674033S EA
3 1,000 0001 HYDRAULIC HOUSING 25 X 20/30 50bar PN-3110 GGC-FP BL320459 EA

3 1,000 0010 DIAPHRAGM, MEMBRANE D=121 PN-0186 PTFE BL380278S EA
(TFM)/1.430
1
25 X 30 HUB
3 1,000 0013 PIN PN-2762 1.7225 BL303540 EA
(42CRMO4)
3 1,000 0015 PISTON, PLUNGER 25 30HUB PN-3102 1.4462 BL323162 EA
3 1,000 0020 LANTERN RING 25 PN-3111 1.4571 BL323142 EA
3 1,000 0027 RESERVOIR PN-1695 316L BL320143 EA
3 1,000 0028 O-RING 68 X 2 NBR70 BL152258 EA
3 1,000 0029 GASKET, SEALING PN-1702 FD3 BL303209 EA
3 1,000 0030 COVER F. OELRESERVOIR PN-2261 A 1.4571 BL059557 EA
M.BO.G3/8 (F.GN552)
3 1,000 0031 REPLENISHING VALVE V-0200 1.4571 BL010097 EA
3 1,000 0032 VENT VALVE M16 X 1,5 V-0173 1.4571 BL542517 EA
F.MEMBRANPUMPENKOPF
ÖLKREISLAUF
3 1,000 0033 CAP M 18 (M 16 DIN 2510) TSW27-1- PE-LD BL011631 EA
G82
3 1,000 0033 OVERFLOW VALVE 8 - 80 BAR MVE4F VARIOUS BL545010 EA
3 1,000 0034 SPRING 0,5 X 7 X 14,5 X 6,5 PN-3240 1.4571 BL190908 EA
3 1,000 0035 OIL DIPSTICK G3/8 STABL. 50MM(KURZ) PN-2920 A POLYAMID BL155391 EA
E
GN552-31-G3/8-B-2 STANDARD
3 6,000 0037 SCREW, BOLT M 16 X 70 (A3D) DIN 939 8.8/A3D BL100388 EA
3 6,000 0038 WASHER, DISC A 17 (ZN) DIN 125 ST/ZC (ZN) BL101690 EA
3 6,000 0039 NUT M 16 (A3D) ISO 4032 8/A3D BL100293 EA
DIN934 ALT
3 4,000 0040 SCREW, BOLT M 10 X 70 DIN 938 A4-70 BL093185 EA
3 4,000 0041 NUT M 10 DIN 934 A4-70 BL079661 EA
3 4,000 0044 NUT M 10 DIN 934 A4-70 BL079661 EA
3 2,000 0047 COTTER PIN 2 X 12 DIN 94 A2-70 BL102182 EA
3 1,000 0048 SEAL RING A 10 X 14 X 1 DIN 7603 CU BL150287 EA
Page 17
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0050 SCREW, BOLT M 10 X 1 PN-2509 1.4462 BL170016 EA
3 1,000 0051 CAP RUBBER BL155047 EA
3 1,000 0054 ADAPTER F.DIAGNOSE STANDARD 2103-O1- 1.0718/NBR BL700085 EA
18.00
PUKO-SEITIG
3 1,000 0058 O-RING 117 X 2 NBR 72 BL152305 EA
3 1,000 0059 SEAL RING 38,5 X 44 X 2 FD10 BL120206 EA
3 1,000 0060 SCREW, BOLT C M38 X1,5 DIN 7604 5.8 BL010099 EA
3 1,000 0060 CAP M 12 (DIN2510) SW22-1- PE-LD BL099117 EA
G24/H10
F.MUTTER
3 1,000 0061 EXPANDER OTHER BL155026 EA
MB 850-060
3 1,000 0062 EXPANDER STEEL BL055905 EA
MB 850-090
3 6,000 0066 CAP M 16 SW24-2- PE-LD BL076786 EA
G29/H10
F.MUTTER + SCHEIBE
Page 18
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0010 DIAPHRAGM, MEMBRANE D=121 PN-0186 PTFE BL380278S EA
(TFM)/1.430
1
25 X 30 HUB
4 2,000 0001 DIAPHRAGM, MEMBRANE 121 X 0,5 PN-2866 TFM/PTFE BL380276 EA

4 2,000 0002 INTERMEDIATE RING D=121 PN-2867 1.4301 BL380277 EA
Page 19
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0031 REPLENISHING VALVE V-0200 1.4571 BL010097 EA
4 1,000 0001 REPLENISHING VALVE FED-03204 V-0200 STEEL BL010097S EA

Page 20
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0001 REPLENISHING VALVE FED-03204 V-0200 STEEL BL010097S EA
5 1,000 0001 HOUSING V-503 1.4571 BL341670 EA

5 1,000 0002 BALL 7 DIN 5401 1.3541 BL120504 EA
GRADE 100
5 1,000 0003 NUT M 12 X 1,5 DIN 439 04 BL100694 EA
5 1,000 0004 O-RING 7,5 X 1,5 FPM70 BL152354 EA
(FKM,VITO
N)
Page 21
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0032 VENT VALVE M16 X 1,5 V-0173 1.4571 BL542517 EA
F.MEMBRANPUMPENKOPF
ÖLKREISLAUF
4 1,000 0010 VENT VALVE M16X1,5 V-0173 VARIOUS BL542517S EA

Page 22
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0010 VENT VALVE M16X1,5 V-0173 VARIOUS BL542517S EA
5 1,000 0001 HOUSING V-426 1.4571 BL341690 EA

5 1,000 0002 INSERT V-372 1.4034(X46 BL341673 EA
Cr13
AISI420)
5 1,000 0003 NUT B M 12 X 1 DIN439 04/ZN BL101052 EA
FORM B
5 1,000 0004 BALL 7 DIN 5401 1.3541 BL120504 EA
GRADE 100
5 1,000 0005 BACK-UP/SUPPORTING RING 9 X 5 X1 SRA9-205- PTFE BL150202 EA
1,0
GESCHLITZT
5 1,000 0006 O-RING 4,3 X 2,4 FPM BL152021 EA
(FKM,VITO
N)
5 1,000 0007 SPRING 0,3 X 3 X 10 X 8,5 1.4571 BL190007 EA
DRUCK 1,0 BAR
Page 23
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
, DICHTG.FD10
3 1,000 0001 VALVE PV32-0128 1.4581 BL062062S EA

, DICHTG.FD10
Page 24
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0001 VALVE PV32-0128 1.4581 BL062062S EA
, DICHTG.FD10
4 1,000 0001 HOUSING PV32-250 1.4581 BL058601 EA

4 1,000 0002 HOUSING PV32-249 1.4581 BL062067 EA
4 1,000 0003 VALVE SEAT PV32-247 1.4571 BL062068 EA
4 2,000 0004 BALL 3/4IN (19,05) ISO 3290 1.4401 BL120517 EA
G28
GRADE 28 (DIN5401)
4 2,000 0005 GASKET, SEALING 23,5X 28,5X 1 FD10 BL150300 EA
Page 25
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
2 1,000 0011 DICHTUNGSSET 25 X 30 ( 50BAR) H2 .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333CS EA
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F STANDARD
3 4,000 0006 GASKET, SEALING 21,5 X 31,5 X 2 FD10 BL150120 EA

3 1,000 0023 GROOVED RING, SLOTRING 25 X 34,46 X PE/NBR BL050091 EA
5,95
3 1,000 0024 GUIDE BAND 25 X 28 X 5,6 MT64/513 BL050097 EA
3 1,000 0025 SEAL RING A 25 X 40 X7 DIN 3760 FPM BL074918 EA
(FKM,VITO
N)
F.GETR.+ PUKO
3 1,000 0026 O-RING 66 X 2 NBR BL152178 EA
Page 26
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
2 1,000 0055 DIAPHRAGM MONITORING MAX. 100 BAR DI-0787 A VARIOUS BL655264V0001S EA
3 1,000 0001 ASSEMBLY ENTL- G 1/2A-1/2 NPTI DI-0559 A 1.4571 BL055999 EA

ENTLÜFTUNGSBAUSATZ
3 1,000 0002 GASKET, SEALING G 1/2 9090819 CU BL150200 EA
3 1,000 0004 GLAND, SCREW CONNECTION 1/4 OD-1/2 SS-400-1-8 316 BL059218 EA
NPTM
3 0,500 0008 TUBE, PIPE 1/4INOD X 0,028IN (CA. 6 X 0 316 BL052449 M
3 1,000 0010 ASSEMBLY 1/2 NPTF - 1/4IN OD DI-0776 H 1.4571 BL652195S EA
SWAGELOK
M.BEF.MUTTER M22 /
F.ÜBERWACHUNGSGERÄT
3 1,000 0030 SUPPORT F. ÜBERWACHUNGSGERÄTE DI-4458 1.4571 BL652170 EA
STANDARD
UNIVERSAL / F. ALLE GETRIEBE
3 1,000 0042 WASHER, DISC 10,7 X 16,0 M10 NL10SS A4-70 BL652038 EA
NORD-LOCK
3 1,000 0050 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 5..100bar EJA530E 316L BL662192 EA
1/2"NPTM
Page 27
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0001 ASSEMBLY ENTL- G 1/2A-1/2 NPTI DI-0559 A 1.4571 BL055999 EA
ENTLÜFTUNGSBAUSATZ
4 1,000 0001 ASSEMBLY G 1/2 MANO A - 1/2 NPT F DI-0559 A 1.4571 BL055999S EA
ENTLÜFTUNGSBAUSATZ
Page 28
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
4 1,000 0001 ASSEMBLY G 1/2 MANO A - 1/2 NPT F DI-0559 A 1.4571 BL055999S EA
ENTLÜFTUNGSBAUSATZ
5 1,000 0001 HOUSING DI-3369 1.4571 BL055998 EA

5 1,000 0002 COVER DI-3338 1.4571 BL057316 EA
5 1,000 0003 SPRING 0,4 X 4 X 5 X 7 1.4571 BL190011 EA
5 1,000 0004 BALL 5 DIN 5401 1.4401 BL120500 EA
GRADE 300
5 1,000 0005 SCREW, BOLT M 10 X 1 PN-2509 1.4462 BL170016 EA
5 1,000 0006 CAP RUBBER BL155047 EA
Page 29
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0010 ASSEMBLY 1/2 NPTF - 1/4IN OD DI-0776 H 1.4571 BL652195S EA
SWAGELOK
M.BEF.MUTTER M22 /
F.ÜBERWACHUNGSGERÄT
4 1,000 0001 HOUSING F. ENTLÜFTUNGSBAUSATZ DI-4464 E 1.4571 BL652183 EA

1/2IN NPT - 1/4IN SWAGELOK
4 1,000 0002 RING 1/4IN V SS-403-1 OTHER BL064309 EA
VORN
4 1,000 0003 RING 1/4IN H SS-404-1 OTHER BL064310 EA
HINTEN
4 1,000 0004 NUT 1/4IN SS-402-1 316 BL811852 EA
4 1,000 0005 NUT M 22 DIN 936 A4-70 BL652063 EA
FLACHE SECHSKANTMUTTER
Page 30
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0090 EARTHING, GROUNDING DI-0744 VARIOUS BL155437S EA
POTENTIALAUSGLEICH
H2/G3H-GETRIEBE (NORD-LOCK
SCHEIBEN)

NORD-LOCK
NORD-LOCK
NORD-LOCK
NORD-LOCK
NORD-LOCK
Page 1
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

SPX Flow Techology (India)Pvt.Ltd Type: BL_COMMISSION_PART
MANSAROVA Serial No. :
302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
1 3,000 0001 OIL , ISO VG 100 Oel BL790000-1L EA
Castrol Alpha EP 100, Shell Omala 100
1 1,000 0002 OIL , HL ISO VG 10 Oel BL790008-0.25L EA
BP ENERGOL HLP-HM/SHELL MORLINA
10
1 1,000 0003 FUNNEL 120 PLASTIC BL155011 EA
1 1,000 0004 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL 25 X 30 ( .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333WS EA
50BAR) H
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F OELMENGE: 0,30/0,25
Page 2
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

SPX Flow Techology (India)Pvt.Ltd Type: BL_COMMISSION_PART
302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0004 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL 25 X 30 ( .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333WS EA
50BAR) H
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F OELMENGE:
0,30/0,25

5,95
(FKM,VITO
N)
F.GETR.+ PUKO
2 1,000 0026 O-RING 66 X 2 NBR BL152178 EA
Page 1
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

SPX Flow Techology (India)Pvt.Ltd Type: BL_SPARES_ACCESSOR
302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0001 PUMP Plastics BL155139 EA
1 4,000 0002 SCREW, BOLT M 10 X 160 MU DIN 529 3.6/ZC (ZN) BL058569 EA
FORM C
1 1,000 0003 SET OF SPARE PARTS 25 X 30 ( 50BAR) .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333E2S EA
H2
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F/2-JAHRES
ERSATZTEILE
Page 2
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
1 1,000 0003 SET OF SPARE PARTS 25 X 30 ( 50BAR) .HD2-0-08 VARIOUS BL380333E2S EA
H2
HD-2-25SN2-01-N1F/2-JAHRES
ERSATZTEILE

, DICHTG.FD10
2 2,000 0010 DIAPHRAGM, MEMBRANE 121 X 0,5 PN-2866 TFM/PTFE BL380276 EA
5,95
(FKM,VITO
N)
F.GETR.+ PUKO
2 1,000 0026 O-RING 66 X 2 NBR BL152178 EA
2 1,000 0051 CAP RUBBER BL155047 EA
2 1,000 0056 CAP RUBBER BL155047 EA
2 1,000 0058 O-RING 117 X 2 NBR 72 BL152305 EA
Page 3
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
, DICHTG.FD10
3 1,000 0001 VALVE PV32-0128 1.4581 BL062062S EA

, DICHTG.FD10
Page 4
Date: 13.06.2019
PARTS LISTS

302020 JAIPUR
Dimension Sheet :
INDIA

l Number Material
3 1,000 0001 VALVE PV32-0128 1.4581 BL062062S EA
, DICHTG.FD10
4 1,000 0001 HOUSING PV32-250 1.4581 BL058601 EA

4 1,000 0002 HOUSING PV32-249 1.4581 BL062067 EA
4 1,000 0003 VALVE SEAT PV32-247 1.4571 BL062068 EA
4 2,000 0004 BALL 3/4IN (19,05) ISO 3290 1.4401 BL120517 EA
G28
GRADE 28 (DIN5401)
Machine drawings and part lists for the machine can be found in the sections below on the
following pages.
10.1 Motor
10.2 BRAN+LUEBBE Accessories
10.3 External accessories
Fittings and Accessories
If maintenance is required, these documents can be found in Section 10 "Accessories".
Pump fittings and accessories (e.g. drive and technical measurement

monitoring systems) must have an explosion protection designation that
is at least equal to the pump itself.
17.07.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/1

Betriebsanleitung
DE Drehstrommotoren Operating instructions
Instructions de service
EN Three-phase AC Motors Instrucciones para el manejo
Manuale duso
FR Moteurs triphasés Bruksanvisning
Provozní návod
ES Motores trifásicos Äèðåêöèÿ ïðåäïðèÿòèÿ
IT Motori trifasi
SV Trefasmotorer
CS Tøífázové motory
RU ÊíàòñÙãêùà ÞÛåÝÙïàèå
1LA6/7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP6/7/9
BG 56 ... 90 L - IM B3
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7
BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3

BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3 1LA6, 1MA6
Baugrößen (BG) / Frame sizes (BG) / Désignation de carcasse (BG) / Tamaños constructivos (BG) /
Grandezza costruttiva (BG) / Konstruktionsstorlekar (BG) / Velikosti (BG) / ÊåìëíÙãéàíù (BG)
(1MA) (1MA)
* (1MA)
oder oder * oder
or or
or
ou ou ou
o o
IM V 5 IM V 6 o IM V 18
oppure oppure
oppure
eller eller *
eller
IM B 3 nebo IM B 5 nebo IM V 1 IM V 3 IM B 14 nebo IM B 35
åèå åèå åèå IM B 34
IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8 IM V 19
Fig. 1 Bauformen / Types of construction / Formes de construction/ * s. "4 EEx e Motoren"/ see "4 EEx e motors"/ voir "4 Moteurs EEx e " /
véase "4 Motores EEx e " / cfr. "4 Motori EEx e " / se "EEx e-Motorer" /
Formas constructivas / Forme costruttive / Monteringssätt/
viz motory 4 EEx e / ñì. ìîòîðû 4 EEx e
provedení / Ìîäåëè
Bestell - Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 10 000 a

DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÑOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA / ÈESKY / Ðóññêèé
Ausgabe / Edition 11.03
1
ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved
ENGLISH EN
GENERAL NOTE 3 Comissioning

The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions
supplied ("Information on safety and commissioning"), and in all
WARNING
other related instructions, must always be observed in order to
avoid hazardous situations and the risk of possible injury or Before starting any work on the machine, be sure
damage. to isolate it from the power supply.
Furthermore, the pertinent national, local and plant-specific
regulations and requirements should be kept in mind! 3.1 Installation
Special designs and other versions may vary in technical details! If arranged vertically, all existing lifting eyes and possible lifting
If in doubt, be sure to contact the manufacturer, quoting the type bands (DIN EN 1492-1) and / or lashing straps (DIN EN 12195-2) must
designation and serial number (No. ..., see rating plate), or have be used to stabilize the position.
maintenance work done by one of the SIEMENS Service Centres. Built-on devices (e.g. tachometer) must not be used to help lift the
motor.
Lifting eyes that are screwed in place must be tightened or removed
1 Description after the motor has been installed.
1.1 Field of Application If the motor is installed vertically with the shaft end facing
downwards, a protective shield is recommended for the ventilator
Prescribed use of standard motors: hood in order to prevent the ingress of foreign bodies.
The motors are provided with degree of protection IP55 (see rating If the shaft end is facing upwards, a cover must be provided by the
plate) and can be used in a dusty or damp environment. A suitable equipment operator to prevent the ingress of liquids along the shaft.
superstructure or an additional cover is recommended if the motors
are deployed or stored outdoors to avoid the long-term effects of Quiet running: Exact alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced
intense, direct sunshine, rain, snow, ice and dust. If necessary, please transmission element (coupling, pulleys, fans, etc.) are essential for
consult the manufacturer or your technical department. The motors quiet vibration-free running. If necessary, the whole motor and
are tropic proof. Guide value: 60% relative humidity at a coolant transmission element should be balanced.
temperature of 40°C. BG90S/L: Double drillholes are provided for Type IM B3 in the rear feet
(see Fig. 10) to maintain the standard foot dimensions.
Ambient temperature -20°C ... +40°C
Site altitude £ 1000 m
3.2 Terminal box
If the ambient conditions deviate, this must be shown on the ratings
BG56...90L: In the case of 1LA, 1LP and 1LP motors, the top part of
plate; these data then apply.
the terminal box can be turned through 4x90 degrees.
1.2 Construction and mode of operation BG100...160L: The cast terminal box on the motor housing cannot be
Motor types: turned. In the case of motors with screw-fitted upper section of the
1LA and 1MA motors are self-cooled (with a fan). 1PP motors are terminal box this can be turned 4 times through 90 degrees (Fig. 2
supplied without their own fans. The customer must ensure that - 5.90).
there is sufficient cooling, either through a separately driven fan or, Tightening torques for screws at the electrical terminal box see
with fan drives, through the driven fan. When the fan is mounted, Fig. 5.2.
make sure that the fan hub does not obstruct the flow of air over
the cooling ribs. 1LA-BG56, 1LP and 1MF motors are self-cooled
(without a fan). 3.3 Balancing, transmission elements
In the case of the base motors the feet are screwed or cast on the A suitable device should always be used for fitting and removing the
motor housing. transmission elements (couplings, pulleys, pinions, etc.) (Fig. 7).
The screw-fitted feet on the motor housing can be changed As standard, the rotors are dynamically balanced with the half
over to alter the position of the terminal box (see Fig. 2). The thread featherkey.
in the existing drillholes in the motor housing can be tapped to fasten When fitting the transmission element, keep the type of balance in
the motor feet in retrospect. However, the stand surface of the feet mind!
must be remachined and aligned afterwards and shims fitted, if The balance status is indicated on the shaft end face or the ratings
necessary.
plate (H = Half, F = Full-key balancing, N = Balancing without
The brake connection cable is also to be considered in the case of
brake motors! featherkey).
The transmission elements must be balanced in accordance with ISO
2 Transportation and Storage 1940!
If the transmission elements are balanced with a half featherkey,
WARNING the visible, protruding part of the featherkey TP must be cut back
(see Fig. 9).
All lifting eyes on the motor must be used to transport
it. Only use the lifting eyes provided when transport- WARNING
ing machine assemblies (e.g. gearboxes, fans, pumps,
etc.). Machine assemblies must not be lifted by
attaching the hoisting gear to motor lifting eyes. The usual measures should be taken to guard
transmission elements from touch.
If the motors are stored for a long period the usable life of the grease
If a motor is started up without the transmission element attached,
on the bearings reduces. After storage periods of over 12 months the
the featherkey should be secured to prevent it being thrown out.
condition of the grease is to be checked. The grease must be replaced
if the check reveals contamination (condensation water getting into
the grease changes its consistency).
3.4 Electrical connection
The roller bearings should be replaced if the period from the time WARNING
the motor is delivered up until it is commissioned exceeds 4 years.
The service life of the motor unit is considerably reduced the longer All work on the low-voltage machine must be
it is stored. carried out by qualified skilled workers. Before work
Finished surfaces (flange surfaces, ends of shafts, etc.) should be is carried out the machine must be at a standstill,
treated with an anti-corrosion agent. disconnected and secured against switching on.
If necessary, the insulation resistance of the winding must be This applies to the auxiliary circuits as well (e. g.
checked, see Section 3.5. space heater).
ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved 5

EN ENGLISH
NOTE: If the openings for cables and wiring in the terminal box In the case of converter-fed motors, interference is emitted to a
are sealed with a cast skin (knockout), this must be removed in the greater or lesser degree, depending on the converter version concerned
appropriate manner (see Fig. 4). (type, interference suppression measures, manufacturer). The
Care must be taken not to damage the terminal box, the terminal instructions of the converter manufacturer regarding electromagnetic
board, the cable connections, etc. inside the terminal box! compatibility must be heeded at all times. If the use of a shielded
See Fig. 4.1 for details of the screwed connections for cables and motor cable is recommended, the shield will have the greatest effect
leads. An adapter must be screwed in for PTC thermistor connections! if it is conductively connected over a large area on the metal terminal
The terminal box must be sealed so that it is dust and water-tight. box of the motor (with a screwed metal conduit thread). Noise
voltages may occur on the sensor leads of motors with integrated
The system voltage and the frequency must agree with the data given sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors) as a result of the converter.
on the rating plate. Voltage or frequency deviations of ±5% and ±2% If the motor is operated on a converter at speeds that exceed the
respectively from the rated voltage and frequency values are permitted rated speed, the mechanical critical speeds (safe operating speed
without needing to derate the output. The connection and IEC 60034-1) must be observed.
arrangement of the terminal links must agree with the diagram Noise immunity: If the motor has an integrated sensor (e.g. a PTC
provided in the terminal box. thermistor), the owner is responsible for ensuring adequate noise
Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal with the marking. immunity by choosing a suitable sensor signal lead (possibly with
Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282), shielding, connected like the motor supply lead) and evaluator.
arrange the conductors so that the clips are virtually level on both The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions
sides. This method of connection means that the ends of single supplied (Information on safety and commissioning), and in all
conductors must be bent in the shape of a U or be fitted with a other related instructions, must always be observed prior to
cable lug (see Fig. 6.1). This also applies to the green-yellow commissioning!
protective earthing conductor and the outer earthing conductor After motor installation, the brake, if fitted, should be checked for
(see Fig. 6.2). proper functioning.
Please refer to Fig. 5 for the tightening torques for the screwed
electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for
terminal strips).
4 Maintenance
The anti-condensation heater must not be switched on during Safety precautions
operation.
DANGER
3.5 Checking the insulation resistance Before starting any work on the motor or other
The insulation resistance of the windings must be measured prior equipment, particularly before opening covers over
to initial startup of the motor, or after long periods of storage or live parts, the motor must be properly isolated from
standstill (approx. 6 months). the power supply. Besides the main circuits, any
While the measurement is being taken and immediately afterwards, additional or auxiliary circuits that may be present
some of the terminals carry dangerous voltages and must not be must also be isolated.
touched. The usual "5 safety rules" (as set forth in DIN VDE
0105) are:
Insulation resistance
- Isolate the equipment
- The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or
- Take effective measures to prevent
repaired windings with respect to ground is 10 MW.
reconnection
- The critical insulation resistance Rcrit is calculated first by
- Verify equipment is dead
multiplying the rated voltage UN, e.g. 0.69 kV AC, with the
- Earth and short-circuit
constant factor (0.5 MW/kV):
- Cover or fence off adjacent live parts
Rcrit = 0.69 kV x 0.5 MW/kV = 0.345 MW.
The precautions listed above should remain in force
Measurement until all maintenance work is finished and the motor
The minimum insulation resistance of the windings to ground is has been fully assembled.
measured with 500 V DC. The winding temperature should then be
25oC ± 15 oC. ATTENTION
The critical insulation resistance should be measured with 500 V DC
with the winding at operating temperature. The appropriate construction standards must be
Checking observed if any modifications or repairs are made to
If the minimum insulation resistance of a new, cleaned or repaired the motors listed (UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
motor, which has been stored or at standstill for a prolonged period or CSA - Canadian Standards Association). The
of time, is less than 10 MW, this may be due to humidity. The windings markings shown on the left are used to identify these
must then be dried. motors on their respective rating plates.
After long periods of operation, the minimum insulation resistance
may drop to the critical insulation resistance. As long as the NOTE: Where motors are fitted with closed condensed water
measured value does not fall below the calculated value of the openings, these should be opened from time to time to allow any
critical insulation resistance, the motor may continue in operation. accumulated condensed water to drain away.
If it does, the motor must be stopped immediately. Condensed water openings should always be at the lowest point of
The cause must be determined, and the windings or winding sections the motor!
repaired, cleaned or dried as necessary.
Fitting new bearings, type of grease
3.6 Commissioning Under normal operating conditions, with horizontally mounted
motors and the following coolant temperatures and motor speeds,
NOTE: Electromagnetic compatibility the bearings should be changed at the intervals [h] specified below:
40°C
WARNING
... 1800 rev/min approx. 40,000 h
Emitted interference: Where the torque is very ... 3600 rev/min approx. 20,000 h
uneven (the drive of a piston-type compressor, for
NOTE: The permissible axial and transverse forces (see Catalog)
example), the inevitable result is a non-sinusoidal
must not be exceeded!
motor current, whose harmonics can lead to excessive
Irrespective of the number of operating hours, a motor which is in
system perturbation and thus excessive emitted
use should have its bearing replaced every 3 years because of the
interference.
reduction in effectiveness of the grease.
6 ã Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved

ENGLISH EN
In the case of motors operating under special conditions, such as The cable entries must be approved for the explosion-endangered
a vertical motor position, heavy vibration, sudden load changes, area and be secured to prevent accidental loosening. Unused openings
frequent reversing operation, etc., the bearing should be changed at are to be closed with approved plugs.
considerably more frequent intervals than the operating hours Where the motor is mounted vertically with the shaft end at the top,
stated above. e.g. models IMV3, IMV6, IMV19 (see Fig. 1), 1MA motors must have
The motors feature deep-groove ball bearings which are provided
a cover fitted so that no objects can penetrate between the cooling
with cover plates (2ZC3 version). The cover plate material should ribs into the motor fan hood. The cover must not obstruct the cooling
withstand temperatures from -30 °C to +150 °C, e.g. polyacryl-rubber of the motor.
(ACM).
Type of grease for standard machines: UNIREX N3 (Esso); synthetic Should no details be given to the contrary in respect of mode of
greases must conform to DIN 51825-K3N. operation and tolerances in the EC sample test certificate or on the
Special greases should be indicated on the rating plate or on a rating plate the electric motors have been designed and built for
separate plate. continuous operation and infrequent repeated start-up with no
Dismantle the motor to the extent necessary. Pull off the rolling- excessive heating up when starting. The motors are only to be used
contact bearing with a suitable device (see Fig. 7). Clean the journal! for the given mode of operation shown on the rating plate.
Heat the rolling-contact bearing evenly to about 80-100 °C and press Section A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, Part 1) - voltage + 5 %, frequency
on. Heavy blows (such as with a hammer, etc.) should be avoided. + 2 %, waveform, power-system symmetry - must be complied with
Any worn sealing elements (such as the shaft sealing ring, etc.) in order to ensure that any increase in temperature remains within
should also be renewed. the permitted limits. Greater deviations from the rated values can
If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement lead to non-permissible increases in the temperature of the machine
sealing rings must also be of the springless type. and must be indicated on the rating plate.
The temperature class of the motor given on the rating plate must
Centering recess seal agree with the temperature class of the inflammable gas which may
When reassembling the motor, the bare mounting faces between the occur.
motor casing and the bearing end shields are to be sealed with a Each machine must be protected in all phases in accordance with EN
suitable non-hardening sealing material, e.g. Fluid-D. 60079-14 against unacceptable termperature rise by a current-
Tightening torques for the screws at the end shields (see Fig. 5.2). sensitive delayed circuit-breaker with phase-failure protection in
accordance with EN 60947 or with an equivalent device.
Regreasing device
In the case of motors with a regreasing device, take note of the The overcurrent protection facility with current dependent delayed
information given on the rating plate or the lubrication instruction triggering is to be selected so that the triggering time to be taken
plate! The bearings should be relubricated while the motor is from the switch characteristic curve for the protected motor ratio
running! IA / IN must not be greater than the heating up time tE of the motors.
The ratio IA / IN as well as the heating up time tE are to be found
on the rating plate. The protective device is to be set to the rated
current. In the case of delta-connected windings, the trips are to be
5 1MA and 1MF motors with connected in series with the winding phases and set to 0.58 times
increased EExe protection the rated current. If such a circuit is not possible, additional protective
measures are necessary (e.g. thermal machine protection).
Marking: CE 0158 II 2 G EEx e II T.
If the rotor is blocked, the protection device must switch off the
machine within the time tE indicated for the respective temperature
CAUTION class.
Repairs must be performed in or by authorized Sie- Electrical motors for heavy start up (running up time > 1.7 x tE-time)
mens workshops. Any repair work carried out must are to be protected by a start monitoring system in accordance with
be documented on the motor (e.g. by means of an the details given in the EC sample type test certificate.
additional plate). Thermal machine protection by means of direct temperature
monitoring of the winding is permissible if this is certified and
The information in italics is intended to serve as supplementary or indicated on the rating plate.
special information on these types of motors. Separate, common interlocked protection devices are required for
The increased hazards in areas which are exposed to the danger of each speed stage for pole reversible motors. To be recommended
explosion or firedamp necessitate that the general notes on safety are devices with EC sample type test certificate.
and commissioning are carefully complied with. In Germany, please refer to DIN 57165/VDE 0165 and ElexV when
As to Spare parts, with the exception of standardised, commercially erecting electrical installations in areas exposed to the danger of
available equivalent parts (e.g. roller bearings), only original spare explosion. In countries other than Germany, the relevant national
parts (see parts list) may be used; this applies in particular also with regulations are to be complied with in each case!
respect to gaskets and connectors. Operation on a converter must be certified. The separate instructions
Electrical machines which are protected against explosion are in line of the manufacturer must be complied with. The motors, converters
with the standards EN 60034 (VDE 0530) and EN 50014 to 50020. It and protection devices are to be marked as pertinent to each other
is permitted to use these machines in areas exposed to the danger in the case of the EExe ignition protection mode and the approved
of explosion only in accordance with the stipulations of the responsible operating data is to be laid down in the general EC sample type test
authority which also determines whether a danger of explosion certificate (VDE 0165).
exists (division into zones). The connector cable installed between the inverter and the electrical
To be observed in the case of certification additionally marked device can adversely affect the levels of the voltage peaks produced
with an X are the special stipulations in the EC sample test by the inverter. . The maximum value of the voltage peaks at the
certificate. terminals in the system Inverter-Cable-Eletrical Device must not
exceed the value stated in the manufacturers special notes.
Furthermore, the EMC Guideline must be observed.

26
DE EN FR ES
Ersatzteile, vom Werk lieferbar Spare parts, available from the works Pièces de rechange, livrables par lusine (voir exemple de Piezas de recambio, suministro desde fábrica (v. ejemplo de pedido)
(s. Bestellbeispiel) (see order example) commande)
1.00 Rodamiento D
1.00 Lagerung AS 1.00 Bearing, drive end 1.00 Palier côté entraînement .40 Escudo portacojinetes
.40 Lagerschild .40 Endshield .40 Flasque-palier .43 Anillo obturador
.43 Wellendichtring .43 Shaft sealing ring .43 Bague détanchéité .58 Arandela flexible
.58 Federscheibe .58 Resilient preloading ring .58 Rondelle élastique .60 Rodamiento
.60 Wälzlager .60 Rolling-contact bearing .60 Roulement .61 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo portacojinetes
.61 Federband für Lagerschildnabe .61 Spring band for endshield hub .61 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque (no se emplea siempre)
(nicht immer vorhanden) (not always provided) (pas toujours présente)
3.00 Rotor, completo
3.00 Läufer, komplett 3.00 Rotor, complete 3.00 Rotor, complet .88 Chaveta para ventilador
.88 Paßfeder für Lüfter .88 Featherkey for fan .88 Clavette pour ventilateur
4.00 Estator, completo
4.00 Ständer, komplett 4.00 Stator, complete 4.00 Stator, complet .07 Pata derecha de la carcasa
.07 Gehäusefuß, rechts .07 Frame foot, right .07 Patte de la carcasse, droite .08 Pata izquierda de la carcasa
.08 Gehäusefuß, links .08 Frame foot, left .08 Patte de la carcasse, gauche .18 Placa de características
.18 Leistungsschild .18 Rating plate .18 Plaque signalétique .19 Tornillo
.19 Schraube .19 Bolt .19 Vis .20 Tapa
.20 Abdeckung .20 Cover .20 Recouvrement .30 Angular de contacto
.30 Kontaktwinkel .30 Contakt angele .30 Equerre de contact .31 Angular exterior de puesta a tierra
.31 Erdungswinkel .31 Earthing angele .31 Equerre de mise à la terre
5.00 Caja de bornes, completa
5.00 Anschlußkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminal box, complete 5.00 Boîte à bornes, complète .03 Sello
.03 Dichtung .03 Seal .03 Joint .04 Sello
.04 Dichtung .04 Seal .04 Joint .10 Placa de bornes, completa
.10 Klemmenbrett, komplett .10 Terminal board, complete .10 Plaque à bornes, complète .11 Regletero (p. ej. para conexión con termistor PTC)
.11 Klemmleiste .11 Terminal strip(e.g. for PTC .11 Bornier (par ex. pour sonde CTP) .44 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
(z. B. für Kaltleiteranschluß) thermistor connection) .44 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes .70 Pisacables
.44 Anschlußkasten-Oberteil .44 Top part of terminal box .70 Etrier de serrage .71 Pisacables
.70 Klemmbügel .70 Terminal clip .71 Etrier de serrage .83 Sello
.71 Klemmbügel .71 Terminal clip .83 Joint (torique sur (HA 180...200) .84 Tapa de la caja de bornes
.83 Dichtung .83 Seal .84 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes .85 Sello
.84 Anschlußkasten-Deckel .84 Terminal box cover .85 Joint .90 Parte superior de la caja de bornes, girable en
.85 Dichtung .85 Seal .90 Parie supérieure de la boîte à bornes, 4 x 90 grados, completa (para montaje posterior)
.90 Anschlußkastenoberteil .90 Top part of terminal box, can be turned through orientable de 4 x 90 °, complète (pour montage .92 Tapa de la caja de bornes
4x90 Grad drehbar, komplett 4 x 90 degrees, complete (for retrofitting) ultérieur) .93 Sello
(für nachträglich Anbau) .92 Terminal box cover .92 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes .95 Parte superior de la caja de bornes
.92 Anschlußkasten-Deckel .93 Seal .93 Joint .98 Sello
.93 Dichtung .95 Top part of terminal box .95 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes .99 Placa del adaptador
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE/ANEXO
.95 Anschlußkasten-Oberteil .98 Seal .98 Joint

.98 Dichtung .99 Adapter plate .99 Plaque dadaptateur 6.00 Rodamiento N
.99 Adapterplatte .10 Rodamiento
6.00 Bearing, non-drive end 6.00 Palier côté opposé à lentraînement .11 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo
6.00 Lagerung BS .10 Rolling-contact bearing .10 Roulement portacojinetes (no se emplea siempre)
.10 Wälzlager .11 Spring band for endshield hub .11 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque .20 Escudo portacojinetes
.11 Federband für Lagerschildnabe (not always provided) (pas toujours présente) .23 Anillo obturador
(nicht immer vorhanden) .20 Endshield .20 Flasque-palier
.20 Lagerschild .23 Shaft sealing ring .23 Bague détanchéité 7.00 Sistema de ventilación, completo
.23 Wellendichtring .04 Ventilador
ã Siemens AG 2003
7.00 Ventilation, complete 7.00 Ventilation, complète .40 Capota del ventilador
7.00 Belüftung, komplett .04 Fan .04 Ventilateur
.04 Lüfter .40 Fan cowl .40 Capot du ventilateur ¡No se pueden suministrar los dispositivos para calar y extraer los
.40 Lüfterhaube rodamientos, ventiladores y órganos de accionamiento!
The devices for pressing on and pulling off the rolling-contact Les dispositifs demmanchement et dextraction pour
Auf- und Abziehvorrichtungen für Wälzlager, Lüfter und bearings, the fan and the transmission elements cannot be roulements, ventilateurs et organes de transmission ne sont
Abtriebselemente sind nicht lieferbar! ordered! pas livrables.
All Rights Reserved

ã
IT SV CS RU
Parti di ricambio disponibili da magazzino (vedere esempi Reservdelar, kan levereras från fabriken (se Náhradní díly, dodávané výrobcem Çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè, âîçìîæíà ïîñòàâêà ñ ôàáðèêè
di ordinazione) beställningsexempel) (viz pøíklad objednávky) (ñì. ïðèìåð çàêàçà)
1.00 Cuscinetti lato albero 1.00 Lager AS 1.00 uloení AS 1.00 Óñòðîéñòâî ïîäøèïíèêîâ AS
.40 Coperchio del cuscinetto .40 Lagersköld .40 loiskový tít .40 ïîäøèïíèêîâûå ùèòû
.43 Anello di tenuta dellalbero .43 Axeltätring .43 tìsnící krouek høídele .43 óïëîòíèòåëüíîå êîëüöî âàëà
.58 Anello elastico .58 Fjäderbricka .58 pérová podloka .58 Óïðóãàÿ øàéáà
.60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .60 Rullager .60 valivé loisko .60 Ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.61 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello scudo .61 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav (finns ej alltid) .61 pruná objímka pro náboj loiskového títu .61 Ïðóæèíÿùàÿ ïîëîñêà äëÿ âòóëêè ïîäøèïíèêà
di supporto (non sempre inserito) (není vdy k dispozici) (íå âñåãäà â íàëè÷èè)
Siemens AG 2003 All Rights Reserved

3.00 Rotor, komplett
3.00 Rotore completo .88 kil för fläkt 3.00 rotor, kompletní 3.00 Âåíòèëÿòîð, êîìïëåêò
.88 Chiavetta per ventilatore .88 pero ventilátoru .88 Ïðèçìàòè÷åñêàÿ øïîíêà äëÿ âåíòèëÿòîðà
4.00 Stator, komplett
4.00 Statore completo .07 Fot för hus, höger 4.00 statorový svazek v kostøe 4.00 Ñòîéêà, êîìïëåêò
.07 Piede di sostegno destro .08 Fot för hus, vänster .07 patka pravá .07 Ëàïà êîðïóñà, ïðàâàÿ
.08 Piede di sostegno sinistro .18 Märkskylt .08 patka levá .08 Ëàïà êîðïóñà, ëåâàÿ
.18 Targhetta dei dati .19 Skruv .18 typový títek .18 Ôèðìåííàÿ òàáëè÷êà ñ óêàçàíèåì ìîùíîñòåé
.19 Vite .20 Lock .19 roub .19 Âèíò
.20 Coperchio .30 Kontaktvinkel .20 ucpávka .20 Ïîêðûòèå
.30 Angolare di contatto .31 Jordingsvinkel .30 kontaktní úhelník .30 Êîíòàêòíûé óãîëîê
.31 Angolare di messa a terra .31 zemnící úhelník .31 Óãîëîê äëÿ çàçåìëåíèÿ
APPENDICE / BILAGA
5.00 Uttagslåda, komplett

5.00 Cassetta terminale completa .03 Packning 5.00 svorkovnice, úplná 5.00 Êëåììíàÿ êîðîáêà, êîìïëåêò
.03 Guarnizione .04 Packning .03 tìsnìní .03 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.04 Guarnizione .10 Kopplingsplint, komplett .04 tìsnìní .04 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.10 Morsettiera completa .11 Kontaktplint (t.ex. för anslutning av .10 deska svorkovnice , úplná .10 êëåììíûé ùèòîê, êîìïëåêò
.11 Morsettiera ad es. per il collegamento di PTC-termistor) .11 svorková lita (napø.pro pøipojení termistoru) .11 Çàæèìíàÿ ïëàíêà (íàïðèìåð äëÿ òåðìîðåçèñòîðà)
termistori PTC .44 Överdel till uttagslåda .44 skøíò svorkovnice vrchní èást .44 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
/ PRILOHA
.44 Parte superiore della cassetta terminale .70 Klämbygel .70 upínací objímka .70 Çàæèì
.70 Staffa .71 Klämbygel .71 upínací objímka .71 Çàæèì
.71 Staffa .83 Packning .83 tìsnìní .83 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.83 Anello di tenuta .84 Lock till uttagslåda .84 víko svorkovnice .84 Êðûøêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.84 Coperchio della cassetta terminale .85 Packning .85 tìsnìní .85 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.85 Guarnizione .90 Överdel till uttagslåda 4 x 90 Dgrader vridbar, .90 svorkovnice,horní èást .90 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.90 Parte superiore della cassetta komplett (för montering i efterhand) otoèná o 4x90 stupòù, úplná 4x90ãðàä. ðàçâîðîòîñïîñîáíîñòü, êîìïëåêò
orientabile 4 volte di 90°, completa (per .92 Lock till uttagslåda (pro dodateènou montá)
/ Ïðèëîæåíèå
(äëÿ äîïîëíèòåëüíîãî ìîíòàæà)

montaggio successivo) .93 Packning .92 svorkovnice - víèko 92 Êðûøêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.92 Coperchio della cassetta terminale .95 Överdel till uttagslåda .93 tìsnìní .93 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.93 Guarnizione .98 Packning .95 skøíò svorkovnice .95 Âåðõíÿÿ ÷àñòü êëåììíîé êîðîáêè
.95 Parte superiore della cassetta terminale .99 Adapterplatta .98 tìsnìní .98 Óïëîòíèòåëü
.98 Guarnizione .99 adapter skøínì svorkovnice .99 Ïåðåõîäíàÿ ïëàñòèíà
.99 Piastra adattatore 6.00 Lager BS
.10 Rullager 6.00 uloení BS 6.00 Óñòðîéñòâî ïîäøèïíèêîâ BS
6.00 Cuscinetti lato opposto albero .11 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav (finns ej alltid) .10 valivé loisko .10 Ïîäøèïíèê êà÷åíèÿ
.10 Cuscinetti a rotolamento .20 Lagersköld .11 pruná objímka pro náboj loiskového títu .11 Ïðóæèíÿùàÿ ïîëîñêà äëÿ âòóëêè ïîäøèïíèêà
.11 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello scudo .23 Axeltätring (není vdy k dispozici) (íå âñåãäà â íàëè÷èè)
di supporto (non sempre inserito) .20 loiskový tít .20 Ïîäøèïíèêîâûé ùèò
.20 Coperchio dei cuscinetti 7.00 Ventilation, komplett .23 tìsnící krouek høídele .23 óïëîòíèòåëüíîå êîëüöî âàëà
.23 Anello di tenuta dellalbero .04 Fläkt
.40 Fläktkåpa 7.00 vìtrání, úplné 7.00 Âåíòèëÿöèÿ, êîìïëåêò
7.00 Ventilatore completo .04 ventilátor .04 Âåíòèëÿòîð
.04 Ventilatore .40 kryt ventilátoru .40 Êðûøêà âåíòèëÿòîðà
.40 Cappa del ventilatore
Nasazovací a stahovací pøípravky pro valivá loiska, Ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå äëÿ ñúåìà è ìîíòàæà ïîäøèïíèêà êà÷åíèÿ,
I dispositivi per il calettamento e lestrazione di cuscinetti, På- och avdragningsanordningar för rullager, fläkt och vìtráky a prvky pohonu nedodáváme ! âåíòèëÿòîðà è âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ íå ïîñòàâëÿþòñÿ
ventilatori e elementi di trasmissione non possono essere drivdonselement kan inte levereras!
27
ordinati!
DE EN FR ES IT SV CS RU
DE - Normteile sind nach Abmessung, Werkstoff und Oberfläche im freien Handel zu beziehen.
EN - Standard commercially available parts are to be purchased in accordance with the specified dimensions, material and surface finish.
FR - Les pièces normalisées peuvent être obtenues dans le commerce daprès leurs dimensions, le matériau et létat de surface.
ES - Las piezas estándar se comprarán en comercios del ramo según las dimensiones, material y superficie especificados.
IT - Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato secondo le dimensioni, il materiale e la finitura della superficie.
SV - Normerade detaljer kan erhållas i öppna handeln, och skall specificeras beträffande storlek, material och ytbehandling.
CS - Normované díly lze v pøísluných rozmìrech, materiálech a povrchu nakoupit v bìných obchodech.
RU - ñòàíäàðòíûå ÷àñòè ìîæíî ïðèîáðåñòè â ñâîáîäíîé òîðãîâëå ïî ðàçìåðàì, ìàòåðèàëó è ïîâåðõíîñòè
DIN EN ISO 7089/7090

(DIN 125)
DIN EN ISO 4762 DIN EN ISO 4014 DIN EN 50262
4.05 (s. Fig. 3) (DIN 912) (DIN 931)
1.49
4.11 5.52
4.10 4.39 5.53
4.38 DIN 128 5.19 5.96
5.78 5.49
5.79
DIN EN ISO 4017 DIN EN ISO 7045
5.89 (DIN 7985)
(DIN 933)
5.91 DIN 625
7.12 DIN 471
5.94
6.29 Lagertyp:
Type of bearing:
7.49
Type de roulement:
1.60 Tipo de cojinete:
6.02 DIN 472
6.10 Tipo di cuscinetto:
Lagertyp:
Typ loiska
Òèï ïîäøèïíèêà
4.04 (s. Fig. 3) DIN 580 3.38 DIN 6885
Fig. 2
DE - Ersatzteile sind über den Vertrieb bei den jeweiligen Produktionsstätten zu bestellen.
EN - Spare parts can be ordered from the Sales departments of the particular production sites.
FR - Les pièces de rechange doivent être commandées auprès du service de vente des lieux de production respectifs.
ES - Los recambios se piden a través de la distribución de las plantas de producción respectivas.
IT - I pezzi di ricambio vanno ordinati presso i centri di distribuzione dei rispettivi stabilimenti di produzione.
SV - Reservdelar ska beställas på respektive fabriks distributionsavdelning.
CS - Náhradní díly je tøeba objednat pøes odbyt u pøísluných výrobních závodù.
RU - Çàêàçû íà çàïàñíûå ÷àñòè ïðèíèìàþò îòäåëåíèÿ ïðîäàæè ñîîòâåòñòâóþøèõ ïðîèçâîäñòâåííûõ çàâîäîâ.
E Bad Neustadt / D
UD Mohelnice / Cz
UC Frenstat / Cz
Bestellbeispiel
E Áàä Íåéøòàäò / Ãåðìàíèÿ Order example
UD Ìîõåëüíèöå / ×åõèÿ Exemple de commande 1.40 Lagerschild
UC Ôðåíøòàò / ×åõèÿ Ejemplo de pedido 1LA7 163-4AA60
Esempio di ordinazione Nr. E4A6 4567 890077
Beställningsexempel
Pøíklad objednávky
Ïðèìåð çàêàçà

Fig. 3
DE - Ausführung mit seitlich angeordnetem Anschlußkastenoberteil (4x90° drehbar)
EN - Motor with top part of terminal box mounted on side (can be turned through 4x90°)
FR - Exécution avec partie supérieure de la boîte á bornes disposé sur le côté
ES - Motor con la parte superior de la caja de bornes adosada lateralmente (puede girarse 4x90°)
IT - Esecuzione con parte superiore della cassetta terminale disposta lateralmente (orientabile 4x90°)
SV - Utförande med överdel till uttagslådan (4x90° vridbar) monterad på sidan
CS - Provedení s horní èástí svorkovnice, umístìné na stranì (otoèné o 4 x 90°)
RU - Ìîäåëü ñ ïðèäåëàííîé ñáîêó âåðõíåé ÷àñòüþ êëåììíîé êîðîáêè (4õ90° âðàùàòåëüíàÿ ñïîñîáíîñòü)
BG 100...160L
4.04
4.05
z. B. Öffnung für Kabel und Leitungen - unten

e.g. opening for cables and leads - bottom
p. e. traversées pour câbles et conducteurs - en bas
p. ej abertura pasacables - abajo
ad es. passaggio per conduttori e cavi - parte inferiore
t.ex. öppning för kabel och ledningar - nedtill
Napø. otvor pro kabely a vedení - dole
Íàïðèìåð îòâåðñòèå äëÿ ïðîâîäêè- âíèçó
Fig. 4
DE - Ausschlagen der Öffnungen für Kabel und Leitungen im Anschlußkasten
EN - Knocking out the openings for cables and leads in the terminal box
FR - Rupture des membranes de fabrication aburant les entées de câbles et de conducteurs sur la boîte á bornes
ES - Martillando las aberturas pasacables de la caja de bornes
IT - Asportare la pellicola per cavi e conduttori nella cassetta terminale
SV - Utslagning av öppningarna för kabel och ledningar i uttagslådan
CS - Vyraení otvorù pro kabely a vedení ve svorkovnici
RU - Âûáèâàíèå îòâåðñòèÿ äëÿ êàáåëåé èëè ïðîâîäîê â êëåììíîé êîðîáêå
BG 100...160L (1LA7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP7/9)
Ausbrechöffnung (Gußhaut)
Cast iron skin
Membrane de fabrication
Membrana de fundición
Pellicola residua della colata
Gjutskorpa
Vylamovací otvor (èepièka)
âûáèòûå îòâåðñòèÿ (ëèòåéíàÿ êîðêà)

Fig. 4.1
DE - Verschraubungen mit (Blech-) Mutter (DIN EN 50262) DE - Verschraubungen mit Reduzierung und (Blech-) Mutter (DIN EN 50262)
EN - Screwed connections with (plate-) nut (DIN EN 50262) EN - Screwed connections with reducer and (plate-) nut (DIN EN 50262)
FR - Raccords à vis avec écrou (en tôle) (DIN EN 50262) FR - Raccords à vis avec réduction et écrou (en tôle) (DIN EN 50262)
ES - Atornilladuras con tuercas (para chapa) (DIN EN 50262) ES - Atornilladuras con reductores y tuercas (para chapa) (DIN EN 50262)
IT - Collegamenti a vite con dado (per lamiera) (DIN EN 50262) IT - Collegamenti a vite con riduzione e dado (per lamiere) (DIN EN 50262)
SV - Förskruvningar med (plåt-) mutter (DIN EN 50262) SV - Förskruvningar med reducering och (plåt-) mutter (DIN EN 50262)
CS- roubová spojení s (plechovou) matkou (DIN EN 50262) CS - roubová spojení s redukcí a (plechovou) matkou (DIN EN 50262)
RU- Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ ñ ïîìîùüþ (ñàìîíàðåçàþùèõ) ãàåê RU - Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ ñ ïîìîùüþ ïåðåõîäíûõ äåòàëåé è (ñàìîíàðåçàþùèõ)
(DIN EN 50262). ãàåê (DIN EN 50262).
M M M
Mutter O-Ring
M M
O-Ring (Fig. 5.1)
Nut O-ring (Fig. 5.1) O-ring
Ecrou Joint torique (Fig. 5.1) Joint torique
Tuerca junta tórica (Fig. 5.1) junta tórica
Dado Guarnizione a o-ring(Fig. 5.1) Guarnizione a o-ring
Mutter O-ring (Fig. 5.1) O-ring
Matka O-krouek (Fig. 5.1) O-krouek
Ãàéêà Î-êîëüöî (Fig. 5.1) Î-êîëüöî
Mutter
Nut Reduktionsstück
Anschlußkastenwand
Ecrou Adapter
Wall of terminal box
Tuerca Pièce de réduction
Paroi de la boîte á bornes
Dado Pieza reductora
Pared de la caja de bornes
Mutter Riduttore
Cassetta termina l parete
Vägg till uttagslådan Matka Reduceringsstycke
Stìna svorkovnice Ãàéêà Redukce
ñòåíêà êëåììíîé êîðîáêè M M íàñàäêà
Einbaulage Blechmutter
Installation length sheet metal nut
Emplacement pour écrou à tôle
posición del montaje tuerca para chapa
Posizione di montaggio dado di lamiera
Monteringsläge påtmutter
Poloha plechové matky
ìåñòî ïîñàäêè ãàéêè
Montage / Assembly / Montage / Montaje / Hinweis / Note / Note / Note / Nota / Observera / poznámka /
Montaggio / Montering / Montá / Ñáîðêà Óêàçàíèÿ/ïðèìå÷àíèÿ
1 DE - Verschraubung in Gehäuse einschrauben oder mit Gegenmutter befestigen, 1 DE - Die Verschraubungen dürfen ausschlieslich für Kabel ohne Bewehrung oder
(Drehmoment M). Umspinnung sowie nur für feste Installation verwendet werden.
EN - Screw connection into housing or tighten with locknut , (Torque M). EN - The cabel entries may be used only for non-armouring cables and only for
FR - Visser le raccord à vis dans le carter ou fixer avec un contre-écrou, solid installation.
(couple de serrage M). FR - Les raccords à vis ne peuvent être utilisés que pour les câbles sans armature
ES - Enroscar la atornilladura en la carcasa o sujetarla con la contratuerca, ou guipage ainsi que pour uniquement les installations fixes.
(par de giro M). ES - Las atornilladuras pueden usarse solo y exclusivamente para cable sin
IT - Avvitare il collegamento a vite sulla carcassa o fissare con controdado, armadura ni trenzado, así como sólo para la instalación fija.
(momento torcente M). IT - I collegamenti a vite devono essere utilizzati solo per cavi senza armatura
SV - Skruva i förskruvningen i huset eller fäst den med en kontermutter, o calza ed esclusivamente per installazioni fisse.
(vridmoment M). SV - Förskruvningarna får endast användas för kabel utan armering eller
CS- Naroubujte roubové spojení do bloku nebo jej upevnìte pojistnou maticí, omflätning samt endast för fasta installationer.
(toèivý moment) CS- roubová spojení se smìjí pouívat výluènì pro kabely bez výztue
RU- Ââèíòèòü ðåçüáîâîé ýëåìåíò â êîðïóñ èëè çàêðåïèòü åãî êîíòðãàéêîé, nebo opøedení a jen k pevné instalaci.
(ìîìåíò çàòÿæêè Ì). RU- Ðåçüáîâûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ äîëæíû èñïîëüçîâàòüñÿ òîëüêî äëÿ
ïðîâîäîâ áåç êàáåëüíîé áðîíè èëè îáìîòêè, à òàêæå òîëüêî äëÿ
2 DE - Leitung einführen. ñòàöèîíàðíîãî ìîíòàæà.
EN - Put cable through.
FR - Introduire la conduite. 2 DE - Bei mehrmaliger Verwendung ist auf Unversehrtheit des Kunststoffein-
ES - Introducir el cable. satzes zu achten.
IT - Introdurre il cavo. EN - The plastic insert must be undamaged at multiple use.
SV - Skjut in ledningen. FR - En cas dutilisation à plusieurs reprises, veiller vous assurer que la garniture
CS- Zaveïte vedení en plastique ne soit pas endommagée.
RU- Ââåñòè êàáåëü. ES - Al usarse varias veces, se tiene que comprobar si está intacto el inserto de
plástico.
3 DE - Hutmutter festziehen,(Drehmoment M). IT - In caso di uso ripetuto, fare attenzione che la guarnizione di plastica non sia
EN - Tighten nutcap, (Torque M). danneggiata.
FR - Serrer lécrou borgne, (couple de serrage M). SV - Vid upprepad användning är det viktigt att kontrollera att plastinsatsen inte
ES - Apretar la tuerca de sombrerete, (par de giro M). har tagit skada.
IT - Stringere il dado cieco, (momento torcente M). CS- Pøi opakovaném pouití je tøeba dbát na to, aby nedolo k pokození
SV - Dra åt toppmuttern, (vridmoment M). plastové vloky
CS- Utáhnìte uzavøenou matici, (toèivý moment) RU- Ïðè ìíîãîêðàòíîì èñïîëüçîâàíèè ïðîâåðÿòü íåïîâðåæäåííîñòü
RU- Ïðî÷íî çàòÿíóòü êîëïà÷êîâóþ ãàéêó, (ìîìåíò çàòÿæêè Ì). ïëàñòìàññîâîãî ñåðäå÷íèêà.
Fig. 5
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
EN - Tightening torques for screwed electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for terminal strips)
FR - Couples de serrages des bornes de la plaque à bornes (ne concerne pas les borniers)
ES - Pares de apriete para uniones atornilladas de las conexiones eléctricas en la placa de bornes (exceptuando las regletas de bornes).
IT - Coppie di serraggio per le viti di attacco di collegamenti elettrici / dei portamorsetti (escluse morsettiere)
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för motorns huvudkopplingsplintar. (utom för hjälpkopplingsplintar)
CS - Utahovací momenty pro roubové spoje elektrických pøípojek svorkovnice (mimo svorkových lit)
RU - Ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè ðåçüá. ñîåäèíåíèé ýë. ïîäêëþ÷åíèé-ïîäêëþ÷åíèéíà êëåììíûõ ùèòàõ(êðîìå ïîäêëþ÷åíèé íà êëåììíîé ïëàíêå)
Gewinde- Æ / Thread- Æ
Æ du filetage / Æ de la rosca
Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Závit-Æ / ÐåçüáàÆ
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque
Couple de serrage
min 0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27
Par de apriete Nm
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment
Utahovací moment max 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
Çàòÿæíîé ìîìåíò
Fig. 5.1
DE - Anziehdrehmoment der Kabelverschraubungen aus Metall (*) und Kunststoff (**) für direkten Anbau am Motor. Bei weiteren
Verschraubungen (z. B. Reduzierungen) sind die entsprechenden Momente gemäß Tabelle anzuwenden.
EN - Tightening torques of the cable screw connections made from metal (*) and plastic (**) for direct installation on the motor.
For other threaded attachments (e.g. reducers) the appropriate torques in the tables are to be used.
FR - Le couple de serrage des passe-câble à vis en métal (*)et en plastique (**) pour le montage direct sur le moteur.
Pour les autres raccords à vis (par ex. réductions), il faut utiliser les couples correspondants indiqués dans le tableau.
ES - Par de apriete de los racores para cables en metal (*) y plástico (**) para el montaje directo en el motor.
Tratándose de otras atornilladuras (p.ej., reductores), se tienen que aplicar los pares correspondientes de conformidad con el cuadro.
IT - Coppia di serraggio dei collegamenti a vite dei cavi in metallo (*) e materiale sintetico (**) per il montaggio diretto sul motore.
In caso di altri collegamenti a vite (p. es. riduzioni), applicare i momenti riportati nella tabella.
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för kabelförskruvningar av metall (*) och plast (**) för direkt montering på motorn.
För övriga förskruvningar (t ex reduceringar) gäller de i tabellen angivna åtdragningsmomenten
CS - Utahovací toèivý moment kabelových roubových spojení z kovu (*) a O-Ring - Dicke
plastu (**) k pøímé montái na motor. U dalích roubových spojení (napøíklad (*) (**) Joint torique
redukcí) pouijte pøísluné momenty uvedené v tabulce. junta tórica
RU - Ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè ðåçüáîâûõ êàáåëüíûõ ââîäîâ èç ìåòàëëà (*) è Guarnizione a o-ring
ïëàñòìàññû (**) äëÿ íåïîñðåäñòâåííîé óñòàíîâêè íà ýëåêòðîäâèãàòåëå. O-ring
Ïðè èñïîëüçîâàíèè äîïîëíèòåëüíûõ ðåçüáîâûõ ýëåìåíòîâ (íàïðèìåð ïåðåõîäíûõ Nm Nm O-krouek
äåòàëåé) ñîáëþäàòü ìîìåíòû çàòÿæêè, ïðèâåäåííûå â òàáëèöå. Î-êîëüöî
min max min max mm
M 12 x 1,5 4 6
M 16 x 1,5 5 7,5 2 3
M 25 x 1,5 6 9 2
M 32 x 1,5
8 12 4 6
M 40 x 1,5
Fig. 5.2
DE - Anziehdrehmomente für Schrauben am elektrischen Anschlußkasten, Lagerschilden und Schutzleiter-Schraubverbindungen
EN - Tightening torques for screws at the electrical terminal box, endshileds and protectice conductor-screw connections.
FR - Couples de serrage pour vis - sur larmoire électrique, .flasques et raccords à vis de fils de protection
ES - Momentos de apriete para los tornillos en la caja de conexiones eléctricas, placas de los cojinetes y conexiones del conductor de puesta a tierra y conexiones roscadas.
IT - Coppie di serraggio per avvitamenti alla scatola di giunzione elettrica, scudi e collegamenti a vite del conduttore di protezione
SV - Åtdragningsmoment för skruvar på kopplingsskåp, lagerskyltar och skyddsledaranslutningar
CS - Utahovací momenty roubù v elektrickém pøípojném pouzdøe, loisek ve títu a roubových spojení na ochranném vedení.
RU - Çàòÿæíûå ñîåäèíåíèÿ äëÿ âèíòîâ íà êëåììíîé êîðîáêå, ùèòîâ ïîäøèïíèêîâ è ðåçüá. ñîåäèíåíèé çàùèòíîé ïðîâîäêè
Gewinde- Æ / Thread- Æ
Æ du filetage / Æ de la rosca
Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20
Závit-Æ / ÐåçüáàÆ
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque
Couple de serrage
min 2 3,5 6 16 28 46 110 225
Par de apriete Nm
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment
Utahovací moment max 3 5 9 24 42 70 165 340
Çàòÿæíîé ìîìåíò
DE - Die obigen Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind!
EN - The above values of tightening torque are applicable unless alternative values are given elsewhere.
FR - Les couples de serrage indiqués ci-dessus sont valables pour autant quaucune valeur spécifique ne soit donnée.
ES - Estos pares de apriete rigen mientras no se indiquen otros.
IT - Le coppie di serraggio indicate qui di sopra sono valide se non sono indicati altri valori.
SV - Ovanstående åtdragningsmoment gäller om ej andra värden angivits!
CS - Výe uvedené utahovací momenty platí, pokud nejsou udány ádné jiné hodnoty!
RU - Âûøåóêàçàííûå ìîìåíòû- äåéñòâèòåëüíû â ñëó÷àå îòñóòñâèÿ äðóãèõ óêàçàíèé

Fig. 6
DE - Anschließbare Querschnitt je nach Klemmengröße (ggf. reduziert durch Größe der Leitungseinführungen)
EN - Conductor cross-sections connectable to the various terminals (may be reduced by size of cable entries)
FR - Sections raccordables suivant la taille de la borne (réduction éventuelle par la taille des entrées de câbles)
ES - Sección conectable según tamaño del borne (en caso dado, más pequeña debido al tamaño de las entradas de línea)
IT - Diametri dei collegamenti a sec. delle misure dei morsetti (eventualmente sono ridotte le dimensioni delle aperture per i conduttori)
SV - Anslutningsbara ledarareor för olika klämstorlekar (ev. reducerat med hänsyn till genomföringens storlek)
CS - Pøipojitelný prùøez podle velikosti svorek (pøíp. zmenený velikostí kabelových vývodek)
RU - Ïîäêëþ÷àåìîå ñå÷åíèå â çàâèñèìîñòè îò ðàçìåðà êëåìì (ïðè íåîáõîäèìîñòè óìåíüøàåòñÿ çà ñ÷åò ðàçìåðà ââîäà)
... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2
DIN 46 234 DIN 46 234
Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Anschluß von zwei etwa gleich dik- Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh
ist dieser nach unten abzuwinkeln! mit Klemmbügel. ken Leitern mit Klemmbügel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel.
If connections are made with DIN Connecting a single conductor If connections are made with DIN
cable lugs, bend the cable lugs Connecting a single conductor with Connecting two conductors of al- under the outer earthing angle. cable lugs, under the outer ear-
downwards. a terminal clip. most equal thickness with a terminal thing angle.
Lorsque le raccordement est clip. Raccordement d'un seul Lorsque le raccordement est
réalisé par cosses DIN, celles-ci Raccordement d'un seul conduc- Deux conducteurs de diamètre à conducteur à une équerre extérieu- réalisé par cosses DIN, à une
doivent être pliées vers le bas. teur à une borne à étrier. peu pré équivalents, raccordés à re de mise à la terre. équerre extérieure de mise à la
une borne à étrier. terre.
Si la conexión se efectúa con Conexión de un solo conductor bajo Si la conexión se efectúa con
terminales para cables DIN, habrá Conexión de un solo conductor con Conexión de dos conductores de el angular exterior de puesta a tierra. terminales para cables DIN, bajo
que doblarlos hacia abajo. un pisacables. diámetro aproximadamente igual, el angular exterior de puesta a tierra.
con un pisacables. Allacciamento di ogni singolo con- Nel collegamento con capocorda
Nel collegamento con capocorda Allacciamento di ogni singolo conduttore sotto angolare di messa a conforme alle norme DIN, sotto
conforme alle norme DIN, questo duttore con staffa. Allacciamento di due conduttori di terra esterno. angolare di messa a terra esterno.
va piegato verso il basso. stesso o pressocchè indentico Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl.
Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl. Anslutning av en enkelledare med spessore con staffa. Anslutning av en enkelledare under DIN under extern jordningsvinkel.
DIN skall denna bockas nedåt. klämbygel. Anslutning av två ungefär lika tjocka extern jordningsvinkel.
ledare med klämbygel. Pøi pøipojení kabelovým oèkem
Pøi pøipojení kabelovým oèkem Pøipojení jednotlivého vodièe Pøipojení jednotlivého vodièe pøi DIN pøi vnìjím zemnícím
DIN musí být toto ohnuto smìrem upínací objímkou. Pøipojení dvou zhruba stejnì vnìjím zemnícím úhelníku. úhelníku.
dolù! silných vodièù upínací objímkou.
Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå îäèíî÷íîãî Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå îäèíî÷íîãî Ïðè ïîäêëþ÷åíèè ñ ïîìîùüþ
Ïðè ïîäêëþ÷åíèè ñ ïîìîùüþ ïðîâîäà ñ ïîìîùüþ çàæèìà. Ïîäêëþ÷åíèå äâóõ ïðèìåðíî ïðîâîäà ïîä âíåøíèì DIN- êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà ïîä
DIN- êàáåëüíîãî íàêîíå÷íèêà åãî îäèíàêîâûõ ïî òîëùèíå çàçåìëÿþùèì óãîëêîì. âíåøíèì çàçåìëÿþùèì óãîëêîì.
ñëåäóåò çàìîòàòü âíèç. ïðîâîäîâ ñ ïîìîùüþ çàæèìà.
Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2
Fig. 7
DE - Lagerwechsel
EN - Changing bearings
FR - Remplacement des roulements
ES - Cambio de cojinetes
IT - Sostituzione dei cuscinetti
SV - Lagerbyte
CS - Výmìna loiska
RU - çàìåíà ïîäøèïíèêà Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Vloená podloka(ochrana centrování na konci høídele)
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðèðóþùåãî ýëåìåíòà â êîíöå âàëà)

Fig. 8
DE - Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen
EN - Pressing on and pulling off drive elements
FR - Emmanchement et extraction dorganes de transmission
ES - Calado y extracción de órganos de transmisión
IT - Calettamento ed estrazione degli elementi di transmissione Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)
SV - På- och avdragning av drivdon Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
CS - Nasazování a stahování hnacích prvkù Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout darbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
RU - Ìîíòàæ è ñíÿòèå âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ
Spessore (protezione della centratura nullestremità dalbero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Vloená podloka (ochrana centrování na konci høídele
Ïðîìåæóòî÷íàÿ øàéáà (çàùèòà öåíòðèðóþùåãî ýëåìåíòà â êîíöå âàëà)
DE - Zum Aufziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplung, Zahnrad, Riemenscheibe usw.), Gewinde im Wellenende benutzen und - sofern
möglich - Abtriebselemente nach Bedarf erwärmen. Zum Abziehen geeignete Vorrichtung verwenden. Es dürfen beim Auf- und Abziehen
keine Schläge (z.B. mit Hammer oder ähnlichem) oder größere als die laut Katalog zulässigen radialen oder axialen Kräfte über das
Wellenende auf die Motorlager übertragen werden.
EN -Use the tapped hole provided in the end of the shaft for fitting drive components such as couplings, gearwheels, belt pulleys, etc. and,
if possible, heat the components as necessary. Use a suitable puller tool for removing the components. Do not strike the components,
e.g. with a hammer or similar tool, when fitting or removing them and do not exert more than the maximum value of radial or axial
force - according to the catalog - transmitted to the motor bearings through the shaft extension.
FR - Pour monter les organes de transmission (accouplements, roues dentées, poulies à courroie, etc.), utiliser le taraudage du bout darbre.
Au besoin et lorsque cela est possible, chauffer les organes de transmission. Pour le démontage, utiliser un dispositif approprié. Aucun
coup (par ex. marteau) supérieur aux efforts axiaux et radiaux admissibles mentionnés au catalogue ne doit être transmis par larbre
aux roulements en cours de montage ou de démontage.
ES - Para calar los órganos de transmisión (acoplamientos, rueda dentada, polea, etc.) utilizar la rosca en el extremo del eje y - siempre
que sea posible - calentar convenientemente dichos órganos. Utilizar el dispositivo adecuado para la extracción. Durante las operaciones
de calado o extracción no golpear (p. ej. con martillo o similar) ni ejercer sobre los cojinetes del motor a través del extremo del eje
fuerzas axiales o radiales superiores a las admisibles según catálogo.
IT - Per calettare gli elementi di transmissione (giunti, ruote dentate, pulegge, ecc.), utilizzare il foro filettato nellestremità dalbero e,
se possibile, riscaldare gli elementi di transmissione . Per lestrazione vanno adoperati attrezzi adatti. Sono da evitare colpi o martellate,
e forze radiali o assiali trasmesse dallestremità dalbero ai cuscinetti maggiori di quelle consentite sec. il catalogo.
SV - Använd axeltappens gänga vid pådragning av drivdon (koppling, kugghjul, remskiva etc) och värm om möjligt upp drivdonen om så behövs.
Använd lämpliga verktyg för avdragningen. Några slag (t.ex. med hammare e.dyl.) får aldrig förekomma vid på- och avdragning, och
radiella och axiella krafter som är större än de som anges i katalogen får inte överföras till motorlagren via axeltappen.
CS -Pro nasazování hnacích prvkù (spojka, ozubené kolo, øemenice a pod.) pouijte závit na konci høídele a pokud to je moné zahøejte podle
potøeby hnací prvky. Pøi stahování pouijte vhodný pøípravek. Pøi nasazování a stahování nesmí být pouívány ádné údery (napø. kladivem
a podobnì) nebo pøenáeny pøes konec høídele na loisko motoru ádné radiální nebo axiální síly vìtí, ne je uvedeno v katalogu.
RU - Äëÿ ìîíòàæà âåäîìûõ ýëåìåíòîâ (ðåäóêòîð, çóá÷àòûé ðåìåíü, ðåìåííàÿ øàéáà è ò.ä.) èñïîëüçîâàòü ðåçüáó íà êîíöå âàëà ïî
âîçìîæíîñòè íàãðåâàòü âåäîìûå ýëåìåíòû, åñëè åñòü íåîáõîäèìîñòü. Äëÿ ñíÿòèÿ èñïîëüçîâàòü ñïåöèàëüíîå ïðèñïîñîáëåíèå. Äëÿ
ñíÿòèÿ èëè ìîíòàæà ñëåäóåò èçáåãàòü óäàðîâ(íàïðèìåð ìîëîòêîì èëè ïîäîáíûìè ïðåäìåòàìè). Íåëüçÿ äîïóñêàòü, ÷òîáû ÷åðåç êîíåö
âàëà íà ìîòîð ïåðåäàâàëèñü àêñèàëüíûå èëè ðàäèàëüíûå ñèëû, áîëüøèå ÷åì óêàçàííûå â êàòàëîãå.
Fig. 9
DE - Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder
EN - Balancing with half featherkey TP
FR - Equilibrage avec demi-clavette
ES - Equilibrado con media chaveta
IT - Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta
SV - Balansering med halv kil
CS - Vyváení polovièními lícovanými pery
RU - Áàëàíñèðîâêà ñ ïîëîâèíîé ïðèçìàòè÷åñêîé

Fig. 10 BG 90 S,L
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
Automation & Drives

Standard Drives
D-91056 Erlangen
Änderungen vorbehalten / Subject to change without prior notice / Sous réserve de modifications / Sujeto a modificaciones/ Con riserva di
modifiche/ Förbehåll för ändringar / Zmìny vyhrazeny / ñîõðàíÿåòñÿ ïðàâî íà
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 5 610 70000 10 000 a

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
11.03 36 De-En-Fr-Sp-It-Sv-Cz-Rus

User’s
Manual Model EJA510A and EJA530A
Absolute Pressure and
Gauge Pressure Transmitters
[Style: S2]
IM 01C21F01-01E
IM 01C21F01-01E
8th Edition
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1-1

Regarding This Manual ................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 For Safe Use of Product ........................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Warranty ................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 ATEX Documentation ............................................................................ 1-3
2. HANDLING CAUTIONS ................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Model and Specifications Check ......................................................... 2-1
2.2 Unpacking ........................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Storage ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.4 Selecting the Installation Location ...................................................... 2-1
2.5 Pressure Connection ........................................................................... 2-2
2.6 Waterproofing of Cable Conduit Connections .................................... 2-2
2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio Transceiver .......................................... 2-2
2.8 Insulation Resistance and Dielectric Strength Test ............................ 2-2
2.9 Installation of Explosion Protected Type ............................................ 2-3
2.9.1 FM Approval ................................................................................. 2-3
2.9.2 CSA Certification .......................................................................... 2-5
2.9.3 IECEx Certification ....................................................................... 2-6
2.9.4 CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Certification ........................................ 2-8
2.10 EMC Conformity Standards .............................................................. 2-10
2.11 PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) ............................................... 2-10
2.12 Low Voltage Directive ....................................................................... 2-11
3. COMPONENT NAMES .................................................................................. 3-1
4. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................. 4-1

4.1 Precautions ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Mounting .............................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section .............................................................. 4-2
4.4 Changing the Direction of Integral Indicator ....................................... 4-2
5. INSTALLING IMPULSE PIPING ................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Impulse Piping Installation Precautions .............................................. 5-1
5.1.1 Connecting Impulse Piping to the Transmitter ............................. 5-1
5.1.2 Routing the Impulse Piping .......................................................... 5-1
5.2 Impulse Piping Connection Examples ................................................ 5-2
6. WIRING .......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Wiring Precautions .............................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Selecting the Wiring Materials ............................................................ 6-1
6.3 Connections of External Wiring to Terminal Box ................................ 6-1
6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection ................................................ 6-1
6.3.2 External Indicator Connection ...................................................... 6-1
6.3.3 BRAIN TERMINAL BT200 Connection ........................................ 6-1
6.3.4 Check Meter Connection .............................................................. 6-2
FD No. IM 01C21F01-01E i IM 01C21F01-01E

8th Edition: Oct. 2008(KP)
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 1999, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
CONTENTS
6.4 Wiring .................................................................................................. 6-2

6.4.1 Loop Configuration ....................................................................... 6-2
(1) General-use Type and Flameproof Type ...................................... 6-2
(2) Intrinsically Safe Type ................................................................... 6-2
6.4.2 Wiring Installation ......................................................................... 6-2
(1) General-use Type and Intrinsically Safe Type .............................. 6-2
(2) Flameproof Type ........................................................................... 6-3
6.5 Grounding ............................................................................................ 6-3
6.6 Power Supply Voltage and Load Resistance ..................................... 6-3
7. OPERATION .................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Preparation for Starting Operation ...................................................... 7-1
7.2 Zero Point Adjustment ........................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1 When you can obtain Low Range Value from actual
measured value of 0% (0 kPa, atmospheric pressure); .............. 7-2
7.2.2 When you cannot obtain Low Range Value from actual
measured value of 0%; ................................................................ 7-3
7.3 Starting Operation ............................................................................... 7-3
7.4 Shutting Down Operation .................................................................... 7-3
7.5 Setting the Range Using the Range-setting Switch ........................... 7-4
8. BRAIN TERMINAL BT200 OPERATION ..................................................... 8-1

8.1 BT200 Operation Precautions ............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 Connecting the BT200 ................................................................. 8-1
8.1.2 Conditions of Communication Line .............................................. 8-1
8.2 BT200 Operating Procedures ............................................................. 8-1
8.2.1 Key Layout and Screen Display ................................................... 8-1
8.2.2 Operating Key Functions .............................................................. 8-2
(1) Alphanumeric Keys and Shift Keys .............................................. 8-2
(2) Function Keys ............................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Calling Up Menu Addresses Using the Operating Keys .............. 8-3
8.3 Setting Parameters Using the BT200 ................................................. 8-4
8.3.1 Parameter Summary .................................................................... 8-4
8.3.2 Parameter Usage and Selection .................................................. 8-6
8.3.3 Setting Parameters ....................................................................... 8-7
(1) Tag No. Setup ............................................................................... 8-7
(2) Calibration Range Setup .............................................................. 8-7
(3) Damping Time Constant Setup ..................................................... 8-8
(4) Output Signal Low Cut Mode Setup ............................................. 8-9
(5) Change Output Limits ................................................................... 8-9
(6) Integral Indicator Scale Setup .................................................... 8-10
(7) Unit Setup for Displayed Temperature ........................................ 8-11
(8) Operation Mode Setup ............................................................... 8-12
(9) Output Status Display/Setup when a CPU Failure ..................... 8-12
(10)Output Status Setup when a Hardware Error Occurs ................. 8-12
(11) Range Change while Applying Actual Inputs .............................. 8-12
(12)Zero Point Adjustment ................................................................ 8-13
(13)Span Adjustment ........................................................................ 8-14
(14)Test Output Setup ....................................................................... 8-15
(15)User Memo Fields ...................................................................... 8-15
8.4 Displaying Data Using the BT200 ..................................................... 8-16
8.4.1 Displaying Measured Data ......................................................... 8-16
8.4.2 Display Transmitter Model and Specifications ........................... 8-16
ii IM 01C21F01-01E
CONTENTS
8.5 Self-Diagnostics ................................................................................ 8-16

8.5.1 Checking for Problems ............................................................... 8-16
(1) Identifying Problems with BT200 ................................................ 8-16
(2) Checking with Integral Indicator ................................................. 8-17
8.5.2 Errors and Countermeasures ..................................................... 8-18
9. MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 9-1

9.1 Overview ............................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Calibration Instruments Selection ....................................................... 9-1
9.3 Calibration ........................................................................................... 9-1
9.4 Disassembly and Reassembly ............................................................ 9-3
9.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator ................................................... 9-3
9.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly ........................................... 9-4
9.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the Capsule Assembly .......................... 9-5
9.5 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 9-6
9.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting .................................................................. 9-6
9.5.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts ....................................................... 9-6
10. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Standard Specifications .................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Model and Suffix Codes .................................................................... 10-3
10.3 Optional Specifications ...................................................................... 10-4
10.4 Dimensions ........................................................................................ 10-7
Customer Maintenance Parts List

Model EJA510A and EJA530A Absolute and Gauge
Pressure Transmitter ....................................................... CMPL 01C21F01-01E
REVISION RECORD
iii IM 01C21F01-01E
1. INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing the DPharp electronic • The following safety symbol marks are used in this
pressure transmitter. manual:
The DPharp Pressure Transmitters are precisely
calibrated at the factory before shipment. To ensure WARNING
correct and efficient use of the instrument, please read
this manual thoroughly and fully understand how to Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
operate the instrument before operating it. if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
䊏 Regarding This Manual
• This manual should be passed on to the end user.
• The contents of this manual are subject to change
CAUTION
without prior notice.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
• All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate
reproduced in any form without Yokogawa’s written
injury. It may also be used to alert against
permission.
unsafe practices.
• Yokogawa makes no warranty of any kind with
regard to this manual, including, but not limited to,
implied warranty of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. IMPORTANT
• If any question arises or errors are found, or if any Indicates that operating the hardware or software
information is missing from this manual, please in this manner may damage it or lead to system
inform the nearest Yokogawa sales office. failure.
• The specifications covered by this manual are
limited to those for the standard type under the
specified model number break-down and do not
cover custom-made instruments. NOTE
• Please note that changes in the specifications, Draws attention to information essential for
construction, or component parts of the instrument understanding the operation and features.
may not immediately be reflected in this manual at
the time of change, provided that postponement of
revisions will not cause difficulty to the user from a Direct current
functional or performance standpoint.
• Yokogawa assumes no responsibilities for this 1.1 For Safe Use of Product
product except as stated in the warranty.
• If the customer or any third party is harmed by the For the protection and safety of the operator and the
use of this product, Yokogawa assumes no responsi- instrument or the system including the instrument,
bility for any such harm owing to any defects in the please be sure to follow the instructions on safety
product which were not predictable, or for any described in this manual when handling this instru-
indirect damages. ment. In case the instrument is handled in contradiction
to these instructions, Yokogawa does not guarantee
safety. Please give your attention to the followings.
NOTE
For FOUNDATION FieldbusTM, PROFIBUS PA and (a) Installation
HART protocol versions, please refer to IM • The instrument must be installed by an expert
01C22T02-01E, IM 01C22T03-00E and IM engineer or a skilled personnel. The procedures
01C22T01-01E respectively, in addition to this described about INSTALLATION are not permitted
manual. for operators.
1-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
1. INTRODUCTION
• In case of high process temperature, care should be (f) Modification

taken not to burn yourself because the surface of • Yokogawa will not be liable for malfunctions or
body and case reaches a high temperature. damage resulting from any modification made to this
instrument by the customer.
• The instrument installed in the process is under
pressure. Never loosen the process connector bolts to
avoid the dangerous spouting of process fluid. 1.2 Warranty
• During draining condensate from the pressure- • The warranty shall cover the period noted on the
detector section, take appropriate care to avoid quotation presented to the purchaser at the time of
contact with the skin, eyes or body, or inhalation of purchase. Problems occurred during the warranty
vapors, if the accumulated process fluid may be period shall basically be repaired free of charge.
toxic or otherwise harmful. • In case of problems, the customer should contact the
• When removing the instrument from hazardous Yokogawa representative from which the instrument
processes, avoid contact with the fluid and the was purchased, or the nearest Yokogawa office.
interior of the meter. • If a problem arises with this instrument, please
• All installation shall comply with local installation inform us of the nature of the problem and the
requirement and local electrical code. circumstances under which it developed, including
the model specification and serial number. Any
(b) Wiring diagrams, data and other information you can
• The instrument must be installed by an expert include in your communication will also be helpful.
engineer or a skilled personnel. The procedures • Responsible party for repair cost for the problems
described about WIRING are not permitted for shall be determined by Yokogawa based on our
operators. investigation.
• Please confirm that voltages between the power • The Purchaser shall bear the responsibility for repair
supply and the instrument before connecting the costs, even during the warranty period, if the
power cables and that the cables are not powered malfunction is due to:
before connecting.
- Improper and/or inadequate maintenance by the
(c) Operation purchaser.
• Wait 10 min. after power is turned off, before - Failure or damage due to improper handling, use or
opening the covers. storage which is out of design conditions.
- Use of the product in question in a location not
(d) Maintenance conforming to the standards specified by
• Please do not carry out except being written to a Yokogawa, or due to improper maintenance of the
maintenance descriptions. When these procedures installation location.
are needed, please contact nearest YOKOGAWA - Failure or damage due to modification or repair by
office. any party except Yokogawa or an approved
representative of Yokogawa.
• Care should be taken to prevent the build up of drift,
- Malfunction or damage from improper relocation
dust or other material on the display glass and
of the product in question after delivery.
name plate. In case of its maintenance, soft and dry
- Reason of force majeure such as fires, earthquakes,
cloth is used.
storms/floods, thunder/lightening, or other natural
disasters, or disturbances, riots, warfare, or
(e) Explosion Protected Type Instrument
radioactive contamination.
• Users of explosion proof instruments should refer
first to section 2.9 (Installation of an Explosion
Protected Instrument) of this manual.
• The use of this instrument is restricted to those who
have received appropriate training in the device.
• Take care not to create sparks when accessing the
instrument or peripheral devices in a hazardous
location.
1-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 ATEX Documentation SF

This procedure is only applicable to the countries in
European Union. Kaikkien ATEX Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden käyttöhjeet
ovat saatavilla englannin-, saksan- ja ranskankielisinä.
Mikäli tarvitsette Ex -tyyppisten tuotteiden ohjeita
GB omalla paikallisella kielellännne, ottakaa yhteyttä
lähimpään Yokogawa-toimistoon tai -edustajaan.
All instruction manuals for ATEX Ex related products
are available in English, German and French. Should
you require Ex related instructions in your local P
language, you are to contact your nearest Yokogawa
office or representative. Todos os manuais de instruções referentes aos produtos
Ex da ATEX estão disponíveis em Inglês, Alemão e
Francês. Se necessitar de instruções na sua língua
DK relacionadas com produtos Ex, deverá entrar em
contacto com a delegação mais próxima ou com um
Alle brugervejledninger for produkter relateret til representante da Yokogawa.
ATEX Ex er tilgængelige på engelsk, tysk og fransk.
Skulle De ønske yderligere oplysninger om håndtering
af Ex produkter på eget sprog, kan De rette F
henvendelse herom til den nærmeste Yokogawa
afdeling eller forhandler. Tous les manuels d’instruction des produits ATEX Ex
sont disponibles en langue anglaise, allemande et
française. Si vous nécessitez des instructions relatives
I aux produits Ex dans votre langue, veuillez bien
contacter votre représentant Yokogawa le plus proche.
Tutti i manuali operativi di prodotti ATEX
contrassegnati con Ex sono disponibili in inglese,
tedesco e francese. Se si desidera ricevere i manuali D
operativi di prodotti Ex in lingua locale, mettersi in
contatto con l’ufficio Yokogawa più vicino o con un Alle Betriebsanleitungen für ATEX Ex bezogene
rappresentante. Produkte stehen in den Sprachen Englisch, Deutsch
und Französisch zur Verfügung. Sollten Sie die
Betriebsanleitungen für Ex-Produkte in Ihrer
E Landessprache benötigen, setzen Sie sich bitte mit
Ihrem örtlichen Yokogawa-Vertreter in Verbindung.
Todos los manuales de instrucciones para los productos
antiexplosivos de ATEX están disponibles en inglés,
alemán y francés. Si desea solicitar las instrucciones de S
estos artículos antiexplosivos en su idioma local,
deberá ponerse en contacto con la oficina o el Alla instruktionsböcker för ATEX Ex (explosionssäkra)
representante de Yokogawa más cercano. produkter är tillgängliga på engelska, tyska och
franska. Om Ni behöver instruktioner för dessa
explosionssäkra produkter på annat språk, skall Ni
NL kontakta närmaste Yokogawakontor eller representant.
Alle handleidingen voor producten die te maken

hebben met ATEX explosiebeveiliging (Ex) zijn GR
verkrijgbaar in het Engels, Duits en Frans. Neem,
indien u aanwijzingen op het gebied van ⌷␭␣ ␶␣ ␧␥␹␧␫␳␫␦␫␣ ␭␧␫␶␱␯␳␥␫␣␵ ␶␻␯ ␲␳␱␫␱␯␶␻␯ ␮␧ ATEX Ex
explosiebeveiliging nodig hebt in uw eigen taal, contact ␦␫␣␶␫␪␧␯␶␣␫ ␴␶␣ 〈␥␥␭␫␬␣, ⌫␧␳␮␣␯␫␬␣ ␬␣␫ ⌫␣␭␭␫␬␣.
op met de dichtstbijzijnde vestiging van Yokogawa of ⌺␧ ␲␧␳␫␲␶␻␴␩ ␲␱␷ ␹␳␧␫␣␨␧␴␶␧ ␱␦␩␥␫␧␵ ␴␹␧␶␫␬␣ ␮␧ Ex ␴␶␩␯
met een vertegenwoordiger. ␶␱␲␫␬␩ ␥␭␻␴␴␣ ␲␣␳␣␬␣␭␱␷␮␧ ␧␲␫␬␱␫␯␻␯␩␴␶␧ ␮␧ ␶␱
␲␭␩␴␫␧␴␶␧␳␱ ␥␳␣␸␧␫␱ ␶␩␵ Yokogawa ␩ ␣␯␶␫␲␳␱␴␻␲␱ ␶␩␵.
1-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
1. INTRODUCTION
SK PL
CZ
SLO
LT H
BG
LV
EST RO
1-4 IM 01C21F01-01E
2. HANDLING CAUTIONS
This chapter describes important cautions regarding
how to handle the transmitter. Read carefully before
2.3 Storage
using the transmitter. The following precautions must be observed when
storing the instrument, especially for a long period.
The EJA-A Series pressure transmitters are thoroughly
tested at the factory before shipment. When the (a) Select a storage area which meets the following
transmitter is delivered, visually check them to make conditions:
sure that no damage occurred during shipment. • It is not exposed to rain or water.
• It suffers minimum vibration and shock.
Also check that all transmitter mounting hardware
• It has an ambient temperature and relative
shown in Figure 2.1.1 is included. If the transmitter
humidity within the following ranges.
was ordered without the mounting bracket, the trans-
mitter mounting hardware is not included. After Ambient temperature:
checking the transmitter, repack it in the way it was –40 to 85°C without integral indicator
delivered until installation. –30 to 80°C with integral indicator
Mounting bracket Relative humidity:
U-bolt nut (S) (Flat type) 5% to 100% R.H. (at 40°C)
Plate
Preferred temperature and humidity:
Adapter
approx. 25°C and 65% R.H.
(b) When storing the transmitter, repack it as nearly
as possible to the way it was packed when
delivered from the factory.
(c) If storing a transmitter that has been used,
thoroughly clean the chambers inside the body, so
that no measured fluid remains in it. Also make
U-bolt (L) sure before storing that the transmitter assemblies
are securely mounted.
U-bolt (S)
U-bolt nut (L)

F0201.EPS
2.4 Selecting the Installation
Figure 2.1.1 Transmitter Mounting Hardware Location
2.1 Model and Specifications The transmitter is designed to withstand severe
environmental conditions. However, to ensure stable
Check and accurate operation for years, observe the follow-
The model name and specifications are indicated on the ing precautions when selecting an installation loca-
name plate attached to the case. If the reverse operat- tion.
ing mode was ordered (reverse signal), ‘REVERSE’ (a) Ambient Temperature
will be inscribed in field *1. Avoid locations subject to wide temperature
variations or a significant temperature gradient. If
the location is exposed to radiant heat from plant
equipments, provide adequate thermal insulation
and/or ventilation.
: Refer to USER'S MANUAL
F0202.EPS (b) Ambient Atmosphere

Figure 2.1.2 Name Plate Avoid installing the transmitter in a corrosive
atmosphere. If the transmitter must be installed in
2.2 Unpacking a corrosive atmosphere, there must be adequate
When moving the transmitter to the installation site, ventilation as well as measures to prevent
keep it in its original packaging. Then, unpack the intrusion or stagnation of rain water in conduits.
transmitter there to avoid damage on the way.
2-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
(c) Shock and Vibration by high frequency noise pickup. To test for such
Select an installation site suffering minimum shock effects, bring the transceiver in use slowly from a
and vibration (although the transmitter is designed distance of several meters from the transmitter,
to be relatively resistant to shock and vibration). and observe the measurement loop for noise
(d) Installation of Explosion-protected Transmitters effects. Thereafter, always use the transceiver
Explosion-protected transmitters can be installed in outside the area affected by noise.
hazardous areas according to the types of gases for
which they are certified. See Subsection 2.9
“Installation of Explosion Protected Type Transmit- 2.8 Insulation Resistance and
ters.” Dielectric Strength Test
Since the transmitter has undergone insulation resis-
2.5 Pressure Connection
tance and dielectric strength tests at the factory before
shipment, normally these tests are not required.
WARNING However, if required, observe the following precau-
tions in the test procedures.
• Instrument installed in the process is under
pressure. Never loosen the process connection (a) Do not perform such tests more frequently than is
part to avoid the dangerous spouting of process absolutely necessary. Even test voltages that do not
fluid. cause visible damage to the insulation may degrade
• During draining condensate from the capsule the insulation and reduce safety margins.
assembly, take appropriate care to avoid (b) Never apply a voltage exceeding 500 V DC (100 V
contact with the skin, eyes or body, or inhala- DC with an internal lightning protector) for the
tion of vapors, if the accumulated process fluid insulation resistance test, nor a voltage exceeding
may be toxic or otherwise harmful. 500 V AC (100 V AC with an internal lightning
protector) for the dielectric strength test.
The following precautions must be observed in order to (c) Before conducting these tests, disconnect all signal
safely operate the transmitter under pressure. lines from the transmitter terminals. Perform the
tests in the following procedure:
(a) Make sure that the process connection part is
tightened firmly. • Insulation Resistance Test
(b) Make sure that there are no leaks in the impulse 1) Short-circuit the + and – SUPPLY terminals in the
piping. terminal box.
(c) Never apply a pressure higher than the specified 2) Turn OFF the insulation tester. Then connect the
maximum working pressure. insulation tester plus (+) lead wire to the shorted
SUPPLY terminals and the minus (–) leadwire to
2.6 Waterproofing of Cable the grounding terminal.
3) Turn ON the insulation tester power and measure
Conduit Connections
the insulation resistance. The voltage should be
Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads to applied short as possible to verify that the insula-
waterproof the transmitter cable conduit connections. tion resistance is at least 20 MΩ.
(See Figure 6.4.2a, 6.4.2b and 6.4.2c.) 4) After completing the test and being very careful not
to touch exposed conductors disconnect the
insulation tester and connect a 100 kΩ resistor
2.7 Restrictions on Use of Radio between the grounding terminal and the short-
Transceiver circuiting SUPPLY terminals. Leave this resistor
connected at least one second to discharge any
static potential. Do not touch the terminals while it
IMPORTANT is discharging.
Although the transmitter has been designed to • Dielectric Strength Test
resist high frequency electrical noise, if a radio 1) Short-circuit the + and – SUPPLY terminals in the
transceiver is used near the transmitter or its terminal box.
external wiring, the transmitter may be affected
2-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
2) Turn OFF the dielectric strength tester. Then

connect the tester between the shorted SUPPLY
WARNING
terminals and the grounding terminal. Be sure to To preserve the safety of explosionproof equip-
connect the grounding lead of the dielectric strength ment requires great care during mounting,
tester to the ground terminal. wiring, and piping. Safety requirements also
3) Set the current limit on the dielectric strength tester place restrictions on maintenance and repair
to 10 mA, then turn ON the power and gradually activities. Please read the following sections very
increase the test voltage from ‘0’ to the specified carefully.
voltage.
4) When the specified voltage is reached, hold it for 2.9.1 FM Approval
one minute.
5) After completing this test, slowly decrease the a. FM Intrinsically Safe Type
voltage to avoid any voltage surges. Caution for FM intrinsically safe type. (Following
contents refer “DOC. No. IFM012-A12 P.1 and 2.”)
2.9 Installation of Explosion Note 1. Model EJA Series pressure transmitters
Protected Type with optional code /FS1 are applicable for
use in hazardous locations.
In this section, further requirements and differences • Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3610, FM3611,
and for explosionproof type instrument are described. FM3810, ANSI/NEMA250
For explosionproof type instrument, the description in
• Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A,
this chapter is prior to other description in this users
B, C & D. Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G
manual.
and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
For the intrinsically safe equipment and explosionproof • Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B,
equipment, in case the instrument is not restored to its C & D. Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F & G and
original condition after any repair or modification Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
undertaken by the customer, intrinsically safe • Outdoor hazardous locations, NEMA 4X.
construction or explosionproof construction is damaged • Temperature Class: T4
and may cause dangerous condition. Please contact • Ambient temperature: –40 to 60°C
Yokogawa for any repair or modification required to Note 2. Entity Parameters
the instrument. • Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
[Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G]
NOTE Vmax = 30 V Ci = 22.5 nF
Imax = 165 mA Li = 730 µH
For FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA
Pmax = 0.9 W
explosion protected type, please refer to IM
* Associated Apparatus Parameters
01C22T02-01E and IM 01C22T03-00E respec-
(FM approved barriers)
tively.
Voc ≤ 30 V Ca > 22.5 nF
Isc ≤ 165 mA La > 730 µH
Pmax ≤ 0.9W
CAUTION
• Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
This instrument is tested and certified as intrinsi- [Groups C, D, E, F and G]
cally safe type or explosionproof type. Please Vmax = 30 V Ci = 22.5 nF
note that the construction of the instrument, Imax = 225 mA Li = 730 µH
installation, external wiring, maintenance or Pmax = 0.9 W
repair is strictly restricted, and non-observance * Associated Apparatus Parameters
or negligence of this restriction would result in (FM approved barriers)
dangerous condition. Voc ≤ 30 V Ca > 22.5 nF
Isc ≤ 225 mA La > 730 µH
Pmax ≤ 0.9 W
2-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
• Entity Installation Requirements b. FM Explosionproof Type

Vmax ≥ Voc or Vt, Imax ≥ Isc or It, Caution for FM explosionproof type.
Pmax (IS Apparatus) ≥ Pmax (Barrier) Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge,
Ca ≥ Ci + Ccable, La ≥ Li + Lcable and absolute pressure transmitters with
Note 3. Installation optional code /FF1 are applicable for
• Barrier must be installed in an enclosure that meets use in hazardous locations.
the requirements of ANSI/ISA S82.01. • Applicable Standard: FM3600, FM3615, FM3810,
• Control equipment connected to barrier must not use ANSI/NEMA250
or generate more than 250 V rms or V dc. • Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B,
• Installation should be in accordance with ANSI/ISA C and D.
RP12.6 “Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for • Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1,
Hazardous (Classified) Locations” and the National Groups E, F and G.
Electric Code (ANSI/NFPA 70). • Outdoor hazardous locations, NEMA 4X.
• The configuration of associated apparatus must be • Temperature Class: T6
FMRC Approved. • Ambient Temperature: –40 to 60°C
• Dust-tight conduit seal must be used when installed • Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
in a Class II, III, Group E, F and G environments. • Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
• Associated apparatus manufacturer’s installation
Note 2. Wiring
drawing must be followed when installing this
• All wiring shall comply with National Electrical
apparatus.
Code ANSI/NEPA70 and Local Electrical Codes.
• The maximum power delivered from the barrier
• When installed in Division 1, “FACTORY
must not exceed 0.9 W.
SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT REQUIRED.”
• Note a warning label worded “SUBSTITUTION OF
COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC Note 3. Operation
SAFETY,” and “INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE • Keep the “CAUTION” nameplate attached to the
WITH DOC. No. IFM012-A12 P.1 and 2.” transmitter.
CAUTION: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOV-
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
ING COVER. SEAL ALL CONDUITS WITHIN
• The instrument modification or parts replacement by
18 INCHES. WHEN INSTALLED IN DIV.1,
other than authorized representative of Yokogawa
“FACTORY SEALED, CONDUIT SEAL NOT
Electric Corporation is prohibited and will void
REQUIRED.” INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE
Factory Mutual Intrinsically safe and Nonincendive
WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL IM 1C22.
Approval.
• Take care not to generate mechanical sparking
[Intrinsically Safe] when accessing to the instrument and peripheral
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location devices in a hazardous location.
Class I, II, III, Division 1, Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G General • The instrument modification or parts replacement
EJA Series Pressure Purpose
Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment by other than authorized representative of
+ + + + Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
Supply – – – – will void Factory Mutual Explosionproof Ap-
proval.
[Nonincendive] c. FM Intrinsically Safe Type/FM

Explosionproof Type
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Class I, II, Division 2,
Model EJA Series pressure transmitters with
Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G optional code /FU1 can be selected the type
Class III, Division 1. General of protection (FM Intrinsically Safe or FM
Explosionproof) for use in hazardous loca-
Transmitters Equipment
tions.
+ +
Supply – –
Not Use
Safety Barrier
F0203.EPS
2-4 IM 01C21F01-01E
Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter, Corporation of America is prohibited and will void
once a particular type of protection is Canadian Standards Intrinsically safe and
selected, any other type of protection nonincendive Certification.
cannot be used. The installation must be [Intrinsically Safe]
in accordance with the description about
the type of protection in this instruction
Class I, II, III, Division 1,
manual. Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G General
Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary EJA Series Pressure Purpose
marking is crossed out on the label other Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment
than the selected type of protection when + + + +
the transmitter is installed. Supply – – – –
2.9.2 CSA Certification F0204-1.EPS
[Nonincendive]
a. CSA Intrinsically Safe Type Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
Caution for CSA Intrinsically safe type. (Following Class I, II, Division 2,
contents refer to “DOC No. ICS003-A12 P.1-1 and Groups A, B, C, D, E, F, G
Class III, Division 1. General
P.1-2.”)
Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and Transmitters Equipment
absolute pressure transmitters with + +
optional code /CS1 are applicable for use Supply – –
in hazardous locations Not Use
Certificate: 1053843 Safety Barrier
F0204-2.EPS
• Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0, No.0.4, No.25,

No.30, No.94, No.142, No.157, No.213 b. CSA Explosionproof Type
• Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A,
Caution for CSA explosionproof type.
B, C & D. Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G
and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations. Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
• Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, absolute pressure transmitters with
C & D, Class II, Division 2, Groups F & G, and optional code /CF1 are applicable for use
Class III, Hazardous Locations. (not use Safety in hazardous locations:
Barrier) Certificate: 1089598
• Encl. “Type 4X” • Applicable Standard: C22.2 No.0, No.0.4, No.25,
• Temperature Class: T4 No.30, No.94, No.142
• Ambient temperature: –40 to 60°C • Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B,
• Process Temperature: 120°C max. C and D.
• Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1,
Note 2. Entity Parameters
Groups E, F and G.
• Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows:
• Encl “Type 4X”
Maximum Input Voltage (Vmax) = 30 V
• Temperature Class: T6, T5, and T4
Maximum Input Current (Imax) = 165 mA
• Process Temperature: 85°C (T6), 100°C (T5), and
Maximum Input Power (Pmax) = 0.9 W
120°C (T4)
Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 22.5 nF
• Ambient Temperature: –40 to 80°C
Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 730 µH
• Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
* Associated apparatus (CSA certified barriers)
• Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA
Maximum output voltage (Voc) ≤ 30 V
Maximum output current (Isc) ≤ 165 mA Note 2. Wiring
Maximum output power (Pmax) ≤ 0.9 W • All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical
Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes.
Note 3. Installation
• In hazardous location, wiring shall be in conduit as
• All wiring shall comply with Canadian Electrical
shown in the figure.
Code Part I and Local Electrical Codes.
CAUTION: SEAL ALL CONDUITS
• The instrument modification or parts replacement
WITHIN 50 cm OF THE ENCLOSURE.
by other than authorized representative of
UN SCELLEMENT DOIT ÊTRE
Yokogawa Electric Corporation and Yokogawa
INSTALLÉ À MOINS DE 50 cm DU
BÎTIER.
2-5 IM 01C21F01-01E
• When installed in Division 2, “SEALS NOT Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary
REQUIRED.” marking is crossed out on the label other
Note 3. Operation than the selected type of protection when
• Keep the “CAUTION” label attached to the the transmitter is installed.
transmitter.
CAUTION: OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE 2.9.3 IECEx Certification
REMOVING COVER. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
OUVRIR LE CIRCUIT AVANT absolute pressure transmitters with
D´NLEVER LE COUVERCLE. optional code /SU2 can be selected the type of
• Take care not to generate mechanical sparking protection (IECEx Intrinsically Safe/type n or
when accessing to the instrument and peripheral flameproof) for use in hazardous locations.
devices in a hazardous location. Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair once a particular type of protection is
• The instrument modification or parts replacement selected, any other type of protection
by other than authorized representative of cannot be used. The installation must be
Yokogawa Electric Corporation and Yokogawa in accordance with the description about
Corporation of America is prohibited and will void the type of protection in this instruction
Canadian Standards Explosionproof Certification. manual.
Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary
Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 1
Locations marking is crossed out on the label other
Non-hazardous
than the selected type of protection when
Location the transmitter is installed.
Equipment 50 cm Max.
a. IECEx Intrinsically Safe Type / type n
Caution for IECEx Intrinsically safe and type n.
42 V DC Max. Conduit
Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
4 to 20 mA DC Sealing Fitting absolute pressure transmitters with
Signal
EJA Series optional code /SU2 are applicable for use
in hazardous locations.
Non-Hazardous Hazardous Locations Division 2
Locations • No. IECEx KEM 06.0007X
Non-hazardous • Applicable Standard: IEC 60079-0:2004,
Location IEC 60079-11:1999, IEC 60079-15:2005,
Equipment
IEC 60079-26:2004
• Type of Protection and Marking Code:
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4
42 V DC Max.
4 to 20 mA DC Sealing Fitting • Ambient Temperature :–40 to 60°C
Signal • Max. Process Temp.: 120°C
EJA Series
• Enclosure: IP67
Note 2. Entity Parameters
F0205.EPS
• Intrinsically safe ratings are as follows:
c. CSA Intrinsically Safe Type/CSA Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
Explosionproof Type Maximum Input Current (Ii) = 165 mA
Model EJA Series pressure transmitters with Maximum Input Power (Pi) = 0.9 W
optional code /CU1 can be selected the type of Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 22.5 nF
protection (CSA Intrinsically Safe or CSA Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 730 µH
Explosionproof) for use in hazardous locations. • Type "n" ratings are as follows:
Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter, Maximum Input Voltage (Ui) = 30 V
once a particular type of protection is Maximum Internal Capacitance (Ci) = 22.5 nF
selected, any other type of protection Maximum Internal Inductance (Li) = 730 µH
cannot be used. The installation must be • Installation Requirements
in accordance with the description about Uo ≤ Ui, Io ≤ Ii, Po ≤ Pi,
the type of protection in this instruction Co ≥ Ci + Ccable, Lo ≥ Li + Lcable
manual. Uo, Io, Po, Co, and Lo are parameters of
barrier.
2-6 IM 01C21F01-01E
Note 3. Installation [type n]

• In any safety barreir used output current must be Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
limited by a resistor 'R' such that Io=Uo/R. Group IIC, Zone 2
• The safety barrier must be IECEx certified.
• Input voltage of the safety barrier must be less than EJA Series Pressure IECEx Certified
Transmitters Equipment [nL]
250 Vrms/Vdc.
+ +
• The instrument modification or parts replacement
Supply – –
by other than authorized representative of
Not Use
Yokogawa Electric Corporation and will void Safety Barrier
IECEx Intrinsically safe and type n certification. F0212.EPS
• The cable entry devices and blanking elements for

b. IECEx Flameproof Type
type n shall be of a certified type providing a level
of ingress protection of at least IP54, suitable for Caution for IECEx flameproof type.
the conditions of use and correctly installed. Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
• Electrical Connection: absolute pressure transmitters with
The type of electrical connection is stamped near optional code /SU2 are applicable for use
the electrical connection port according to the in hazardous locations:
following marking. • No. IECEx KEM 06.0005
• Applicable Standard: IEC60079-0:2004,
IEC60079-1:2003
T0202.EPS
Ex d IIC T6...T4
• Enclosure: IP67
• Maximum Process Temperature: 120°C (T4),
100°C (T5), 85°C (T6)
• Ambient Temperature: –40 to 75°C (T4), –40 to
Location of the marking 80°C (T5), –40 to 75°C (T6)
• Supply Voltage: 42 V dc max.
F0210.EPS
• Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA dc
Note 4. Operation Note 2. Wiring
• WARNING: • In hazardous locations, the cable entry devices shall
WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ≥ 55°C, be of a certified flameproof type, suitable for the
USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLES ≥ 90°C. conditions of use and correctly installed.
Note 5. Special Conditions for Safe Use • Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable
• WARNING: flameproof certified blanking elements. (The plug
IN THE CASE WHERE THE ENCLOSURE OF attached is certificated as the flame proof IP67 as a
THE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER IS MADE OF part of this apparatus.)
ALUMINUM, IF IT IS MOUNTED IN AN AREA • In case of ANSI 1/2 NPT plug, ANSI hexagonal
WHERE THE USE OF ZONE 0 IS REQUIRED, wrench should be applied to screw in.
IT MUST BE INSTALLED SUCH, THAT, EVEN Note 3. Operation
IN THE EVENT OF RARE INCIDENTS, IGNI- • WARNING:
TION SOURCES DUE TO IMPACT AND AFTER DE-ENERGIZING, DELAY 10 MINUTES
FRICTION SPARKS ARE EXCLUDED. BEFORE OPENING.
• WARNING:
[Intrinsically Safe]
WHEN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ≥ 70°C,
USE THE HEAT-RESISTING CABLES ≥ 90°C.
Group I/IIC, Zone 0
• Take care not to generate mechanical sparking
when accessing to the instrument and peripheral
General
EJA Series Pressure IECEx certified Purpose devices in a hazardous location.
Transmitters Safety Barrier Equipment Note 4. Maintenance and Repair
+ + + + • The instrument modification or parts replacement
Supply – – – – by other than authorized representative of
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
F0211.EPS
will void IECEx Certification.
2-7 IM 01C21F01-01E
2.9.4 CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) [Installation Diagram]

Certification Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
(1) Technical Data

Transmitter
a. CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsically Safe + +
Type Supply Safety Barrier *1
– –
Caution for CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsi-
cally safe type.
Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
absolute pressure transmitters with F0208.EPS
optional code /KS2 for potentially explo- *1: In any safety barriers used the output current must be limited by
sive atmospheres: a resistor “R” such that Imaxout-Uz/R.
• No. KEMA 02ATEX1030 X
• Applicable Standard: EN50014:1997, b. CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Flameproof Type
EN50020:1994, EN50284:1999 Caution for CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) flameproof
• Type of Protection and Marking code: type.
EEx ia IIC T4 Note 1. Model EJA Series differential, gauge, and
• Temperature Class: T4 absolute pressure transmitters with
• Enclosure: IP67 optional code /KF2 for potentially explo-
• Process Temperature: 120°C max. sive atmospheres:
• Ambient Temperature: –40 to 60°C • No. KEMA 02ATEX2148
Note 2. Electrical Data • Applicable Standard: EN50014:1997,
• In type of explosion protection intrinsic safety EEx EN50018:2000
ia IIC only for connection to a certified intrinsically • Type of Protection and Marking Code: EEx d IIC
safe circuit with following maximum values: T6···T4
Ui = 30 V • Temperature Class: T6, T5, and T4
Ii = 165 mA • Enclosure: IP67
Pi = 0.9 W • Maximum Process Temperature:
Effective internal capacitance; Ci = 22.5 nF 85°C (T6), 100°C (T5), and 120°C (T4)
Effective internal inductance; Li = 730 µH • Ambient Temperature: T4 and T6; –40 to 75°C,
Note 3. Installation T5; –40 to 80°C
• All wiring shall comply with local installation Note 2. Electrical Data
requirements. (Refer to the installation diagram) • Supply voltage: 42 V dc max.
Note 4. Maintenance and Repair • Output signal: 4 to 20 mA
• The instrument modification or parts replacement Note 3. Installation
by other than authorized representative of • All wiring shall comply with local installation
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and requirement.
will void KEMA Intrinsically safe Certification. • The cable entry devices shall be of a certified
Note 5. Special Conditions for Safe Use flameproof type, suitable for the conditions of use.
• In the case where the enclosure of the Pressure Note 4. Operation
Transmitter is made of aluminium, if it is mounted • Keep the “CAUTION” label to the transmitter.
in an area where the use of category 1 G apparatus CAUTION: AFTER DE-ENERGIZING,
is required, it must be installed such, that, even in DELAY 10 MINUTES BEFORE
the event of rare incidents, ignition sources due to OPENING. WHEN THE AMBIENT
impact and friction sparks are excluded. TEMP.⭌70°C, USE HEAT-RESISTING
CABLES⭌90°C.
2-8 IM 01C21F01-01E
• Take care not to generate mechanical sparking Note 3. Maintenance and Repair
when accessing to the instrument and peripheral • The instrument modification or parts replacement
devices in a hazardous location. by other than authorized representative of
Note 5. Maintenance and Repair Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
• The instrument modification or parts replacement will void Type of Protection “n”.
by other than authorized representative of [Installation Diagram]
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and
will void KEMA Flameproof Certification. (Zone 2 only)
Transmitter
c. CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsically Safe + +

Supply Power Supply
Type/CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Flameproof – –
Type/ CENELEC ATEX Type n
Model EJA-A Series pressure transmitters with
optional code /KU2 can be selected the type of
F0209.EPS
protection CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsically
Ratings of the Power Supply as follows;
Safe, Flameproof or CENELEC ATEX Type n Maximum Voltage: 30 V
for use in hazardous locations.
䊉 CENELEC ATEX Type of Protection “Dust”
Note 1. For the installation of this transmitter,
once a particular type of protection is selected, • Applicable Standard: EN50281-1-1:1997
any other type of protection cannot be used. • Type of Protection and Marking Code: II 1D
The installation must be in accordance with the • Maximum Surface Temperature:
description about the type of protection in this T65°C (Tamb.: 40°C), T85°C (Tamb.: 60°C), and
user’s manual. T105°C (Tamb.: 80°C)
Note 2. In order to avoid confusion, unnecessary Note 1. Installation instructions
marking is crossed out on the label other than The cable entry devices and blanking elements
the selected type of protection when the shall be of a certificated type providing a level
transmitter is installed. of ingress protection of at least IP6x, suitable
for the conditions of use and correctly installed.
䊉 CENELEC ATEX Type of Protection “n”
(2) Electrical Connection
The type of electrical connection is stamped near
WARNING the electrical connection port according to the
When using a power supply not having a non- following marking.
incendive circuit, please pay attention not to
ignite in the surrounding flammable atmosphere.
In such a case, we recommend using wiring
metal conduit in order to prevent the ignition.
• Applicable Standard: EN60079-15

• Referential Standard: IEC60079-0, IEC60079-11
Location of the marking
Ex nC IIL T4 F0200.EPS
• Temperature Class: T4
• Enclosure: IP67 (3) Installation
• Process Temperature: 120°C max.
• Ambient Temperature: –40 to 60°C WARNING
Note 1. Electrical Data
• All wiring shall comply with local installation
Ui = 30 V
requirement and local electrical code.
Effective internal capacitance; Ci = 22.5 nF
• There is no need of the conduit seal for both of
Effective internal inductance; Li = 730 µH
Division 1 and Division 2 hazardous locations
Note 2. Installation
because this product is sealed at factory.
• All wiring shall comply with local installation
• In case of ANSI 1/2 NPT plug, ANSI hexagonal
requirements. (refer to the installation diagram)
wrench should be applied to screw in.
2-9 IM 01C21F01-01E
(4) Operation MWP: Maximum working pressure.

CAL RNG: Specified calibration range.
WARNING DISP MODE: Specified display mode.
OUTPUT MODE: Specified output mode.
• OPEN CIRCUIT BEFORE REMOVING NO.: Serial number and year of production*1.
COVER. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH TOKYO 180-8750 JAPAN:
THIS USER’S MANUAL The manufacturer name and the
• Take care not to generate mechanical sparking address*2.
when access to the instrument and peripheral *1: The third figure from the last shows the last one
devices in hazardous locations. figure of the year of production. For example, the
production year of the product engraved in “NO.”
column on the name plate as follows is 2001.
(5) Maintenance and Repair
12A819857 132
WARNING
The instrument modification or parts replacement The year 2001

by other than authorized Representative of *2: “180-8750” is a zip code which represents the
Yokogawa Electric Corporation is prohibited and following address.
will void the certification.
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo Japan
(6) Name Plate

䊉 Name plate 2.10 EMC Conformity Standards
EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial
locations)
EN61326-2-3
: Refer to USER'S MANUAL
䊉 Tag plate for flameproof type CAUTION
This instrument is a Class A product, and it is

designed for use in the industrial environment.
Please use this instrument in the industrial
environment only.
䊉 Tag plate for intrinsically safe type
NOTE
YOKOGAWA recommends customer to apply
䊉 Tag plate for type n protection the Metal Conduit Wiring or to use the twisted
pair Shield Cable for signal wiring to conform the
requirement of EMC Regulation, when customer
installs the EJA Series Transmitters to the plant.
䊉 Tag plate for flameproof, intrinsically safe type,

type n protection, and Dust
2.11 PED (Pressure Equipment
D T65⬚C (Tamb.: 40⬚C), T85⬚C (Tamb.: 60⬚C),
and T105⬚C (Tamb.: 80⬚C)
Directive)
F0298.EPS
(1) General
MODEL: Specified model code. • EJA series of pressure transmitters are categorized
STYLE: Style code. as pressure accessories under the vessel section of
SUFFIX: Specified suffix code. this directive 97/23/EC, which corresponds to
SUPPLY: Supply voltage. Article 3, Paragraph 3 of PED, denoted as Sound
OUTPUT: Output signal. Engineering Practice (SEP).
2-10 IM 01C21F01-01E
• EJA130A, EJA440A, EJA510A, and EJA530A can (3) Operation

be used above 200 bar and therefore considered as
a part of a pressure retaining vessel where category CAUTION
lll, Module H applies. These models with option
code /PE3 conform to that category. • The temperature and pressure of fluid should
be applied under the normal operating condi-
(2) Technical Data tion.
• Models without /PE3 • The ambient temperature should be applied
Article 3, Paragraph 3 of PED, denoted as Sound under the normal operating condition.
Engineering Practice (SEP) . • Please pay attention to prevent the excessive
• Models with /PE3 pressure like water hammer, etc. When water
Module: H hammer is to be occurred, please take mea-
Type of Equipment: Pressure Accessory - Vessel sures to prevent the pressure from exceeding
Type of Fluid: Liquid and Gas PS by setting the safety valve, etc. at the
Group of Fluid: 1 and 2 system and the like.
• When external fire is to be occurred, please
Model PS(bar)*1 V(L) PS-V(bar-L) Category*2 take safety measures at the device or system
Article 3, paragraph 3 not to influence the transmitters.
EJA110A 160 0.01 1.6 (SEP)
Article 3, paragraph 3
EJA120A 0.5 0.01 0.005 (SEP)
EJA130A 420 0.01 4.2 (SEP) 2.12 Low Voltage Directive
EJA130A
With code /PE3 420 0.01 4.2 III Applicable standard : EN61010-1
EJA310A 160 0.01 1.6 (SEP) (1) Pollution Degree 2
EJA430A 160 0.01 1.6 (SEP)
"Pollution degree" describes the degree to which a
Article 3, paragraph 3 soild, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric
EJA440A 500 0.01 50 (SEP) strength or surface resistivity is adhering. " 2 "
EJA440A applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally,
With code /PE3 500 0.01 50 III
only non-conductive pollution occurs. Occasionally,
EJA510A 500 0.01 50 (SEP) however, temporary conductivity caused by
EJA510A condenstaion must be expected.
(2) Installation Category I
EJA530A 500 0.01 50 (SEP) "Overvoltage category(Installation category)"
EJA530A describes a number which defines a transient
overvoltage condition. It implies the regulattion for
*1: PS is maximum allowable pressure for vessel itself.
*2: Referred to Table 1 covered by ANNEX II of EC Directive impulse withstand voltage. " I " applies to electrical
on Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC T0299.EPS
equipment which is supplied from the circuit when
appropriate transient overvoltage control means
(interfaces) are provided.
2-11 IM 01C21F01-01E
3. COMPONENT NAMES
3. COMPONENT NAMES
External indicator Transmitter section
conduit connection (Note 1)
Terminal box cover
CPU assembly
Zero-adjustment screw
Integral
indicator (Note 1)
Mounting screw Pipe (Open to atmosphere)
(Note 3)
Setting pin (CN4) Capsule assembly
Range-setting
switch (Note 1)
(See Subsection 7.5)
Amplifier Cover Setting Pin (CN4) Burn-Out Output at

Position (Note 2) Direction Burn-Out
H
110% or
HIGH higher
L
H
-5% or
LOW lower
L
F0301.EPS
Note 1: See Subsection 10.2, “Model and Suffix Codes,” for

details.
Note 2: Insert the pin (CN4) as shown in the figure above to
set the burn-out direction. The pin is set to the H side
for delivery (unless option code /C1 is specified in the
order).
The setting can be confirmed by calling up parameter
D52 using the BRAIN TERMINAL. Refer to Subsection
8.3.3 (8).
Note 3: Applied to Model EJA530A with Measurement span
code A, B, and C.
Figure 3.1 Component Names
Table 3.1 Display Symbol

Display Symbol Meaning of Display Symbol
The output signal being zero-adjusted is increasing.
The output signal being zero-adjusted is decreasing.
%, Pa, kPa, MPa, kgf/cm2, gf/cm2, mbar, bar,
atm, mmHg, mmH2O, inH2O, inHg, ftH2O, psi, Torr Select one of these sixteen available engineering units for the display.
T0301.EPS
3-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
4. INSTALLATION
4. INSTALLATION
4.1 Precautions Vertical pipe mounting
Before installing the transmitter, read the cautionary

notes in Section 2.4, “Selecting the Installation Adapter
Location.” For additional information on the ambient
conditions allowed at the installation location, refer to U-bolt (S) Plate
Subsection 10.1 “Standard Specifications.” U-bolt nut (S)
IMPORTANT
• When welding piping during construction, take U-bolt nut (L)
care not to allow welding currents to flow
Mounting bracket
through the transmitter.
• Do not step on this instrument after installation. 50 mm(2-inch) pipe U-bolt (L)
Horizontal pipe mounting
4.2 Mounting Adapter

䊏 The impulse piping connection port of the transmit-
ter is covered with a plastic cap to protect against U-bolt (S) Plate
dust. This cap must be removed before connecting U-bolt nut (S)
the piping. (Be careful not to damage the threads
when removing these caps. Never insert a screw
driver or other tool between the cap and the port
threads to remove the cap.) U-bolt nut (L)
䊏 The transmitter can be mounted on a nominal 50 Mounting bracket

mm (2-inch) pipe using the mounting bracket
U-bolt (L)
supplied, as shown in Figure 4.2.1. 50 mm(2-inch) pipe
F0401.EPS
䊏 The user should prepare the mating gasket for the Figure 4.2.1 Transmitter Mounting
transmitters with Process connection code 8 and 9.
See Figure 4.2.2.
Gasket
F0402.EPS
Figure 4.2.2 Gasketing
4-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
4. INSTALLATION
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
Tighten the hexagonal nut part of the capsule Do not rotate the transmitter section more than
assembly. See Figure 4.2.3. 180°.
Transmitter section Rotate 90° or 180° segments
Capsule assembly
Conduit connection
Zero-adjustment screw
Gasket
Pipe
Allen screw Capsule assembly

F0403.EPS
Figure 4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section

F0404.EPS
Figure 4.2.3 Tightening Transmitter

4.4 Changing the Direction of
4.3 Rotating Transmitter Section Integral Indicator
The DPharp transmitter section can be rotated in 90°
segments. IMPORTANT
1) Remove the two Allen screws that fasten the
Always turn OFF power, release pressure and
transmitter section and capsule assembly, using the
remove a transmitter to non-hazardous area
Allen wrench. Also, remove the pipe for the model
before disassembling and reassmbling an
EJA530A with Measurement span code A, B, and
indicator.
C, using the slotted screwdriver.
2) Rotate the transmitter section slowly in 90° seg-
ments. An integral indicator can be installed in the following
3) Tighten the two Allen screws to a torque of 5 N·m, three directions. Follow the instructions in section 9.4
and replace the pipe if applied. for removing and attaching the integral indicator.
F0405.EPS
Figure 4.4 Integral Indicator Direction
4-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
5. INSTALLING IMPULSE PIPING

5.1 Impulse Piping Installation 5.1.2 Routing the Impulse Piping
Precautions
(1) Process Pressure Tap Angles
5.1.1 Connecting Impulse Piping to the If condensate, gas, sediment or other extraneous
Transmitter material in the process piping gets into the impulse
piping, pressure measurement errors may result. To
prevent such problems, the process pressure taps must
IMPORTANT be angled as shown in Figure 5.1.2 according to the
kind of fluid being measured.
The transmitter can be installed in horizontal
impulse piping configuration, tilting the
transmitter's position up to 90°. When tilting,
NOTE
observe that the zero-adjustment screw and the
pipe (for Model EJA530A with Measurement • If the process fluid is a gas, the taps must be
span code A, B, and C) are positioned down- vertical or within 45° either side of vertical.
wards, as shown in Figure 5.1.1. • If the process fluid is a liquid, the taps must be
horizontal or below horizontal, but not more
than 45° below horizontal.
• If the process fluid is steam or other condens-
ing vapor, the taps must be horizontal or above
horizontal, but not more than 45° above hori-
zontal.
Pipe Zero-adjustment screw
[Gas] [Liquid] [Steam]
(Open to atmosphere)
F0503.EPS
45° 45°
Pressure
Figure 5.1.1 Horizontal Impulse Piping Connection taps 45° 45°
Process 45° 45°

piping
F0504.EPS
Figure 5.1.2 Process Pressure Tap Angle (For Horizontal

Piping)
5-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
(2) Position of Process Pressure Taps and 5.2 Impulse Piping Connection
Transmitter
Examples
If condensate (or gas) accumulates in the impulse
piping, it should be removed periodically by opening Figure 5.2 shows examples of typical impulse piping
the drain (or vent) plugs. However, this will generate a connections. Before connecting the transmitter to the
transient disturbance in the pressure measurement, and process, study the transmitter installation location, the
therefore it is necessary to position the taps and route process piping layout, and the characteristics of the
the impulse piping so that any extraneous liquid or gas process fluid (corrosiveness, toxicity, flammability,
generated in the leadlines returns naturally to the etc.), in order to make appropriate changes and
process piping. additions to the connection configurations.
• If the process fluid is a gas, then as a rule the Note the following points when referring to these
transmitter must be located higher than the process piping examples.
pressure taps. • If the impulse piping is long, bracing or supports
• If the process fluid is a liquid or steam, then as a should be provided to prevent vibration.
rule the transmitter must be located lower than the • The impulse piping material used must be compat-
process pressure taps. ible with the process pressure, temperature, and
(3) Impulse Piping Slope other conditions.
The impulse piping must be routed with only an • A variety of process pressure tap valves (main
upward or downward slope. Even for horizontal valves) are available according to the type of
routing, the impulse piping should have a slope of at connection (flanged, screwed, welded), construction
least 1/10 to prevent condensate (or gases) from (globe, gate, or ball valve), temperature and
accumulating in the pipes. pressure. Select the type of valve most appropriate
for the application.
(4) Preventing Freezing
If there is any risk that the process fluid in the impulse Tap valve
piping or transmitter could freeze, use a steam jacket or
heater to maintain the temperature of the fluid.
Union or flange
Stop valve
NOTE
After completing the connections, close the valves
on the process pressure taps (main valves), the Tee
valves at the transmitter (stop valves), and the Stop valve
impulse piping drain valves, so that condensate, Union or flange

sediment, dust and other extraneous material Drain valve
cannot enter the impulse piping. Drain plug
F0505.EPS
Figure 5.2 Impulse Piping Connection Examples
5-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
6. WIRING
6. WIRING
6.1 Wiring Precautions 6.3 Connections of External

Wiring to Terminal Box
IMPORTANT 6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection
• Lay wiring as far as possible from electrical Connect the power supply wiring to the SUPPLY +
noise sources such as large capacity transform- and – terminals.
ers, motors, and power supplies.
• Remove electrical connection dust cap before Transmitter terminal box
+
wiring. Power supply
• All threaded parts must be treated with water- –
proofing sealant. (A non-hardening silicone
group sealant is recommended.) F0601.EPS
• To prevent noise pickup, do not pass signal

Figure 6.3.1 Power Supply Wiring Connection
and power cables through the same ducts.
• Explosion-protected instruments must be wired
in accordance with specific requirements (and,
6.3.2 External Indicator Connection
in certain countries, legal regulations) in order
to preserve the effectiveness of their explosion- Connect wiring for external indicators to the CHECK +
protected features. and – terminals.
• The terminal box cover is locked by an Allen (Note) Use a external indicator whose internal resistance is 10 Ω or
head bolt (a shrouding bolt) on CENELEC and less.
IECEx flameproof type transmitters. When the
External indicator
shrouding bolt is driven clockwise by an Allen Power supply
wrench, it is going in and cover lock is re- +
leased, and then the cover can be opened by –
hand. See Subsection 9.4 “Disassembly and

Reassembly” for details.
Transmitter terminal box
F0602.EPS
Figure 6.3.2 External Indicator Connection

6.2 Selecting the Wiring Materi-
als
6.3.3 BRAIN TERMINAL BT200 Connec-
(a) Use stranded leadwires or cables which are the tion
same as or better than 600 V grade PVC insulated
Connect the BT200 to the SUPPLY + and – terminals
wire (JIS C3307) or equivalent.
(Use hooks). The communication line requires a
(b) Use shielded wires in areas that are susceptible to
reception resistor of 250 to 600 Ω in series.
electrical noise.
(c) In areas with higher or lower ambient temperatures,
use appropriate wires or cables. +
(d) In environment where oils, solvents, corrosive gases Power supply
or liquids may be present, use wires or cables that –
are resistant to such substances. Ignore the polarity

since the BT200 is
(e) It is recommended that crimp-on solderless terminal AC-coupled to the
lugs (for 4 mm screws) with insulating sleeves be BT200 terminal box.
F0603.EPS
used for leadwire ends.
Figure 6.3.3 BT200 Connection
6-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
6. WIRING
6.3.4 Check Meter Connection (2) Intrinsically Safe Type

For intrinsically safe type, a safety barrier must be
Connect the check meter to the CHECK + and –
included in the loop.
terminals (use hooks).
• A 4 to 20 mA DC output signal from the CHECK + Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location
and – terminals.
(Note) Use a check meter whose internal resistance is 10 Ω or less. Transmitter terminal box
Distributor
(Power supply unit)
Power supply
+
–
Receiver
instrument
+
–
Check meter
Transmitter terminal box F0604.EPS
Safety barrier F0606.EPS
Figure 6.3.4 Check Meter Connection

Figure 6.4.1b Connection between Transmitter and
Distributor
6.4 Wiring
6.4.2 Wiring Installation
6.4.1 Loop Configuration
(1) General-use Type and Intrinsically Safe
Since the DPharp uses a two-wire transmission system, Type
signal wiring is also used as power wiring. Make cable wiring using metallic conduit or water-
DC power is required for the transmitter loop. The proof glands.
transmitter and distributor are connected as shown • Apply a non-hardening sealant to the terminal box
below. connection port and to the threads on the flexible
For details of the power supply voltage and load metal conduit for waterproofing.
resistance, see Section 6.6; for communications line
Apply a non-hardening
requirements, see Subsection 8.1.2. sealant to the threads for
waterproofing.
(1) General-use Type and Flameproof Type
Wiring metal
Hazardous Location Nonhazardous Location conduit
Transmitter terminal box Tee

Distributor
(Power supply unit)
Drain plug
Receiver Flexible metal conduit

+
instrument
– F0607.EPS
F0605.EPS
Figure 6.4.2a Typical Wiring Using Flexible Metal Conduit
Figure 6.4.1a Connection between Transmitter and
Distributor
6-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
6. WIRING
(2) Flameproof Type 6.5 Grounding

Wire cables through a flameproof packing adapter, or
Grounding is always required for the proper operation
using a flameproof metal conduit.
of transmitters. Follow the domestic electrical require-
䊏 Wiring cable through flameproof packing adapter. ments as regulated in each country. For a transmitter
• Apply a nonhardening sealant to the terminal box with built-in lightning protector, grounding should
connection port and to the threads on the flameproof satisfy ground resistance of 10⍀ or less.
packing adapter for waterproofing.
Ground terminals are located on the inside and outside
Apply a non-hardening of the terminal box. Either of these terminals may be
sealant to the threads for used.
waterproofing.

Wiring metal
conduit
Ground terminal
Tee (Inside)
Drain plug
Flexible metal conduit
Flameproof packing adapter
Ground terminal
F0608.EPS
(Outside)
Figure 6.4.2b Typical Cable Wiring Using Flameproof
;;
Packing Adapter
F0610.EPS
䊏 Flameproof metal conduit wiring Figure 6.5 Ground Terminals

• A seal fitting must be installed near the terminal box
connection port for a sealed construction.
• Apply a non-hardening sealant to the threads of the
terminal box connection port, flexible metal conduit 6.6 Power Supply Voltage and
and seal fitting for waterproofing. Load Resistance
Non-hazardous area Gas sealing device When configuring the loop, make sure that the external
load resistance is within the range in the figure below.
Apply a non-hardening
(Note) In case of an intrinsically safe transmitter, external load
sealant to the threads of
these fittings for resistance includes safety barrier resistance.
Hazardous area waterproofing
600
Flameproof
External E–10.5
heavy-gauge R= Communication
steel conduit load 0.0236
applicable range
resistance BRAIN and HART
R (Ω)
Tee
Flameproof flexible
Drain plug 250
metal conduit
Seal fitting
After wiring, impregnate the fitting
with a compound to seal tubing.
F0609.EPS
Figure 6.4.2c Typical Wiring Using Flameproof Metal

Conduit 0 10.5 16.4 24.7 42
Power supply voltage E (V DC)
F0611.EPS
Figure 6.6 Relationship between Power Supply Voltage

and External Load Resistance
6-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
7. OPERATION
7. OPERATION
7.1 Preparation for Starting 䊏 Confirming that Transmitter is Operating

Properly
Operation Using the BT200
This section describes the operation procedure for • If the wiring system is faulty, ‘communication error’
appears on the display.
measuring a pressure as shown in Figure 7.1.
• If the transmitter is faulty, ‘SELF CHECK ERROR’
appears on the display.
NOTE
PARAM
C60:SELF CHECK
Confirm that the process pressure tap valve, ERROR
drain valve, and stop valve are closed. communication error
(a) Introduce a process fluid into the impulse piping DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
and then to the transmitter in the following proce- Communication error Self-diagnostic error
dure: (Faulty wiring) (Faulty transmitter)
F0702.EPS
1) Open the tap valve (main valve) to fill the impulse
piping with process fluid. Using the integral indicator
2) Gradually open the stop valve to introduce process • If the wiring system is faulty, the display stays blank.
fluid into the transmitter pressure-detector section. • If the transmitter is faulty, an error code will appear
3) Confirm that there is no pressure leak in the on the display according to the nature of the error.
impulse piping, transmitter, or other components.
(b) Turn ON power and connect the BT200.
(c) Using the BT200, confirm that the transmitter is
operating properly. Check parameter values or
change the setpoints as necessary. See Chapter 8 for
BT200 operation. Self-diagnostic error on
the integral indicator
(Faulty transmitter)
Union or flange F0703.EPS
Vent plug (Fill plug)
Tap valve NOTE

If any of the error indications above appears on
the display of the integral indicator or BT200,
Stop valve
refer to Subsection 8.5.2 for corrective action.
䊏 Verify and Change Transmitter Parameter

Tee Setting and Values
The following parameters are the minimum settings
Union or flange
required for operation. The transmitter has been
Drain valve shipped with these parameters. To confirm or change
the values, see Subsection 8.3.3.
Drain plug
F0701.EPS
• Measuring range..........See Subsection 8.3.3 (2)
Figure 7.1 Liquid Flow Measurement (Gauge Pressure • Operation mode...........See Subsection 8.3.3 (7)
Transmitters)
7-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
7. OPERATION
7.2 Zero Point Adjustment 7.2.1 When you can obtain Low Range
Value from actual measured value
Adjust the zero point after operating preparation is of 0% (0 kPa, atmospheric pres-
completed. sure);
For pressure measurement using gauge pressure
transmitters, follow the step below before zero point
IMPORTANT
adjustment.
Do not turn off the power to the transmitter 1) Close the tap valve (main valve).
immediately after a zero adjustment. Powering 2) Loosen the fill plug so that the pressure applied to
off within 30 seconds after a zero adjustment will the transmitter is only the head of the seal liquid.
return the adjustment back to the previous 3) Adjust the zero point at this status.
settings. 4) After the adjustment, close the fill plug and then
gradually open the tap valve.
The zero point adjustment can be made in either way:

using the zero-adjustment screw of the transmitter or 䊏 Using the Transmitter Zero-adjustment
Screw
the BT200 operation.
Before adjusting a screw, check that the parameter
For output signal checking, display the parameter A10: J20: EXT ZERO ADJ displays ENABLE. See
OUTPUT (%) in the BT200. Subsection 8.3.3 (11) for the setting procedure.
• Use a slotted screwdriver to turn the zero-adjustment
•BT200 screw. Turn the screw clockwise to increase the
PARAM Output signal (%) output or counterclockwise to decrease the output.
A10:OUTPUT(%) display The zero point adjustment can be made with a
0.0 %
A11:ENGR OUTPUT resolution of 0.01% of the setting range. Since the
A20:AMP TEMP degree of zero adjustments varies with the screw
turning speed, turn the screw slowly for fine adjust-
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC ment and quickly for coarse adjustment.
•Zero-adjustment Screw 䊏 Using the BT200

Zero point can be adjusted by simple key operation of
the BT200.
Select parameter J10: ZERO ADJ, and press the
Zero-adjustment ENTER key twice. The zero point will be adjusted
screw
automatically to the output signal 0% (4 mA DC).
F0704.EPS Confirm that the setting value displayed for the
After reviewing this parameter you are prepared to parameter is ‘0.0%’ before pressing the ENTER key.
adjust the zero point. When making the zero adjust- See Subsection 8.3.3 (11) for BT200 operating proce-
ment on a pressure transmitter, the process pressure dures.
value does not have to be set to the low limit of the
measurement range (0%). In such case, adjust the SET
J10:ZERO ADJ Display when parameter
transmitter output signal to the actual measured value –0.0 %
J10 is selected.
+ 000.0
obtained from a high-accuracy pressure measuring
Press key
instrument.
twice for 0% output 4 mA DC.
CLR ESC
F0705.EPS
7-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
7. OPERATION
7.2.2 When you cannot obtain Low Range 7.3 Starting Operation
Value from actual measured value
of 0%; After completing the zero point adjustment, follow the
procedure below to start operation.
Convert the actual measured value obtained by a digital
manometer or a glass gauge into %. 1) Confirm the operating status. If the output signal
exhibits wide fluctuations (hunting) due to periodic
[Example] variation in the process pressure, use BT200 to
The measuring range of 50 to 250 kPa; the actual dampen the transmitter output signal. Confirm the
measured value of 130 kPa. hunting using a receiving instrument or the integral
indicator, and set the optimum damping time
130–50 constant. See Subsection 8.3.3 (3), “Damping Time
Actual measured value= x 100=40.0% Constant Setup.”
250–50
2) After confirming the operating status, perform the
䊏 Using the Transmitter Zero-Adjustment Screw following.
Turn the screw to match the output signal to the actual
measured value in %.
IMPORTANT
䊏 Using the BT200
• Remove the BT200 from the terminal box, and
Select the parameter J10: ZERO ADJ. Change the
confirm that none of the terminal screws are
set point (%) displayed for the parameter to the actual
loosened.
measured value (%), and press the ENTER key twice.
• Close the terminal box cover and the amplifier
See Subsection 8.3.3 (11) for operation details.
cover. Screw each cover in tightly until it will
not turn further.
SET Display at J10 • Two covers are required to be locked on the
J10:ZERO ADJ
–0.0 %
+ 000.0 CENELEC and IECEx Flameproof type trans-
mitters. An Allen head bolts (shrouding bolts)
are provided under edge of the each cover for
CLR ESC locking. When a shrouding bolts are driven
counterclockwise by an Allen wrench, it is
coming out and locks up a cover. (See page 9-
SET Change setting to the actually 4) After locking, the covers should be con-
J10:ZERO ADJ
–0.0 % measured value (40.0%). firmed not to be opened by hands.
+ 040.0
Press key twice • Tighten the zero-adjustment cover mounting
for 40% output 10.4 mA DC. screw to fix the cover in position.
CLR ESC
F0706.EPS
7.4 Shutting Down Operation

Shut down the transmitter operation as follows.
1) Turn off the power.
2) Close the stop valve.
3) Close the tap valve.
NOTE
Whenever shutting down the transmitter for a
long period, remove any process fluid from the
transmitter pressure-detector section.
7-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
7. OPERATION
7.5 Setting the Range Using the IMPORTANT

Range-setting Switch
• Do not turn off the power to the transmitter
With actual pressure being applied to the transmitter, immediately after completion of the change in
the range-setting switch (push-button) located on the the LRV and/or HRV setting(s). Note that
optional /E integral indicator plate and the external powering off within thirty seconds after setting
zero-adjustment screw allow users to change (re-range) will cause a return to the previous settings.
the low- and high-limit values for the measurement • Changing LRV automatically changes HRV to
range (LRV and HRV) without using BT200. How- the following value.
ever, other changes in the display settings (scale range
HRV = previous HRV + (new LRV – previous LRV)
and engineering unit) for the integral indicator requires
BT200. • If the range-setting push-button and external
zero-adjustment screw are not touched during a
Follow the procedure below to change the LRV and
range-change operation, the transmitter auto-
HRV settings.
matically switches back to the normal operation
[Example] mode.
Rerange LRV to 0 and HRV to 3 MPa.
Integral indicator
1) Connect the transmitter and apparatus as shown in
Figure 9.3.1 and warm up for at least five minutes. Note : Use a thin bal which
2) Press the range-setting push-button. has a blunt tip, e.g.,
a hexagonal wrench,
The integral indicator then displays “LSET.” to press the range-
3) Apply a pressure of 0 kPa (atmospheric pressure) to setting push-button
the transmitter. (Note 1)
4) Turn the external zero-adjustment screw in the
desired direction. The integral indicator displays the Range-setting switch
(Push-button)
output signal in %. (Note 2) F0707.EPS
5) Adjust the output signal to 0% (1 V DC) by rotating Figure 7.5 Range-setting Switch
the external zero-adjustment screw. Doing so
completes the LRV setting.
6) Press the range-setting push-button. The integral
indicator then displays “HSET.”
7) Apply a pressure of 3 MPa to the transmitter. (Note 1)
8) Turn the external zero-adjustment screw in the
desired direction. The integral indicator displays the
output signal in %. (Note 2)
9) Adjust the output signal to 100% (5 V DC) by
rotating the external zero-adjustment screw. Doing
so completes the HRV setting.
10) Press the range-setting push-button. The transmitter
then switches back to the normal operation mode
with the measurement range of 0 to 3 MPa.
Note 1: Wait until the pressure inside the pressure-detector section
has stabilized before proceeding to the next step.
Note 2: If the pressure applied to the transmitter exceeds the previous
LRV (or HRV), the integral indicator may display error
number “Er.07” (In this case, the output signal percent and
“Er.07” are displayed alternately every two seconds).
Although “Er.07” is displayed, you may proceed to the next
step. However, should any other error number be displayed,
take the appropriate measure in reference to Subsection
8.5.2, “Errors and Countermeasures.”
7-4 IM 01C21F01-01E
8. BRAIN TERMINAL BT200 OPERATION
8. BRAIN TERMINAL BT200

OPERATION
The DPharp is equipped with BRAIN communica- 8.2 BT200 Operating Procedures
tions capabilities, so that range changes, Tag No.
setup, monitoring of self-diagnostic results, and zero 8.2.1 Key Layout and Screen Display
point adjustment can be handled by remote control
via BT200 BRAIN TERMINAL or CENTUM CS Figure 8.2.1a shows the arrangement of the operating
console. This section describes procedures for setting keys on the BT200 keypad, and Figure 8.2.1b shows
parameters using the BT200. For details concerning the BT200 screen component.
the BT200, see IM 01C00A11-01E, “BT200 User’s
Manual.”
LCD
8.1 BT200 Operation Precau- (21 character × 8 lines)
tions
8.1.1 Connecting the BT200
The transmitter and the BT200 can be connected
either to the BT200 connection hooks in the transmit- Function keys
ter terminal box or to a relaying terminal board.
Movement keys
ENTER key
Control room Power ON/OFF key

Relaying
terminals Terminal board
Alphanumeric keys
Distributor
Shift keys
F0803.EPS
F0801.EPS
Figure 8.2.1a BT200 Key Layout
Figure 8.1.1 Connecting the BT200
MENU SCREEN
Messages
8.1.2 Conditions of Communication Line MENU BATTERY
A:DISPLAY
B:SENSOR TYPE
Menu choices
Cable resistance Rc Screen title
HOME SET ADJ ESC
Power PARAMETER SCREEN

cc
supply PARAM
A10:OUTPUT
100.0 %
Function
Parameters A11:ENGR. OUTPUT commands
1000 mmH20
Load Cable DPharp A20:AMP TEMP
23 deg C
resistance R resistance Rc DATA DI AG PRNT
F0804.EPS
䊉 Loop resistance = R + 2Rc
= 250 to 600 Ω Figure 8.2.1b BT200 Screen Component
䊉 Loop capacitance = 0.22 µF max. BT200
F0802.EPS
Figure 8.1.2 Conditions of Communication Line

8-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.2.2 Operating Key Functions Use the function key [F1] CODE to enter symbols.
The following symbols will appear in sequence, one
(1) Alphanumeric Keys and Shift Keys at a time, at the cursor each time you press [F1]
You can use the alphanumeric keys in conjunction CODE:
with the shift keys to enter symbols, as well as
/ . – , + * ) ( ’ & % $ # ” !
alphanumeric keys.
To enter characters next to these symbols, press [ > ]
to move the cursor.
Entry Key-in Sequence

Alphanumeric keys symbol command
l/m
(I) (/) (m)
T0803.EPS
Shift keys F0805.EPS
(2) Function Keys

a. Entering Digits, Symbols, and Spaces The functions of the function keys depend on the
(0 to 9, ., 2, ) function commands on display.
Simply press the alphanumeric keys.
MENU
Entry Key-in Sequence A:DISPLAY
B:SENSOR TYPE
–4
0.3
1 –9
HOME SET ADJ ESC Function commands
T0801.EPS
Function keys
b. Entering Letters (A through Z) F0808.EPS
Press an alphanumeric key following a shift key to

enter the letter shown on that side which the shift key
represents. You must press the shift key before Function Command List
entering each letter. Command Function
ADJ Displays the ADJ menu
Left-side letter on the Right-side letter on CAPS/caps Selects uppercase or lowercase
alphanumeric key the alphanumeric key CODE Selects symbols
CLR Erases input data or deletes all data
F0806 .EPS
DATA Updates parameter data
Entry Key-in Sequence DEL Deletes one character
W DIAG Calls the self-check panel
IC ESC Returns to the most recent display

HOME Displays the menu panel
J. B
NO Quits setup and returns to the previous display
T0802.EPS
Use the function key [F2] to select between

CAPS OK Proceeds to the next panel
uppercase and lowercase (for letters only). The case PARM Enters the parameter number setup mode
toggles between uppercase and lowercase each time SET Displays the SET menu
you press [F2] CAPS. SLOT Returns to the slot selection panel
UTIL Calls the utility panel
Entering uppercase Entering lowercase *COPY Prints out parameters on display
CODE CAPS CLR ESC CODE caps CLR ESC *FEED Paper feed
*LIST Lists all parameters in the menu
*PON/POFF Automatic printout mode on or off
Entry Key-in Sequence *PRNT Changes to the print mode
to lower case *GO Starts printing
Boy *STOP Cancels printing
(B) (o) (y)
* Available on BT200-P00 (with printer).
F0807.EPS T0804.EPS
8-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.2.3 Calling Up Menu Addresses Using the Operating Keys
––WELCOME–– UTILITY The utility screen contains the

BRAIN TERMINAL 1.ID following items.
ID: BT200 2.SECURITY CODE
STARTUP 3.LANGUAGE SELECT 1. BT200 ID settings
SCREEN check connection 4.LCD CONTRAST 2. Security code settings
push ENTER key 5.PRINTER ADJUST
3. Switching language of messages
UTIL FEED esc (Japanese or English)
4. LCD contrast setting
5. Adjusting printout tone
(UTIL)
(BT200-P00 only)
PARAM
01:MODEL
EJA510A-DC
INITIAL 02:TAG NO. FUNC
DATA YOKOGAWA 1.MENU
SCREEN 03:SELF CHECK (ESC) 2.UPLOAD TO BT200
GOOD 3.DOWNLOAD TO INST
OK 4.PRINT ALL DATA
HOME SET ADJ ESC
(SET) (ADJ)
(HOME MENU SCREEN) (SET MENU SCREEN) (ADJ MENU SCREEN)
MENU MENU MENU
A.DISPLAY C.SETTING J.ADJUST
B.SENSOR TYPE D.AUX SET 1 K.TEST
MENU E.AUX SET 2 M.MEMO
SCREEN H:AUTO SET P:RECORD
HOME SET ADJ ESC HOME SET ADJ ESC HOME SET ADJ ESC
PARAM PARAM
A60:SELF CHECK C60:SELF CHECK
GOOD GOOD
PARAM PARAM PARAM

A21:CAPSULE TEMP C22:HIGH RANGE J60:SELF CHECK
PARA- 26.5 deg C 100 kPa GOOD
METER DATA DIAG PRNT ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
SCREEN
PARAM PARAM PARAM
A10:OUTPUT(%) C10:TAG NO. J10:ZERO ADJ
50.0 % YOKOGAWA 0.0 %
DATA DIAG
A11:ENGR, PRNT
OUTPUT ESC DATA DIAG
C20:PRESS UNITPRNT ESC DATA DIAG
J11:ZERO DEV PRNT ESC
20.0 M kPa 22.2 %
A20:AMP TEMP C21:LOW RANGE J20:EXT. ZERO ADJ
24.5 deg C 0 kPa ENABLE
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
SET See “BT200 Instruction Manual” for details

SETUP
C10:TAG NO. concerning uploading and downloading parameters
YOKOGAWA
SCREEN YOKOGAWA and printouts (BT200-P00).
CODE CAPS CLR ESC

F0809.EPS
8-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.3 Setting Parameters Using the BT200

8.3.1 Parameter Summary
Instruments to which applicable:
F: Differential pressure transmitters EJA110A, EJA120A, and EJA130A
P: Pressure transmitters EJA310A, EJA430A, EJA440A, EJA510A, and EJA530A
L: Liquid level transmitters EJA210A and EJA220A
Applica-
Rewrita- bility
No. Item Description Remarks Default Value
bility F P L
01 MODEL Model+capsule type —
02 TAG NO. Tag number — 16 alphanumerics

03 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic result — GOOD/ERROR
A DISPLAY Measured data display — Menu name
A10 OUTPUT (%) Output (in %) — –5 to 110%*3
A11 ENGR. Output (in engineering — –19999 to 19999
OUTPUT units)
A20 AMP TEMP Amplifier temperature — Unit specified in D30
A21 CAPSULE Capsule temperature — Unit specified in D30
TEMP
A30 STATIC Static pressure — Unit specified in D31*1 —
PRESS
A40 INPUT Input (indicated as the — –32000 to 32000
value after zeroing)
A60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — GOOD/ERROR, CAP MODULE FAULT, AMP MODULE FAULT,
messages OUT OF RANGE, OUT OF SP RANGE*1, OVER TEMP (CAP),
OVER TEMP (AMP), OVER OUTPUT, OVER DISPLAY,
ILLEGAL LRV, ILLEGAL HRV, ILLEGAL SPAN, and
ZERO ADJ OVER
B SENSOR Sensor type — Menu name
TYPE
B10 MODEL Model+span — 16 uppercase alphanumerics
B11 STYLE NO.Style number —
B20 LRL Lower range-limit — –32000 to 32000

B21 URL Upper range-limit — –32000 to 32000
B30 MIN SPAN Minimum span — –32000 to 32000
B40 MAX STAT.P.
Maximum static — —
pressure*6
B60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
C SETTING Setting data — Menu name
C10 TAG. NO. Tag number 16 alphanumerics As specified when ordered.
C20 PRESS UNIT Measurement range Selected from mmH2O, mmAq, As specified when ordered.
units mmWG, mmHg, Torr, Pa, hPa, kPa,
MPa, mbar, bar, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2,
inH2O, inHg, ftH2O, psi, or atm
C21 LOW RANGE Measurement range, –32000 to 32000(but within As specified when ordered.
lower range value measurement range)
C22 HIGH Measurement range, –32000 to 32000(but within As specified when ordered.
RANGE higher range value measurement range)
C30 AMP Damping time constant Selected from 0.2*2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 2.0 s
DAMPING 4.0, 8.0, 16.0, 32.0, or 64.0 sec.
C40 OUTPUT Output mode and Selected from OUT:LIN; DSP:LIN, As specified when ordered. — —
MODE integral indicator mode OUT:LIN; DSP:SQR, If not specified,

OUT:SQR; DSP:SQR OUT: LIN; DSP: LIN.
C60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
D AUX SET 1 Auxiliary setting data 1 — Menu name
D10 LOW CUT Low cut 0.0 to 20.0% 10.0%
D11 LOW CUT Low cut mode LINEAR/ZERO LINEAR
MODE
D15 OUT LIMIT(L) Lower output range-limit –5.0 to 110.0% –5.0%*1
D16 OUT LIMIT(H) Upper output range-limit –5.0 to 110.0% 110.0%
D20 DISP SELECT Display selection NORMAL %/USER SET, As specified when ordered.
USER & %/INP PRES, PRES & %
D21 DISP UNIT Engineering unit for 8 uppercase
display alphanumerics
D22 DISP LRV Engineering range, –19999 to 19999 As specified when ordered.
lower range value
D23 DISP HRV Engineering range, –19999 to 19999 As specified when ordered.
higher range value
D30 TEMP UNIT Temperature setting deg C/deg F deg C
units
*1: Unless otherwise specified by order. When optional code /F1 is specified, substitute the value –5 with –2.5.
T0805.EPS
8-4 IM 01C21F01-01E
Applica-
No. Item Description Rewrita- Remarks bility
Default Value
bility F P L
D AUX SET 1 Auxiliary setting data 1 — Menu name
D31 STAT. P. UNIT Static pressure setting Selected from mmH2O, mmAq, As specified when ordered. —
units mmWG, mmHg, Torr, Pa, hPa, kPa, If not specified, MPa.
MPa, mbar, bar, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2,
inH2O, inHg, ftH2O, psi, or atm
D40 REV OUTPUT Output reversal NORMAL/REVERSE If not specified, NORMAL.
D45 H/L SWAP Impulse piping NORMAL/REVERSE*4 NORMAL — —
accessing direction
D52 BURN OUT CPU error —
HIGH/LOW, –5 to 110%*3 HIGH
D53 ERROR OUT Hardware error HOLD/HIGH/LOW, –5 to 110%*3 HIGH
D60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
E AUX SET 2 Auxiliary setting data 2 — Menu name
E10 DFS MODE DFS mode OFF/ON*5 ON —
E14 TEMP Reference temperature AMP. TEMP/CAP. TEMP*5 CAP. TEMP —
SELECT sensor
E15 TEMP ZERO Zero shift ⫾10.00*5 0.00 —
conpensation setup
E30 BI DIRE Bidirectional mode OFF/ON OFF — —
MODE
E50 AUTO Auto-recover from OFF/ON ON
RECOVER sensor error
E60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
H AUTO SET Automatic setup — Menu name
H10 AUTO LRV Automatic measure- –32000 to 32000 Displays the same data as
ment range lower C21.
range value setup
H11 AUTO HRV Automatic –32000 to 32000 Displays the same data as
measurement range C22.
higher range value
setup
H60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
J ADJUST Adjustment data — Menu name
J10 ZERO ADJ Automatic zero –5 to 110.0%*3
adjustment
J11 ZERO DEV. Manual zero
adjustment
J15 SPAN ADJ Manual span adjustment –10.00 to 10.00% 0.00%
J20 EXT. ZERO External zero- ENABLE/INHIBIT
ADJ adjustment screw
permission
J30 OUTPUT 4mA 4mA adjustment –10.00 to 10.00% 0.00%
J31 OUTPUT 20mA 20mA adjustment –10.00 to 10.00% 0.00%
J60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
K TEST Tests — Menu name
K10 OUTPUT in % Test output % setting –5 to 110.0%*3 Displays ‘ACTIVE’
while executing
K60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
M MEMO Memo — Menu name
M10 MEMO 1 Memo 8 uppercase alphanumerics
M60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic — Same as A60
messages
P RECORD History of the errors —
P10 ERROR REC 1 Last error Display the error

P11 ERROR REC 2 One time before Display the error
P12 ERROR REC 3 Two time before Display the error
P13 ERROR REC 4 Three time before Display the error
P60 SELF CHECK Self-diagnostic —
Same as A60
messages
*1: In case of Model EJA120A, static pressure cannot be measured. The display is always 0 MPa, but this is not a measured value.
*2: When Optional code /F1 is specified, substitute the value with 0.1.
*3: When Optional code /F1 is specified, substitute the value –5 with –2.5.
*4: Not applicable for Model EJA115.
*5: Applicable only for Model EJA118W, EJA118N, EJA118Y, EJA438W, and EJA438N.
*6: See MWP(max. working pressure) on the nameplate. B40 shows an approximate value of maximum pressure for the capsule.
T0806.EPS
8-5 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.3.2 Parameter Usage and Selection

IMPORTANT
Before describing the procedure for setting param-
eters, we present the following table showing how If the transmitter is turned off within 30 seconds
the parameters are used and in what case. after parameters have been set, the set data
will not be stored and the terminal returns to
previous settings.
Table 8.3.1 Parameter Usage and Selection

Setup Item Description
Tag No. setup Sets the Tag No. (using 16 alphanumeric characters).
䉴 P.8-7 Note: Up to 8 alphanumerics (upper case letters) can be used in the BT100.
Calibration range setup Sets the calibration range for 4 to 20 mA DC. Sets three data items: range unit, input value
䉴 P.8-7 at 4 mA DC (LRV), and input value at 20 mA DC (HRV).
Note: LRV and HRV can be specified with range value specifications up to 5 digits
(excluding any decimal point) within the range of –32000 to 32000.
Damping time constant setup Adjusts the output response speed for 4 to 20 mA DC.
䉴 P.8-8 Can be set in 9 increments from 0.2 to 64 s.
Output signal low cut mode setup Used mainly to stabilize output near 0% if output signal is the square root mode.
䉴 P.8-9 Two modes are available: forcing output to 0% for input below a specific value, or changing
to proportional output for input below a specific value.
Change the output limits Change the range of normal output.
䉴 P.8-9
Integral indicator scale range and Sets the following 5 types of integral indicator scale ranges and units:
unit setup % scale indicator, user set scale indicator, alternate indication of user set scale
䉴 P.8-10 and % scale, input pressure display, alternate indication of input pressure and % scale
When using the user set scale, 4 types of data can be set:
user set scale setting, unit (BT200 only), display value at 4 mA DC (LRV), and display
value at 20 mA DC (HRV).
Note: LRV and HRV can be specified with range value specifications up to 5
digits (excluding any decimal point) within the range of –19999 to 19999.
Unit setup for displayed temperature Sets a unit for temperatures displayed on the BT200.
䉴 P.8-11
Operation mode (normal/reverse Reverses the direction for 4 to 20 mA DC output relative to input.
signal) setup Reverse mode is used for applications in which safety requires that output be
䉴 P.8-12 driven toward 20 mA if input is lost.
Output status display/setup when Displays the status of 4 to 20 mA DC output when a CPU failure. The parameter
a CPU failure 䉴 P.8-12 of the standard unit is fixed to the high limit value.
Output status setup when a hardware Sets the status of the 4 to 20 mA DC output when an abnormal status is detected
error occurs with the capsule or the amplifier as the result of self-diagnosis. One of the
䉴 P.8-12 following statuses; last held, high limit, and low limit values, can be selected.
Range change (while applying Range for 4 to 20 mA DC signal is set with actual input applied. Sets 20 mA DC output
actual inputs) precisely with respect to user’s reference instrument output. Note that DPharp is calibrated
䉴 P.8-12 with high accuracy before shipment, so span should be set using the normal range setup.
Zero point adjustment Adjusts zero point. This can be done either using the external zero-adjustment screw on
䉴 P.8-13 the transmitteror using the BT200.
Span adjustment Adjust the characterization curve. All the transmitters are calibrated at factory and this
䉴 P.8-14 adjustment is normally not necessary for most cases. Use for specific purposes.
Test output (fixed current output) Used for loop checks.
setup 䉴 P.8-15 Output can be set freely from –5% to 110% in 1% steps.
User memo fields Allows user to enter up to 5 items of any desired text in up to 8 uppercase
䉴 P.8-15 alphanumeric characters per item.
T0807.EPS
8-6 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.3.3 Setting Parameters

SET This is the panel for confirming
C10:TAG NO.
Set or change the parameters as necessary. After YOKOGAWA
FIC-1a
set data. The set data items flash.
completing these, do not fail to use the “DIAG” key PRINTER OFF When all items have been confir-
F2:PRINTER ON
to confirm that “GOOD” is displayed for the self- FEED POFF NO
med, press the
diagnostic result at _60: SELF CHECK. again. (To go back to the setting
panel, press the (NO) key.
(1) Tag No. Setup (C10: TAG NO) SET The DPharp TAG NO. was
C10:TAG NO.
Use the procedure below to change the Tag No. Up FIC-1a overwritten.
to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered. Press the (OK) key to
FEED NO OK
return to the parameter panel.
Press the (NO) key to
PARAM
• Example: Set a Tag No. to FIC-1a C10:TAG NO.
FIC-1a
return to the setting panel.
C20:PRESS UNIT
Press the key to turn on kPa
C21:LOW RANGE
the BT200. 0 kPa
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
<When power is off>
F0811.EPS
––WELCOME––
BRAIN TERMINAL
Connect DPharp and BT200 using
ID: BT200 a communication cable and press
check connection the key. (2) Calibration Range Setup
push ENTER key
UTIL FEED a. Setting Calibration Range Unit

PARAM Displays the name of connected (C20: PRESS UNIT)
01:MODEL
EJA110A-DM DPharp model, TAG NO. and The unit is set at the factory before shipment if
02:TAG NO.
diagnostics information. Press the
YOKOGAWA
specified at the time of order. Follow the procedure
03:SELF CHECK
GOOD (OK) key after confirmation.
OK below to change the unit.
MENU
A:DISPLAY
Press the (SET) key to
B:SENSOR TYPE display the SET menu panel. • Example: Change the unit from mmH2O to kPa.
SET Use the or
HOME SET ADJ ESC C20:PRESS UNIT
mmH20
< mmWG > key to select “kPa.”
MENU Select C: SETTING and press the < mmHG >
C:SETTING < Torr > Press the key twice
D:AUX SET 1 key. < kPa >
E:AUX SET 2
H:AUTO SET
ESC to enter the setting.
SET
HOME SET ADJ ESC C20:PRESS UNIT Press the (OK) key.
kPa
MENU
C10:TAG NO.
Select C10: TAG NO. and press
YOKOGAWA the key.
C20:PRESS UNIT
kPa FEED NO OK
C21:LOW RANGE
0 kPa
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC mmH2O
SET Set the new TAG NO. (FIC-1a). mmAq
C10:TAG NO. mmWG
YOKOGAWA FOKOGAWA mmHg
YOKOGAWA
FIKOGAWA Torr
Pa
CODE CAPS CLR ESC FICOGAWA hPa
FIC-GAWA kPa
MPa
FIC-1AWA
mbar
bar
FIC-1aWA gf/cm2
FIC-1a kgf/cm2
inH2O
SET
C10:TAG NO.
Set TAG NO. and press the inHg
ftH2O
YOKOGAWA key. psi
FIC-1a _
atm
CODE caps CLE ESC F0812.EPS
When you have made an entry mistake, return

the cursor using the key, then reenter.
F0810.EPS
8-7 IM 01C21F01-01E
b. Setting Calibration Range Lower

Range Value and Higher Range Value • Example 2: With present settings of 0 to 30 kPa,
(C21: LOW RANGE, C22: HIGH set the Higher range value to10 kPa.
RANGE) SET
C22:HIGH RANGE
Set 10.
These range values are set as specified in the order 30 kPa Press the key twice
+ 10
before the instrument is shipped. Follow the proce- to enter the setting.
dure below to change the range. DEL CLR ESC
• The measurement span is determined by the high

SET
C22:HIGH RANGE
Press the (OK) key.
10 kPa
and low range limit values. In this instrument,
changing the low range value also automatically
FEED NO OK
changes the high range value, keeping the span
constant. PARAM The low range value is not
C20:PRESS UNIT
kPa changed, so the span changes.
C21:LOW RANGE
0 kPa
• Example 1: With present settings of 0 to 30 kPa, C22:HIGH RANGE
10 kPa
set the lower range value to 0.5 kPa. DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
SET
C21:LOW RANGE
Set 0.5. F0814.EPS
+
0 kPa
0.5 Press the key twice to
enter the setting.
(3) Damping Time Constant Setup
DEL CLR ESC (C30: AMP DAMPING)
SET When the instrument is shipped, the damping time
C21:LOW RANGE Press the (OK) key.
0.5 kPa constant is set at 2.0 seconds. Follow the procedure
below to change the time constant.
FEED NO OK
SET
C20:PRESS UNIT
The higher range value is changed • Example: Change from 2.0 sec to 4.0 sec.
kPa
C21:LOW RANGE while the span remains constant.
SET
0.5 kPa C30:AMP DAMPING Use the or key to
C22:HIGH RANGE 2.0 sec
30.5 kPa < 2.0 sec > select 4.0 sec.
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC < 4.0 sec >
< 8.0 sec > Press the key twice to
< 16.0 sec >
ESC enter the setting.
Span = Higher range value – Lower range value
SET
C30:AMP DAMPING Press the (OK) key.
F0813.EPS 4.0 sec
FEED NO OK
• Note, however, that changing the higher range value 0.2sec
does not cause the lower range value to change. 0.5sec
1.0sec
Thus, changing the higher range value also changes
2.0sec
the span.
4.0sec
• Calibration range can be specified with range value
8.0sec
specifications up to 5 digits (excluding any decimal 16.0sec
32.0sec
point) for low or high range limits within the range 64.0sec
of –32000 to 32000.
F0815.EPS
Note: The damping time constant set here is the damping time
constant for the amplifier assembly. The damping time
constant for the entire transmitter is the sum of the values for
the amplifier assembly and for the capsule assembly. For the
capsule assembly damping time constant (fixed), see the
“General Specifications” found at the end of this manual.
(See Chapter 10.)
8-8 IM 01C21F01-01E
(4) Output Signal Low Cut Mode Setup (5) Change Output Limits
(D10: LOW CUT, D11: LOW CUT MODE) (D15:OUT LIMIT(L), D16:OUT LIMIT(H))
Low cut mode can be used to stabilize the output The range of normal output is preset at factory from
signal near the zero point. The low cut point can be -5.0 to 110.0% unless otherwise specified, and the
set in a range from 0 to 20% of output. (Hysteresis of output is limited with these upper and lower values.
cut point: ±1%) This output range can be changed, for example, to
meet the requirements of NAMUR, etc. within the
䊉 LOW CUT at 10% settable range. Set the lower limit with D15:OUT
LIMIT(L) and upper limit with D16:OUT LIMIT(H).
50 Settable range : -5.0 to 110.0 (%)

Lower limit < Upper limit
Output(%)
10
0 10 50
Input(%)
F0816.EPS
• Example: Change the low cut setting range

from 5% to 10%, and the low
cut mode from LINEAR to ZERO.
SET Set “10.”
D10:LOW CUT
5.0 %
+ 10.0 Press the key twice to
enter the setting.
CLR ESC
SET
D10:LOW CUT
Press the (OK) key.
10.0 %
Next, the [D11: LOW CUT MODE]
setting panel is displayed.
FEED NO OK
SET Use the or key

D11:LOW CUT MODE
LINEAR
< LINEAR > to select ZERO.
< ZERO >
Press the key twice to
ESC
enter the setting.
SET
D11:LOW CUT MODE
Press the (OK) key.
ZERO
FEED NO OK
PARAM
D10:LOW CUT
10.0 %
D11:LOW CUT MODE
ZERO
D20:DISP SELECT
NORMAL %
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
F0817.EPS
8-9 IM 01C21F01-01E
(6) Integral Indicator Scale Setup

The following 5 displays are available for integral indicators.
D20: DISP SELECT Display Related Parameters Description

NORMAL % A10:OUTPUT (%) Indicates –5 to 110%
45.6 % range depending on the
Measurement range
(C21, C22).
USER SET A11:ENGR.OUTPUT Indicates values depending
20.0 M on the Engineering range
(D22, D23). (Note 1)
Units set using Engineering
unit (D21) are not indicated.
USER & % A10:OUTPUT (%) Indicates user set and %
45.6 % alternately in 3 second
A11:ENGR. OUTPUT intervals.
20.0 M
INP PRES A40:INPUT Indicates input

456 kPa pressure. (Note 2)
Indication limits –19999
to 19999.
PRES & % A10:OUTPUT (%) Indicates input pressure
45.6 % and % alternately in 3
A40:INPUT second intervals.
456 kPa
(Note 1) Scale range can be specified with range limit specifications up to 5 digits (excluding any
decimal point) for low or high range limits within the range of –19999 to 19999.
The range with decimals is available to the third decimal place.
(Note 2) It indicates the value after zeroing. T0808.EPS
See (a.) through (c.) for each setting procedure.
% indication and input User-set engineering unit display

pressure indication
D20: DISP SELECT D20: DISP SELECT

NORMAL % USER SET Set for user-set
INP PRES USER & % engineering unit display.
PRES & %
Transmitter is set D21: DISP UNIT Set a unit to be

for “% display” when displayed on the BT200.
shipped.
For % display, set this D22: DISP LRV Set a numeric value for
parameter only. engineering unit for 4 mA
output (LRV).
D23: DISP HRV Set a numeric value for

engineering unit for 20 mA
output (HRV).
F0818.EPS
8-10 IM 01C21F01-01E
a. Display Selection (D20: DISP SELECT) c. Lower and Higher Range Value Setup
Follow the instructions given to the below to change in Engineering Unit (D22: DISP LRV,
D23: DISP HRV)
the range of integral indication scales.
These parameter items are used to set the lower and
When USER SET is selected, the user set values of higher range values for the engineering unit display.
integral indication and A11: ENGR. OUTPUT
parameter are indicated. When the instrument is shipped, these are set as
specified in the order. Follow the procedure below to
change these settings. Note that these parameters
need not be set for % display.
• Example: Set the integral indicator scale to
engineering units display.
• Example: Set lower range value (LRV) to –50
SET Use the or key
D20:DISP SELECT
NORMAL %
and higher range value (HRV) to 50.
<NORMAL %> to select “USER SET.”
<USER SET>
<USER & %> Press the key twice to Setting LRV
<INP PRES> SET Set “–50.”
ESC enter the setting. D22:DISP LRV
0M
- 50 Press the key twice to
SET
D20:DISP SELECT Press the (OK) key. enter the setting.
USER SET
DEL CLR ESC
FEED NO OK Setting HRV

SET Set “50.”
D23:DISP HRV
100M
The “%” disappears from the + 50 Press the key twice to
integral indicator display. enter the setting.

DEL CLR ESC
F0819.EPS
SET Press the (OK) key.
D23:DISP HRV
50M
b. Setting User-set Engineering Unit

FEED NO OK
(D21: DISP UNIT)
This parameter allows entry of the engineering units PARAM
D21:DISP UNT
to be displayed on the BT200. When the instrument M
D22:DISP LRV
– 50M
is shipped, this is set as specified in the order. D23:DISP HRV
50M
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
Follow the procedure below to change this setting.
F0821.EPS
This parameter need not be set for % display.
(7) Unit Setup for Displayed Temperature
(D30: TEMP UNIT)
• Example: Set an engineering unit M.
When the instrument is shipped, the temperature units
SET Set “M.” are set to degC. Follow the procedure below to
D21:DISP UNIT
M_ Press the key twice to change this setting. Note that changing the unit here
enter the setting. changes the unit for A20: AMP TEMP (amplifier
CODE CAPS CLR ESC temperature) and A21: CAPSULE TEMP (capsule
SET Press the (OK) key.
temperature).
D21:DISP UNIT
M
• Example: Change the unit for the temperature

FEED NO OK
display.
F0820.EPS SET
D30:TEMP UNIT
Use the or key to
deg C
< deg C > select “deg F.”
< deg F >
ESC
enter the setting.
F0822.EPS
8-11 IM 01C21F01-01E
(8) Operation Mode Setup (a) HOLD; Outputs the last value held before the
(D40: REV OUTPUT) error occurred.
This parameter allows the direction of the 4 to 20 (b) HIGH; Outputs an output of 110% when an error
mA output to be reversed with respect to input. has occurred.
Follow the procedure below to make this change. (c) LOW; Outputs an output of –5% when an error
has occurred.
• Example: Change 4 to 20 mA output to 20 to Note: A hardware error means CAP MODULE FAULT of Er.01 or
4 mA output. AMP MODULE FAULT of Er. 02 which are shown in 8.5.2
“Errors and Countermeasures.”)
SET Use the or key
D40:REV OUTPUT
NORMAL
< NORMAL > to select REVERSE. • Example: Set the output status to LOW when
< REVERSE>
Press the key twice to a hardware error occurs.
ESC
enter the setting. SET
D53:ERROR OUT Use the or key
HIGH
F0823.EPS < HIGH> to select “LOW.”
< LOW>
< HOLD>
(9) Output Status Display/Setup when a CPU ESC
enter the setting.
Failure (D52: BURN OUT)
F0825.EPS
This parameter displays the status of 4 to 20 mA DC
output if a CPU failure occurs. In case of a failure, (11) Range Change while Applying Actual
communication is disabled. Inputs (H10: AUTO LRV, H11: AUTO
HRV)
Setting of HIGH or LOW is enabled. This is done
with the pin (CN4) on the CPU assembly. See This feature allows the lower and higher range values
Chapter 3 for details. to be set up automatically with the actual input
applied. If the lower and higher range values are set,
Standard specifications C21: LOW RANGE and C22: HIGH RANGE are
The parameter is set to HIGH. If a failure, the changed at this same time.
transmitter outputs the signal of 110% or higher. The
parameter D53: ERROR OUT is set to HIGH from Follow the procedure in the figure below.
the factory. The measurement span is determined by the higher
and lower range values. Changing the lower range
Optional code/C1 value results in the higher range value changing auto-
The parameter is set to LOW. If a failure, output matically, keeping the span constant.
which is –5% or lower is generated. The parameter
D53: ERROR OUT is set to LOW from the factory.
• Example 1: When changing the lower range
value to 0.5 kPa for the present
• Example: Standard specifications setting of 0 to 30 kPa, take the
D52: BURN OUT pin (CN4) position: H following action with input pressure
HIGH
of 0.5 kPa applied.
• Example: Optional code/C1 SET

H10:AUTO LRV
Press the key twice.
0 kPa
D52: BURN OUT pin (CN4) position: L + 0 The lower range value is changed
LOW
to 0.5 kPa.
ESC
F0824.EPS
SET
H10:AUTO LRV
Press the (OK) key.
0.5000 kPa
(10) Output Status Setup when a Hardware
Error Occurs (D53: ERROR OUT)
This parameter allows the setting of the output status FEED NO OK
when a hardware error occurs. The following three PARAM The higher range value is changed
H10:AUTO LRV
selections are available. 0.5000 kPa
keeping the span constant.
H11:AUTO HRV
30.500 kPa
H60:SELF CHEC
GOOD
Parameters C21 and C22 are
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
changed at the same time.
F0826.EPS
8-12 IM 01C21F01-01E
Note that changing the higher range value does not (a) Follow the procedure below when setting the
cause the lower range value to change but does present output to 0% (4 mA).
change the span.
A10:OUTPUT (%) Output is 0.5%.

• Example 2: When the higher range value is to 0.5 %
be changed to 10 kPa with the

SET
Press the key twice.
present setting of 0 to 30 kPa, take J10:ZERO ADJ
0.0 %
the following action with an input + 000.0
pressure of 10 kPa applied.

CLR ESC
SET Press the key twice.
H11:AUTO HRV
30 kPa
SET
J10:ZERO ADJ Zero adjustment is completed.
+ 30 The higher range value is changed 0.0 %
Press the (OK) key.
to 10 kPa.
ESC
FEED NO OK
SET
H11:AUTO HRV
Press the (OK) key.
10.000 kPa A10:OUTPUT (%) Output is 0%.
0.0 %
FEED NO OK
F0828.EPS
PARAM The lower range value is not

H10:AUTO LRV
0 kPa
H11:AUTO HRV changed, so the span changes. (b) In tank level measurement, if the actual level
10.000 kPa
H60:SELF CHECK Parameter C22 is changed at the cannot be brought to zero for zero adjustment,
GOOD
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
same time. then the output can be adjusted to correspond to
the actual level obtained using another measuring
F0827.EPS
instrument such as a glass gauge.
(12) Zero Point Adjustment [Example]

(J10: ZERO ADJ, J11: ZERO DEV,
J20: EXT ZERO ADJ) Measurement range: 50 to 250 kPa, Actual value:
The DPharp supports several adjustment methods. 130 kPa.
Select the method best suited for the conditions of
Actual value
your application.
Actual = –Measurement range lower range value
Note that output signal can be checked by displaying x 100
value(%) Measurement range higher range value
parameter A10:OUTPUT (%) on the BT200. –Measurement range lower range value
130–50
= x 100=40.0%
Adjustment Method Description 250–50
Using the BT200 Set the present input to 0%.
Adjust for 0% output at input level of (b)-1 Follow the procedure below to use J10: ZERO
0%.
ADJ.
Adjust output to the reference value
obtained using other means.
If the input level cannot easily be A10:OUTPUT (%)
Present output is 41.0%.
made 0% (because of tank level, 41.0 %
etc.), adjust output to the reference
value obtained using other means, SET Enter the present actual level, 40%.
such as a sight glass. J10:ZERO ADJ
0.0 %
+ 040.0 Press the key twice.
Using the external Adjust zero point using the zero-
zero-adjustment adjustment screw on the transmitter.
screw 䉴 P.8-14 This permits zero adjustment without CLR ESC
using the BT200. Accurately adjust

the output current to 4 mA DC or A10:OUTPUT (%) The output is changed to 40%.
40.0 %
other target output value using an
ammeter that accuratly reads output
F0829.EPS
currents.
T0809.EPS
8-13 IM 01C21F01-01E
(b)-2 Follow the procedure below to use J11: ZERO

• Example: Inhibiting zero adjustment by the
DEV.
external zero-adjustment screw
Present output is 41.0%.

SET
J20:EXIT ZERO ADJ
Use the or key to
A10:OUTPUT (%)
ENABLE
41.0 %
Output error = 40.0 – 41.0 = –1.0%. < ENABLE > select “INHIBIT.”
< INHIBIT>
SET Since “J11: ZERO DEV.” contains
J11:ZERO DEV. ESC
enter the setting.
2.50 %
0 the previous correction, obtain the
F0831.EPS
correction value by adding –1.0% to
ESC
it. 2.50% + (–1.0%) = 1.50% • Zero point adjustment using external zero-adjust-
ment screw on the transmitter
SET
J11:ZERO DEV.
Set the correction value, 1.50.
2.50 % Turn the zero-adjustment screw on the outside of the
1.50 Press the key twice.
transmitter case using a slotted screwdriver. Turn the
ECS
screw to the right to increase the zero point or to the
left to decrease the zero output; the zero adjusts in
A10:OUTPUT (%) The output is changed to 40%. increments of 0.01% of the range setting.
40.0 %
Note that the amount of adjustment to the zero point
F0830.EPS changes according to the speed at which the screw is
turned. To make fine adjustments, turn the screw
When the zero point is adjusted, the displayed value slowly; to make coarse adjustments, turn the screw
of A40 is as follows. quickly.
[Example]
Note: When a zero point adjustment has been made, do not turn
When the zero point is shifted by 20 kPa for the off the transmitter less than 30 seconds after adjustment.
actual pressure, the parameter of A40 indicates 50
kPa.
(13) Span Adjustment
Each DPharp EJA series transmitter is factory
70 kPa
characterized according to the specification. Mount-
50 kPa ing position effects or zero shifts caused by static
pressure are typically compensated by a zero adjust-
Zero ment.
20 kPa adjustment
Zero adjustment
volume(J11) A span adjustment is a function to correct the slope
0 kPa 0 kPa
Actual differential Input value error from a zero point in characterizing 100% point
pressure/pressure of A40 F0839.EPS (HRV). This function can be used when span drifts
may be caused or characterization to the specific
(c) Zero Point Adjustment Using the External Zero
pressure standard is required.
Adjustment Screw
Therefore, the zero point adjustment should always
• Enabling/inhibiting of zero point adjustment using
be performed before the upper point adjustment in
the external zero-adjustment screw on the transmitter
order to maintain the pitch between zero and 100%
(J20: EXT ZERO ADJ)
points within the calibration range.
Follow the procedure below to enable or inhibit zero
You can manually perform the trimming procedure
point adjustment from the zero-adjustment screw on
by using J15: SPAN ADJ.
the transmitter.
This is set to “ENABLE” when the instrument is
shipped.
8-14 IM 01C21F01-01E
• Span adjustment value (14) Test Output Setup (K10: OUTPUT X%)
The span adjustment value is calculated as follows. This feature can be used to output a fixed current
from 3.2 mA (–5%) to 21.6 mA (110%) for loop
checks.
Span adjustment value (%) = P1 ⫺ A40 ⫻100
P1
P1: Actual differential pressure/pressure value
A40: Input (indicated as the value after zeroing) • Example: Output 12 mA (50%) fixed current.
SET Set “50.0%.”
Measurement pressure K10:OUTPUT X %
0.0 %
+ 050.0 Press the key twice to
output a fixed current at 50%.
A40 ESC
SET
K10:OUTPUT X %
“Active” is displayed while this is
50.0 % ACTIVE
being executed.
Applied pressure
P1 Press the (OK) key to cancel
0 F0846.EPS
FEED NO OK
the fixed current output.
F0832.EPS
• Example: For the range of 0 to 30 kPa. IMPORTANT

A40: INPUT = 30.15 kPa
J15: SPAN ADJ = 0.15 % 1. Test output is held for approximately 10
minutes, and then released automatically after
Suppose that a standard pressure of 30 kPa is applied and
the value of the parameter of A40: INPUT is 30.15 kPa. the time has elapsed. Even if the BT200
Firstly, obtain the slope error for the span as follows; power supply is turned off or the communica-
tion cable is disconnected during test output,
P1 ⫺ A40
Span adjustment value (%) = ⫻100 it is held for approximately 10 minutes.
P1
2. Press the (OK) key to release test output
30.00⫺30.15
⫽
30.00
⫻ 100 = ⫺0.5 (%) immediately.
Add ⫺0.5% to 0.15% of the current value to calculate the

accumulated span adjustment value.
(15) User Memo Fields (M: MEMO)
0.15 ⫹ (⫺0.50) = ⫺0.35
This feature provides 5 user memo fields, each
holding up to 8 alphanumeric characters. Up to 5
SET Set ⫺0.35.
J15:SPAN ADJ
0.15 %
items such as inspection date, inspector, and other
- 0.35 Press key twice.
information can be saved in these fields.
DEL CLR ESC
SET
J15:SPAN ADJ
Press the (OK) key. • Example: Save an inspection date of January
-0.35 % 30, 1995.
PARAM
M10:MEMO 1
Set “95.1.30” in the order of year,
FEED NO OK
M20:MEMO 2 month, and day.
Note: Enter 0.00 to J15: SPAN ADJ to reset the M30:MEMO 3 Press the key twice to
span adjustment to the initial value at the DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
enter the setting.
shipment. SET
M10:MEMO 1
F0847.EPS 95.1.30_
ESC
F0833.EPS
8-15 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.4 Displaying Data Using the 8.5 Self-Diagnostics

BT200
8.5.1 Checking for Problems
8.4.1 Displaying Measured Data
(1) Identifying Problems with BT200
The BT200 can be used to display measured data. The following four areas can be checked.
The measured data is updated automatically every 7 (a) Whether connections are good.
seconds. In addition, the display can be updated to (b) Whether BT200 was properly operated.
the present data value at any time by pressing the (c) Whether settings were properly entered.
(DATA) key. For parameters associated with the (d) History of the errors.
display of measured data, see Subsection 8.3.1, See examples below.
“Parameter Summary.”
• Example 1: Connection errors
• Example: Display output. ––WELCOME––

BRAIN TERMINAL
Press the key.
ID: BT200
When the panel shown on the left
MENU check connection
A:DISPLAY
B:SENSOR TYPE
push ENTER key appears, press the key.
UTIL FEED
HOME SET ADJ ESC

Since communications will be
communication error unsuccessful if there is a problem
PARAM Display “A10: OUTPUT (%).”
A10:OUTPUT (%)
XX.X %
in the connection to the BT200, the
A11:ENGR.OUTPUT
YY.Y %
ESC display at the left will appear.
A20:AMP TEMP
ZZ deg C Recheck the connection.
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
Data is updated automatically
Press the (OK) key.
PARAM communi
at 7-second intervals.
A10:OUTPUT (%)
A11:ENGR.OUTPUT
A20:AMP TEMP • Example 2: Setting entry errors
PARAM The initial data panel shows the
01:MODEL
EJA510A-DC
F0834.EPS
02:TAG NO. result of current transmitter
YOKOGAWA
03:SELF CHECK diagnostics.
ERROR
8.4.2 Display Transmitter Model and OK
Specifications
PARAM
C20:PRESS UNIT
Press the (DIAG) key in the
The BT200 can be used to display the model and kPa
C21:LOW RANGE parameter panel to go to the
600 kPa
specifications of the transmitter. C22:HIGH RANGE diagnostics panel
600 kPa
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
(C60: SELF CHECK).
• Example: View transmitter model name. DIAG

C60:SELF CHECK
An error message is displayed
ERROR
< ERROR > when an error occurs in the
MENU Press . < ILLEGAL LRV >
A:DISPLAY diagnostics panel.
B:SENSOR TYPE
FEED PRNT ESC
F0836.EPS
HOME SET ADJ ESC
PARAM
B10:MODEL For the associated
EJA510A-DC parameters, see Subsection
B11:STYLE NO. 8.3.1, “Parameter Summary.”
S1.01
B20:LRL
– 98.07 kPa
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
F0835.EPS
8-16 IM 01C21F01-01E
(2) Checking with Integral Indicator

• Example 3: Checking the history of the errors
MENU Connect the BT200 to the
J:ADJUST
K:TEST transmitter, and call item “P.”
NOTE
M:MEMO
P:RECORD
If an error is detected in the self-diagnostic, an
HOME SET ADJ ESC error number is displayed on the integral
PARAM indicator. If there is more than one error, the
error number changes at two-second intervals.
P10:ERROR REC 1
ERROR
P11:ERROR REC 2
ERROR
P12:ERROR REC 3
See Table 8.5.1 regarding the error numbers.
GOOD
DATA DIAG PRNT ESC
P10: “ERROR REC 1” displays the last error.

P11: “ERROR REC 2” displays the error one time before
the last error occurred.
P12: “ERROR REC 3” displays the error two times before
P13: “ERROR REC 4” displays the error three times before
The history of up to four errors can be stored. When the 5th

error has occurred, it is stored in “P10”. The error stored in
“P13” will be deleted, and then, the error in “P12” will be
copied to “P13”. In this sequence, the history of the most
F0838.EPS
previously occurred error will be removed from memory.
“GOOD” will be displayed if there was no previous error. Figure 8.5.1 Identifying Problems Using the Integral
Indicator
SET Select P10: ERROR REC1 and
P10:ERROR REC 1
<
ERROR
ERROR >
press the key to display
<
<
ILLEGAL LRV >
ILLEGAL HRV >
the error message.
ESC
<(a) SETUP PANEL>
For the details of the messages listed below, see Table

8.5.1 Error Message Summary.
CAP MODULE FAULT OVER TEMP (CAP) ILLEGAL LRV

AMP MODULE FAULT OVER TEMP (AMP) ILLEGAL HRV
OUT OF RANGE OVER OUTPUT ILLEGAL SPAN
OUT OF SP RANGE OVER DISPLAY ZERO ADJ OVER
Note 1: Press the key twice in the setting panel

(panel 1) to clear all error message (P10 to P13)
information.
Note 2: After two hours from when an error occurs, the error
message of that error will be recorded. Therefore,
if you switch off the transmitter within two hours from
when the error occurs, there is no history of that
error stored in the transmitter, and this function is
meaningless.
F0837.EPS
8-17 IM 01C21F01-01E
8.5.2 Errors and Countermeasures

The table below shows a summary of error messages.
Table 8.5.1 Error Message Summary
Integral
Output Operation
Indicator BT200 Display Cause Countermeasure
during Error
Display
None GOOD
---- ERROR
Er. 01 CAP MODULE Capsule problem.*1 Outputs the signal Replace the capsule
FAULT (Hold, High, or Low) when error keeps
set with parameter appearing even after
D53. restart.*2
Er. 02 AMP MODULE Amplifier problem. Outputs the signal Replace amplifier.
FAULT (Hold, High, or Low)
set with parameter
D53.
Er. 03 OUT OF RANGE Input is outside Outputs high range Check input.
measurement range limit value or low
limit of capsule. range limit value.
Er. 04 OUT OF SP Static pressure Displays present Check line pressure
RANGE exceeds specified output. (static pressure).
range.*3
Er. 05 OVER TEMP Capsule temperature Displays present Use heat insulation or
(CAP) is outside range output. make lagging to keep
(–50 to 130°C). temperature within
range.
Er. 06 OVER TEMP Amplifier temperature Displays present Use heat insulation or
(AMP) is outside range output. make lagging to keep
(–50 to 95°C). temperature within
range.
Er. 07 OVER OUTPUT Output is outside high Outputs high or low Check input and range
or low range limit range limit value. setting, and change
value. them as needed.
Er. 08 OVER DISPLAY Displayed value is Displays high or low Check input and
outside high or low range limit value. display conditions and
range limit value. modify them as
needed.
Er. 09 ILLEGAL LRV LRV is outside setting Holds output Check LRV and
range. immediately before modify as needed.
error occurrence.
Er. 10 ILLEGAL HRV HRV is outside setting Holds output Check HRV and
range. immediately before modify as needed.
error occurrence.
Er. 11 ILLEGAL SPAN SPAN is outside Holds output Check SPAN and
setting range. immediately before change as needed.
error occurrence.
Er. 12 ZERO ADJ OVER Zero adjustment is too Displays present Readjust zero point.
large. output.
*1: This error code appears at a capsule problem or when an illegal overpressure is applied to the
pressure sensor.
*2: If the normal pressure is regained, the Er.01 will disappear according to the setting of the parameter
of E50: AUTO RECOVER. When the E50: AUTO RECOVER is set to ON(defalut setting), the Er.01
will disappear automatically. When the E50: AUTO RECOVER is set to OFF, restart the transmitter
to cancel Er.01. If no error code appears then, perform necessary adjustment such as zero-adjust-
ment to continue the operation. If the error code still exists, replace the capsule assembly.
*3: For Model EJA120A, static pressure cannot be measured. The display is always 0 MPa, but this is
not a measured value.
T0810 .EPS
8-18 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
9. MAINTENANCE
9.1 Overview 9.2 Calibration Instruments Se-

lection
WARNING Table 9.2.1 shows the instruments required for calibra-
tion. Select instruments that will enable the transmitter
Since the accumulated process fluid may be to be calibrated or adjusted to the required accuracy.
toxic or otherwise harmful, take appropriate care
to avoid contact with the body, or inhalation of The calibration instruments should be handled carefully
vapors even after dismounting the instrument so as to maintain the specified accuracy.
from the process line for maintenance.
9.3 Calibration
Maintenance of the transmitter is easy due to its
modular construction. This chapter describes the Use the procedure below to check instrument operation
procedures for calibration, adjustment, and the disas- and accuracy during periodic maintenance or trouble-
sembly and reassembly procedures required for shooting.
component replacement. 1) Connect the instruments as shown in Figure 9.3.1
Since the transmitters are precision instruments, and warm up the instruments for at least five
carefully and thoroughly read the following sections minutes.
for proper handling during maintenance.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT • To adjust the transmitter for highest accuracy,

make adjustments with the power supply
• As a rule, maintenance of this transmitter voltage and load resistance including leadwire
should be implemented in a maintenance resistances set close to the conditions under
service shop where the necessary tools are which the transmitter is installed.
provided. • If the measurement range 0% point is 0 kPa or
• The CPU assembly contains sensitive parts shifted in the positive direction (suppressed
that may be damaged by static electricity. zero), the reference pressure should be applied
Exercise care so as not to directly touch the as shown in the figure.
electronic parts or circuit patterns on the board, If the measurement range 0% point is shifted in
for example, by preventing static electrification the negative direction (elevated zero), the
by using grounded wrist straps when handling reference pressure should be applied using a
the assembly. Also take precautions such as vacuum pump.
placing a removed CPU assembly into a bag • Do not perform the calibration procedure until
with an antistatic coating. the transmitter is at room temperature.
2) Apply reference pressures of 0%, 50%, and 100% of

the measurement range to the transmitter. Calculate
the errors (differences between digital voltmeter
readings and reference pressures) as the pressure is
increased from 0% to 100% and is decreased from
100% to 0%, and confirm that the errors are within
the required accuracy.
9-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
Table 9.2.1 Instruments Required for Calibration

Name Yokogawa-recommended Instrument Remarks
Power
supply Model SDBT or SDBS distributor 4 to 20 mA DC signal
Load Model 2792 standard resistor [250 Ω ±0.005%, 3 W]

resistor Load adjustment resistor [100 Ω ±1%, 1 W]
Model 2501 A digital multimeter
Voltmeter
Accuracy (10V DC range): ±(0.002% of rdg + 1 dgt)
Model MT220 precision digital manometer
1) For 10 kPa class
Accuracy: ±(0.015% of rdg + 0.015% of F.S.) . . . . . for 0 to 10 kPa
±(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . . for -10 to 0 kPa
2) For 130 kPa class
Accuracy: ±0.02% of rdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 25 to 130 kPa
±5digits .......................... for 0 to 25 kPa
Digital ±(0.2% of rdg + 0.1% of F.S.) . . . . . . . . . for -80 to 0 kPa Select a manometer having
manometer 3) For 700 kPa class a pressure range close to
Accuracy: ±(0.02% of rdg + 3digits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . for 100 to 700 kPa that of the transmitter.
±5 digits ......................... for 0 to 100 kPa
4) For 3000 kPa class
Accuracy: ±(0.02% of rdg + 10 digits) . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 3000 kPa
5) For 130 kPa abs class
Accuracy: ±(0.03% of rdg + 6 digits) . . . . . . . . . . . . for 0 to 130 kPa abs
Model 7674 pneumatic pressure standard for 200 kPa {2 kgf/cm2}, 25 kPa {2500 mmH2O} Requires air pressure
Accuracy: ±0.05% of F.S. supply.
Pressure
generator Dead weight gauge tester 25 kPa {2500mmH2O} Select the one having a
Accuracy: ±0.03% of setting pressure range close to
that of the transmitter.
Model 6919 pressure regulator (pressure pump) Prepare the vacuum pump
Pressure
Pressure range: 0 to 133 kPa {1000 mmHg} for negative pressure
source
ranges.
T0901.EPS
Note: The above table contains the instruments capable of performing calibration to the 0.2% level. Since special maintenance and management
procedures involving traceability of each instrument to higher-level standards are required for calibration to the 0.1% level, there are
difficulties in calibration to this level in the field. For calibration to the 0.1% level, contact Yokogawa representatives from which the
instrument was purchased or the nearest Yokogawa office.
If a pressure generator If a pressure source and

is used: a manometer are combined:
Load resistance, Power Load resistance, Power

250 Ω supply 250 Ω supply
E E
Load Rc R Load Rc R
adjustment adjustment
resistance, V resistance, V
100 Ω Digital voltmeter 100 Ω Digital voltmeter
Reference pressure Reference pressure
P Model 7674 pneumatic P
pressure standards
Model MT220
precision digital manometer
Supply pressure Pressure source

F0901.EPS
Figure 9.3.1 Instrument Connections
9-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
9.4 Disassembly and Reassem-

bly
Shrouding Bolt
CAUTION
Precautions for CENELEC and IECEx Flame- Shrouding Bolt
proof Type Transmitters F0902.EPS
• Flameproof type transmitters must be, as a

Figure 9.4 Shrouding Bolts
rule, removed to a non-hazardous area for
maintenance and be disassembled and reas-
sembled to the original state.
9.4.1 Replacing the Integral Indicator
• On the flameproof type transmitters the two
covers are locked, each by an Allen head bolt
(shrouding bolt). When a shrouding bolt is
CAUTION
driven clockwise by an Allen wrench, it is going
in and cover lock is released, and then the
cover can be opened by hand. Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters
When a cover is closed it should be locked by a Users are prohibited by law from modifying the
shrouding bolt without fail. Tighten the shroud- construction of a flameproof type transmitter.
ing bolt to a torque of 0.7 N·m. This would invalidate the agency approval and
the transmitter’s use in such rated area.
Thus the user is prohibited from using a flame-
This section describes procedures for disassembly and proof type transmitter with its integral indicator
reassembly for maintenance and component replace- removed, or from adding an integral indicator to
ment. a transmitter. If such modification is absolutely
Always turn OFF power and shut off and release required, contact Yokogawa.
pressures before disassembly. Use proper tools for all
operations. Table 9.4.1 shows the tools required. This subsection describes the procedure for replacing
Table 9.4.1 Tools for Disassembly and Reassembly an integral indicator. (See Figure 9.4.1)
Tool Quantity Remarks
䊏 Removing the Integral Indicator
Phillips screwdriver 1 JIS B4633, No. 2
1) Remove the cover.
Slotted screwdriver 1
2) Supporting the integral indicator by hand, loosen its
Allen wrenches 2 JIS B4648
two mounting screws.
One each, nominal 3 and
5 mm Allen wrenches 3) Dismount the LCD board assembly from the CPU
Wrench 1 Width across flats, 17 mm assembly.
Torque wrench 1 When doing this, carefully pull the LCD board
Adjustable wrench 1
assembly straight forward so as not to damage the
connector pins between it and the CPU assembly.
Socket wrench 1 Width across flats, 16 mm
Socket driver 1 Width across flats, 5.5 mm
Tweezers 1
T0902.EPS
9-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
䊏 Attaching the Integral Indicator 3) Disconnect the output terminal cable (cable with
Integral indicator can be installed in the following three brown connector at the end). When doing this,
directions. lightly press the side of the CPU assembly connec-
tor and pull the cable connector to disengage.
4) Use a socket driver (width across flats, 5.5mm) to
loosen the two bosses.
5) Carefully pull the CPU assembly straight forward to
remove it.
6) Disconnect the flat cable (cable with black connec-
tor at the end) that connects the CPU assembly and
F0910.EPS the capsule.
Figure 9.4.1 Installation Direction of Indicator
NOTE
1) Align both the LCD board assembly and CPU
assembly connectors and engage them. Be careful not to apply excessive force to the
2) Insert and tighten the two mounting screws. CPU assembly when removing it.
3) Replace the cover.
Output terminal cable

䊏 Mounting the CPU Assembly
1) Connect the flat cable (with black connector)
CPU assembly between the CPU assembly and the capsule.
Press
Flat cable 2) Connect the output terminal cable (with brown
connector).
Boss
LCD board
assembly NOTE
Integral
indicator Make certain that the cables are free of pinching
Cover between the case and the CPU assembly edge.
3) Align and engage the zero-adjustment screw pin

Bracket Zero-adjustment
(for zero-adjustment screw pin
with the groove on the bracket on the CPU assem-
screw pin) bly. Then insert the CPU board assembly straight
onto the post in the amplifier case.
Mounting screw
4) Tighten the two bosses. If the transmitter is
F0903.EPS
equipped with an integral indicator, refer to Subsec-
tion 9.4.1 to mount the indicator.
Figure 9.4.2 Removing and Attaching LCD Board Assem-
bly and CPU Assembly
NOTE
Confirm that the zero-adjustment screw pin is
9.4.2 Replacing the CPU Board Assembly
placed properly in the groove on the bracket
This subsection describes the procedure for replacing prior to tightening the two bosses. If it is not, the
the CPU assembly. (See Figure 9.4.2) zero-adjustment mechanism will be damaged.
䊏 Removing the CPU Assembly

1) Remove the cover. If an integral indicator is 5) Replace the cover.
mounted, refer to Subsection 9.4.1 and remove the
indicator.
2) Turn the zero-adjustment screw to the position
(where the screw head slot is horizontal) as shown
in Figure 9.4.2.
9-4 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
9.4.3 Cleaning and Replacing the 3) Separate the transmitter section and capsule assem-
Capsule Assembly bly.
4) Clean the capsule assembly or replace with a new
This subsection describes the procedures for cleaning
one.
and replacing the capsule assembly. (See Figure 9.4.3.)
䊏 Reassembling the Capsule Assembly
1) Insert the capsule assembly to the transmitter
CAUTION section. For the model EJA530A with Measurement
span code A, B, and C with the pipe (shown in
Cautions for Flameproof Type Transmitters Figure 9.4.3), insert the capsule assembly in a way
Users are prohibited by law from modifying the that the direction of the pipe screw thread matches
construction of a flameproof type transmitter. If to that of the zero-adjustment screw of the transmit-
you wish to replace the capsule assembly with ter section.
one of a different measurement range, contact 2) Tighten the two Allen screws to a torque of 5 N·m
Yokogawa. and the pipe with gasket if applied.
The user is permitted, however, to replace a 3) Install the CPU assembly according to Subsection
capsule assembly with another of the same 9.4.2.
measurement range. When doing so, be sure to 4) After completing reassembly, adjust the zero point
observe the following. and check the parameters.
• The replacement capsule assembly must have
the same part number as the one being re- Transmitter section
placed.
Allen screw
• The section connecting the transmitter and
capsule assembly is a critical element in
preservation of flameproof performance, and
must be checked to verify that it is free of Zero-adjustment
dents, scratches, and other defects. screw
• After completing maintenance, be sure to Allen screw
securely tighten the Allen screws that fasten
Gasket
the transmitter section and pressure-detector
section together.
Capsule name plate Pipe
䊏 Removing the Capsule Assembly Pipe screw thread

Capsule assembly
F0904.EPS
IMPORTANT
Figure 9.4.3 Removing and Mounting the Capsule
Exercise care as follows when cleaning the Assembly
capsule assembly.
• Handle the capsule assembly with care, and be
especially careful not to damage or distort the
diaphragms that contact the process fluid.
• Do not use a chlorinated or acidic solution for
cleaning.
• Rinse thoroughly with clean water and dry
thoroughly after cleaning.
1) Remove the CPU assembly as shown in Subsection

9.4.2.
2) Remove the two Allen screws and the pipe (shown
in Figure 9.4.3) for the model EJA530A with
Measurement span code A, B, and C, which connect
the transmitter section and capsule assembly.
9-5 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
9.5 Troubleshooting 9.5.1 Basic Troubleshooting

First determine whether the process variable is actually
If any abnormality appears in the measured values, use
abnormal or a problem exists in the measurement
the troubleshooting flow chart below to isolate and
system.
remedy the problem. Since some problems have
complex causes, these flow charts may not identify all. If the problem is in the measurement system, isolate
If you have difficulty isolating or correcting a problem, the problem and decide what corrective action to take.
contact Yokogawa service personnel. This transmitter is equipped with a self-diagnostic
function which will be useful in troubleshooting; see
Section 8.5 for information on using this function.
Abnormalities appear in : Areas where self-diagnostic offers support

measurement.
Transmitter itself
Y Is process variable
itself abnormal? Check transmitter.
Inspect the N
process system. Measurement system problem Operating conditions
Isolate problem in Check/correct operating

measurement system. conditions.
Y Environmental conditions
Does problem exist in N Check/correct

Inspect receiver. receiving instrument? environmental conditions.
F0905.EPS
Figure 9.5.1 Basic Flow and Self-Diagnostics
9.5.2 Troubleshooting Flow Charts
Symptoms • There is no output signal.

• Output signal does not change although process variable is known to be varying.
• Output value is inconsistent with value inferred for process variable.
Connect BRAIN TERMINAL and check self-diagnostics.

Refer to error message summary in
YES Subsection 8.5.2 to take actions.
Does the self-diagnostic indicate problem location?
NO Refer to Section 6.3 to check/correct
NO polarity at each terminal from power
Is power supply polarity correct? supply to the terminal box.
YES
NO Refer to Section 6.6 for rated voltage
Are power supply voltage and load resistance correct?
and load resistance.
YES
NO Fully close equalizing valve, and fully
Are valves opened or closed correctly? open high pressure and low pressure
YES valves.
YES
Is there any pressure leak? Fix pressure leaks, paying particular
NO attention to connections for impulse
piping,pressure-detector section, etc.
Is there continuity through the transmitter loop wiring? NO
Do the loop numbers match? Find/correct broken conductor or wiring
error.
YES
Contact Yokogawa service personnel.

F0906.EPS
9-6 IM 01C21F01-01E
9. MAINTENANCE
Output travels beyond 0% or 100%.
YES
Does the self-diagnostic indicate problem location? Refer to error message summary in Subsection 8.5.2 to take
actions.
NO
NO Refer to Section 6.3 to check/correct polarity at each
Is power supply polarity correct? terminal from power supply to the terminal box.
YES
NO Fully close equalizing valve, and fully open high pressure
Are valves opened or closed correctly? and low pressure valves.
YES
YES Fix pressure leaks, paying particular attention to connections
Is there any pressure leak? for impulse piping, pressure-detector section, etc.
NO
NO Refer to individual model user manuals and connect piping
Is impulse piping to high pressure
and low pressure side correct? as appropriate for the measurement purpose.
YES
NO
Is zero point adjusted correctly? Adjust the zero point.
YES
F0907.EPS
Large output error.
YES Refer to error message summary in Subsection 8.5.2

Does the self-diagnostic indicate problem location?
to take actions.
NO
NO Fully close equalizing valve, and fully open high pressure
Are valves opened or closed correctly? and low pressure valves.
YES
NO Refer to individual model user manuals and connect piping
Is impulse piping connected correctly? as appropriate for the measurement purpose
YES
NO
Are power supply voltage and load resistance correct? Refer to Section 6.6 for rated voltage and load resistance.
YES
Is transmitter installed where there is YES
Provide lagging and/or cooling, or allow adequate ventilation
marked variation in temperature?
NO
NO
Were appropriate instruments used for calibration? Refer to Section 9.2 when selecting instruments for calibration.
YES
NO
Is output adjusted correctly? Adjust the output.
YES
F0908.EPS
9-7 IM 01C21F01-01E
10. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
10.1 Standard Specifications

Refer to IM 01C22T02-01E for FOUNDATION Damping Time Constant (1st order):
Fieldbus communication type and IM 01C22T03- The sum of the amplifier and capsule damping
time constant must be used for the overall time
00E for PROFIBUS PA communication type constant. Amp damping time constant is adjustable
marked with “䉫”. from 0.2 to 64 seconds.
Capsule (Silicone Oil) A, B, C, and D
䊉 Performance Specifications
See General Specifications sheet, GS 01C21F01-E. Time Constant (approx. sec) 0.2
T1002.EPS
䊉 Functional Specifications
Ambient Temperature Limits:
Span & Range Limits * Safety approval codes may affect limits.
EJA510A and EJA530A: –40 to 85°C (–40 to 185°F),
–30 to 80°C (–22 to 176°F) with LCD Display
Measurement
Span and MPa psi (/D1) bar (/D3) kgf/cm2(/D4) Process Temperature Limits:
Range
10 to 200 1.45 to 29
* Safety approval codes may affect limits.
Span 0.1 to 2 0.1 to 2 –40 to 120°C (–40 to 248°F)
kPa
A
Range 0 to 200 0 to 29 0 to 2 0 to 2
kPa Maximum Overpressure:
Span 0.1 to 2 14.5 to 290 1 to 20 1 to 20
B Capsule
Range 0 to 2 0 to 290 0 to 20 0 to 20 Capsule EJA510A EJA530A
Span 0.5 to 10 72.5 to 1450 5 to 100 5 to 100 A 4 MPa abs{580 psia} 4 MPa {580 psig}
C B 4 MPa abs{580 psia} 4 MPa {580 psig}
Range 0 to 10 0 to 1450 0 to 100 0 to 100
C 20 MPa abs{2900 psia} 20 MPa {2900 psig}
Span 5 to 50 720 to 7200 50 to 500 50 to 500 D 60 MPa abs{8500 psia} 60 MPa {8500 psig}
D
Range 0 to 50 0 to 7200 0 to 500 0 to 500 T1003.EPS
Values in absolute for EJA510A. T1001.EPS Working Pressure Limits (Silicone Oil)
Maximum Pressure Limit:
Zero Adjustment Limits:
Zero can be fully elevated or suppressed, within the Capsule
Capsule EJA510A EJA530A
Lower and Upper Range Limits of the capsule.
A 200 kPa abs{29 psia} 200 kPa {29 psig}
External Zero Adjustment “䉫”: B 2 MPa abs{290 psia} 2 MPa {290 psig}
External zero is continuously adjustable with 0.01% C 10 MPa abs{1450 psia} 10 MPa {1450 psig}
incremental resolution of span. Span may be D 50 MPa abs{7200 psia} 50 MPa {7200 psig}
adjusted locally using the digital indicator with range T1004.EPS
switch.
Minimum Pressure Limit:
Output “䉫”: EJA510A: 0.013 kPa abs
Two wire 4 to 20 mA DC output with digital commu- EJA530A: Lower limit of measurement range
nications, linear or square root programmable.
BRAIN or HART FSK protocol are superimposed on
the 4 to 20 mA signal. 䊉 Installation
Supply & Load Requirements “䉫”:
Failure Alarm: * Safety approvals can affect electrical requirements.
Output status at CPU failure and hardware error; See Section 6.6, ‘Power Supply Voltage and Load
Up-scale: 110%, 21.6 mA DC or more(standard) Resistance.’
Down-scale: -5%, 3.2 mA DC or less
-2.5%, 3.6 mA DC or less(Optional Supply Voltage “䉫”:
code /F1) 10.5 to 42 V DC for general use and flameproof type
Note: Applicable for Output signal code D and E 10.5 to 32 V DC for lightning protector (Optional code /A)
10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe, Type n,
nonincendive, or non-sparking type
Minimum voltage limited at 16.4 V DC for digital
communications, BRAIN and HART
10-1 IM 01C21F01-01E
EMC Conformity Standards “䉫”: , 䊉 Physical Specifications

EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial Wetted Parts Materials:
lications) Diaphragm and Process connector;
EN61326-2-3 See ‘Model and Suffix Codes.’
Communication Requirements “䉫”: Non-wetted Parts Materials:

BRAIN Housing;
Communication Distance; Low copper cast-aluminum alloy with polyurethane
Up to 2 km (1.25 miles) when using CEV polyethyl- paint (Munsell 0.6GY3.1/2.0)
ene-insulated PVC-sheathed cables. Degrees of Protection
Communication distance varies depending on type IP67, NEMA4X, JIS C0920 immersion proof
of cable used. Cover O-rings;
Load Capacitance; Buna-N
0.22 µF or less (see note) Data plate and tag;
Load Inductance; SUS304 or SUS316 (optional)
3.3 mH or less (see note) Fill Fluid;
Input Impedance of communicating device; Silicone or Fluorinated oil (optional)
10 kΩ or more at 2.4 kHz. Weight:
Note: For general-use and Flameproof type. 1.6 kg (3.5 lb) without integral indicator and
For Intrinsically safe type, please refer to mounting bracket.
‘Optional Specifications.’ Connections:
HART See ‘Model and Suffix Codes.’
Communication Distance;
Up to 1.5 km (1 mile) when using multiple twisted
pair cables. Communication distance varies
depending on type of cable used.
Use the following formula to determine cable
length for specific applications:
65 x 106 (Cf + 10,000)

L= -
(R x C) C
Where:
L = length in meters or feet
R = resistance in Ω (including barrier resistance)
C = cable capacitance in pF/m or pF/ft
Cf = maximum shunt capacitance of receiving
devices in pF/m or pF/ft
<Settings When Shipped> “䉫”

Tag Number As specified in order *1 Calibration Range
Lower Range Value As specified in order
Output Mode ‘Linear’
Calibration Range As specified in order
Display Mode ‘Linear’ Higher Range Value
Operation Mode ‘Normal’ unless otherwise specified in order Selected from mmH2O, mmAq, mmWG,
Calibration Range mmHg, Torr, Pa, hPa, kPa, MPa, mbar,
Damping Time ‘2 sec.’ Units bar, gf/cm2, kgf/cm2, inH2O, inHg, ftH2O,
Constant psi, or atm.(Only one unit can be specified)
T05E.EPS
Note 1: If Tag No. is no more than 16 alphanumeric characters (including - and ·), it will be written into
the tag plate and amplifier memory settings.
10-2 IM 01C21F01-01E
10.2 Model and Suffix Codes

䊉 Model EJA510A and EJA530A
Model Suffix Codes Description

EJA510A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Absolute pressure transmitter
EJA530A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gauge pressure transmitter
Output Signal -D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (BRAIN protocol)

-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 to 20 mA DC with digital communication (HART protocol, see IM 01C22T01-01E)
-F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol, see IM 01C22T02-01E)
-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital communication (PROFIBUS PA protocol, see IM 01C22T03-00E)
Measurement span A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 to 200 kPa{0.1 to 2 kgf/cm2}
(capsule) B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 to 2 MPa{1 to 20 kgf/cm2}
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 to 10 MPa{5 to 100 kgf/cm2}
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 to 50 MPa{50 to 500 kgf/cm2}
Wetted parts material [Process Connection] [Diaphragm]
S.............. SUS316L Hastelloy C-276
H.............. Hastelloy C-276 Hastelloy C-276
Process connection 4............. 1/2 NPT female
7............. 1/2 NPT male
8............. G 1/2 DIN 16 288 male
9............. M20⫻1.5 DIN 16 288 male
N.......... Always N
-0 . . . . . . . . Always 0
Electrical connection 0 . . . . . . G1/2 female, one electrical connection
2 . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections without blind plug
3 . . . . . . Pg 13.5 female, two electrical connections without blind plug
4 . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections without blind plug
5 . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
7 . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
8 . . . . . . Pg 13.5 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
9 . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections and a blind plug
A . . . . . . G1/2 female, two electrical connections and a SUS316 blind plug
C . . . . . . 1/2 NPT female, two electrical connections and a SUS316 blind plug
D . . . . . . M20 female, two electrical connections and a SUS316 blind plug
Integral indicator D . . . Digital indicator
E . . . Digital indicator with the range setting switch
N . . . (None)
Mounting bracket E.. SECC Carbon steel 2-inch pipe mounting
F.. SUS304 2-inch pipe mounting
L.. SUS316 2-inch pipe mounting
N.. (None)
Optional codes /䊐 Optional specification
T1006.EPS
10-3 IM 01C21F01-01E
10.3 Optional Specifications

For FOUNDATION Fieldbus explosion protected type, see IM 01C22T02-01E.
For PROFIBUS PA explosion protected type, see IM 01C22T03-00E.
Item Description Code
FM Explosionproof Approval *1
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dust-ignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G FF1
Hazardous (classified) locations, indoors and outdoors (NEMA 4X)
Temperature class: T6
Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60⬚C (–40 to 140⬚F)
FM Intrinsically safe Approval *1
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Division 1, Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division 1,
Factory Mutual (FM) Groups E, F & G and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, Class II, Division. 2,
Groups E, F & G, and Class III, Division 1 Hazardous Locations.
Enclosure: “NEMA 4X”, Temp. Class: T4, Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60⬚C (–40 to 140⬚F) FS1
Intrinsically Safe Apparatus Parameters
[Groups A, B, C, D, E, F and G]
Vmax=30 V, Imax=165 mA, Pmax=0.9 W, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 ␮H
[Groups C, D, E, F and G]
Combined FF1 and FS1 *1 FU1
CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Flameproof Approval *2
Certificate: KEMA 02ATEX2148
II 2G EExd IIC T4, T5, T6 KF2
Amb. Temp.: T5; –40 to 80⬚C ( –40 to 176⬚F), T4 and T6; –40 to 75⬚C ( –40 to 167⬚F)
Max. process Temp.: T4; 120⬚C (248⬚F), T5; 100⬚C (212⬚F), T6; 85⬚C (185⬚F)
CENELEC ATEX (KEMA) Intrinsically safe Approval *2
Certificate: KEMA 02ATEX1030X
II 1G EEx ia IIC T4, Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60⬚C (–40 to 140⬚F) KS2
CENELEC ATEX
Ui=30 V, Ii=165 mA, Pi=0.9 W, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 ␮H
Combined KF2, KS2 and Type n *2
Type n
II 3G Ex nL IIC T4, Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60°C (–40 to 140°F)
Ui=30 V DC, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 µH KU2
Dust
II 1D maximum surface temperature T65°C (149⬚F) {Tamb.: 40°C (104⬚F)},
T85°C (185⬚F) {Tamb.: 60°C (140⬚F)}, T105°C (221⬚F) {Tamb.: 80°C (176⬚F)}
T1007-1.EPS
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2 and 7 (1/2 NPT female).
*2: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 4, 7 and 9 (1/2 NPT and M20 female).
10-4 IM 01C21F01-01E

CSA Explosionproof Approval *1
Certificate: 1089598
Explosionproof for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C and D
Dustignitionproof for Class II/III, Division 1, Groups E, F and G
Division2 ‘SEALS NOT REQUIRED’ , Temp. Class: T4, T5, T6 Encl Type 4x
Max. Process Temp.: T4; 120⬚C (248⬚F), T5; 100⬚C (212⬚F), T6; 85⬚C (185⬚F) CF1
Amb. Temp.: –40 to 80⬚C (–40 to 176⬚F)
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required. Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero
adjustment screw
Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) CSA Intrinsically safe Approval *1
Certificate: 1053843
Intrinsically Safe for Class I, Groups A, B, C and D Class II and III, Groups E, F and G
Nonincendive for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D Class II, Division 2,
Groups F and G and Class III (not use Safety Barrier)
Encl Type 4x, Temp. Class: T4, Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60⬚C (–40 to 140⬚F) CS1
Process Sealing Certification
Dual Seal Certified by CSA to the requirement of ANSI/ISA 12.27.01
No additional sealing required. Primary seal failure annunciation: at the zero
adjustment screw
Combined CF1 and CS1 *1 CU1
IECEx Intrinsically safe, type n and Flameproof Approval *2
Intrinsically safe and type n
Certificate: IECEx KEM 06.0007X
Ex ia IIC T4, Ex nL IIC T4 Enclosure: IP67
Amb. Temp.: –40 to 60⬚C (–40 to 140⬚F), Max. Process Temp.: 120⬚C (248⬚F)
IECEx Electrical Parameters: [Ex ia] Ui=30 V, Ii=165 mA, Pi=0.9 W, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 ␮H
[Ex nL] Ui=30 V, Ci=22.5 nF, Li=730 ␮H SU2
Scheme
Flameproof
Certificate: IECEx KEM 06.0005
Ex d IIC T6...T4 Enclosure: IP67
Max.Process Temp.: T4;120⬚C (248⬚F), T5;100⬚C (212⬚F), T6; 85⬚C (185⬚F)
Amb.Temp.: –40 to 75⬚C (–40 to 167⬚F) for T4, –40 to 80⬚C (–40 to 176⬚F) for T5,
–40 to 75⬚C (–40 to 167⬚F) for T6
T1007-2.EPS
*1: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2 and 7 (1/2 NPT female).
*2: Applicable for Electrical connection code 2, 4 and 7 (1/2 NPT and M20 female).
10-5 IM 01C21F01-01E

Amplifier cover only P䊐
Color change
Painting Amplifier cover and terminal cover, Munsell 7.5 R4/14 PR
Coating change Epoxy resin-baked coating X1
Exterior parts on the amplifier housing (name plates, tag plate, zero-adjustment screw,
316 SST exterior parts HC
stopper screw) will become 316 or 316L SST.
Transmitter power supply voltage: 10.5 to 32 V DC (10.5 to 30 V DC for intrinsically safe
Lightning protector type, 9 to 32 V DC for FOUNDATION Fieldbus and PROFIBUS PA communication type.) A
Allowable current: Max. 6000 A (1⫻40 ␮s), Repeating 1000 A (1⫻40 ␮s) 100 times
Degrease cleansing treatment K1
Oil-prohibited use Degrease cleansing treatment with fluorinated oil filled capsule.
Operating temperature: –20 to 80°C K2
P calibration (psi unit) D1

bar calibration (bar unit) (See Table for Span and
Calibration units D3
Range Limits.)
M calibration (kgf/cm2 unit) D4
Fast response *2 Update time: 0.125 sec or less, see GS for the response time. F1
Failure alarm down-scale *1 Output status at CPU failure and hardware error is –5%, 3.2 mA or less. C1
Failure alarm down-scale: output status at CPU failure and
hardware error is –5%, 3.2 mA or less. C2
Output signal limits:
NAMUR NE43 compliant *1 3.8 mA to 20.5 mA
Failure alarm up-scale: output status at CPU failure and
C3
hardware error is 110%, 21.6 mA or more.
Stainless steel amplifier Amplifier housing material; SCS14A stainless steel (equivalent to SUS316 cast stainless
E1
housing steel or ASTM CF-8M)
Stainless steel tag plate JIS SUS304 stainless steel tag plate wired onto transmitter N4
High Accuracy type High Accuracy (Applicable only for Model EJA530A) HAC
PED 97/23/EC
European Pressure CATEGORY: III, Module: H, Type of Equipment: Pressure Accessory - Vessel,
PE3
Equipment Directive Type of Fluid: Liquid and Gas,
Group of Fluid: 1 and 2
Mill Certificate Process connector M15
Test Pressure: 200 kPa (2 kgf/cm2) T05
Pressure test/ Test Pressure: 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm2) Nitrogen (N2) Gas T06
Leak test Certificate Retention time: 10 minutes
Test Pressure: 10 MPa (100 kgf/cm2) T07
Test Pressure: 50 MPa (500 kgf/cm2) T08
T1008.EPS
*1: Applicable for Output signal code D and E. The hardware error indicates faulty amplifier or
capsule. When combining with Optional code F1, output status for down-scale is –2.5%,
3.6 mA DC or less.
*2: Applicable for Output signal code D and E. Write protection switch is attached for Output code E.
10-6 IM 01C21F01-01E
10.4 Dimensions
䊉 Model EJA510A and EJA530A [Style: S2]
䉬 With Process Connection code 7

Unit: mm(Approx. inch)
96(3.77) 41(1.61) 110(4.33)
Conduit connection 12 45
Ground
(0.47) (1.77) terminal
Shrouding bolt *2
(3.07)
␾78
127(5.0)
111(4.37)
170(6.69)
LOCK ZERO LOCK
Zero adjustment
Adapter
124(4.88)
Pipe(Open to atmosphere)*1
44(1.73)
(1.85)
47
2-inch pipe Mounting bracket

91(3.58)
(O. D. 60.5 mm)
*1: Applied to Model EJA530A with Measurement span code A, B, and C.

*2: Applicable only for ATEX and IECEx Flameproof type.
䉬 For Process Connection code 4

163(6.41)
䉬 For Process Connection code 8 and 9

20(0.78)
176(6.92)
5(0.19)
␾6(0.23)
F1001.EPS
10-7 IM 01C21F01-01E
Customer Model EJA510A and EJA530A
Maintenance Absolute and Gauge
Pressure Transmitter
Parts List
2 5
4
11
A 10
12
13 1
2 2
1
14
A
6
7-2
7-1 5
8 9
18
17
15 15
16
15
Process connection Process connection

code 4 code 8 and 9
Process connection
code 7
21
19
22
24
20 23
All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 1999, Yokogawa Electric Corporation. CMPL 01C21F01-01E
6th Edition: Oct. 2008(KP)
Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2
Item Part No. Qty Description
1 Bellow 2 Cover
F9341RA Cast-aluminum alloy
F9341RJ SCS14A stainless steel
2 F9341JP 2 O-ring
3 Below 1 Case Assembly (Note 1)
F9341AA Cast-aluminum alloy for G1/2

F9341AC Cast-aluminum alloy for G1/2 (two electrical connections)
F9341AE Cast-aluminum alloy for 1/2 NPT (two electrical connections)
F9341AH Cast-aluminum alloy for M20 (two electrical connections)
F9341AJ Cast-aluminum alloy for Pg13.5 (two electrical connections)
F9341AR SCS14A stainless steel for 1/2 NPT (two electrical connections)
4 F9341KA 1 Name Plate
5 Bellow 4 Screw
F9900RG For cast-aluminum alloy case assembly
F9900RR For SCS14A stainless steel case assembly
6 F9341KL 1 Tag Plate

7-1 Below 1 CPU Assembly
F9342AB For BRAIN protocol version
F9342AL For HART protocol version
F9342AF For BRAIN protocol version (Optional code /F1)
F9342AM For HART protocol version with write protection switch (Optional code /F1)
7-2 F9342BF 1 For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol version
F9342BG For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol version with PID/LM function (Optional code /LC1)
8 F9900RP 2 Cap Screw
9 Y9612YU 2 Screw
10 Below 1 Plug
F9340NW For Pg13.5
F9340NX For M20
G9330DK For G1/2
G9612EB For 1/2 NPT
11 Bellow 1 Cover Assembly
F9341FM Cast-aluminum alloy
F9341FJ SCS14A stainless steel
12 Below 1 LCD Board Assembly
F9342BL Without range-setting switch For integral indicator
F9342BM With range-setting switch

13 F9342MK 2 Mounting Screw
14 F9300PB 2 Label
15 1 Capsule Assembly (See Table 1.)(Note 2)
16 F9300AJ 1 O-ring
17 Below 1 Pipe (for EJA530A with Measurement Span code A, B, and C)
F9385XK Polypropylene resin
F9385XM SUS316 Stainless Steel (Optional code /E1)
18 F9385XL 1 O-ring (for EJA530A with Measurement Span code A, B, and C)
19 F9385XZ 1 Plate, SUS304 Stainless Steel
20 Below 1 Bracket Assembly

F9385XV SECC carbon steel
F9385XT SECC carbon steel (for epoxy resin-baked coating)
F9385XU SUS304 stainless steel
21 D0117XL-A 1 U-bolt/Nut Assembly (L), SUS304 Stainless Steel
22 Below 1 Bracket
F9270AX SECC carbon steel
F9300TN SECC carbon steel (for epoxy resin-baked coating)
F9300TE SUS304 Stainless Steel
23 F9385XW 1 U-bolt/Nut Assembly (S), SUS304 Stainless Steel
24 F9385XY 1 Adapter, SUS304 Stainless Steel
(Note 1) Applicable for BRAIN and HART protocol versions (Output signal code D and E).
For FOUNDATION Fieldbus protocol version (Output signal code F), consult Yokogawa local office.
(Note 2) In case of Degrease cleansing treatment (Optional code /K1), consult Yokogawa local office.
Table 1. Capsule Assembly Part Number (Item 15)

Process Capsule EJA510A EJA530A
connection Code S(*1) S, /K2(*2) H(*1) H, /K2(*2) S(*1) S, K2(*2) H(*1) H, K2(*2)
A F9421AB F9421AP F9421NB F9421NP F9420AB F9420AP F9420NB F9420NP
B F9421BB F9421BP F9421PB F9421PP F9420BB F9420BP F9420PB F9420PP
1/2 NPT female
C F9421CB F9421CP F9421QB F9421QP F9420CB F9420CP F9420QB F9420QP
D F9421DB F9421DP F9421RB F9421RP F9420DB F9420DP F9420RB F9420RP
A F9421AD F9421AR F9421ND F9421NR F9420AD F9420AR F9420ND F9420NR
B F9421BD F9421BR F9421PD F9421PR F9420BD F9420BR F9420PD F9420PR
1/2 NPT male
C F9421CD F9421CR F9421QD F9421QR F9420CD F9420CR F9420QD F9420QR
D F9421DD F9421DR F9421RD F9421RR F9420DD F9420DR F9420RD F9420RR
A F9421AE F9421AS F9421NE F9421NS F9420AE F9420AS F9420NE F9420NS
B F9421BE F9421BS F9421PE F9421PS F9420BE F9420BS F9420PE F9420PS
G1/2 male (DIN)
C F9421CE F9421CS F9421QE F9421QS F9420CE F9420CS F9420QE F9420QS
D F9421DE F9421DS F9421RE F9421RS F9420DE F9420DS F9420RE F9420RS
A F9421AF F9421AT F9421NF F9421NT F9420AF F9420AT F9420NF F9420NT
B F9421BF F9421BT F9421PF F9421PT F9420BF F9420BT F9420PF F9420PT
M20⫻1.5 male
C F9421CF F9421CT F9421QF F9421QT F9420CF F9420CT F9420QF F9420QT
D F9421DF F9421DT F9421RF F9421RT F9420DF F9420DT F9420RF F9420RT
*1: Silicone oil filled capsule (Standard)
*2: Fluorinated oil filled capsule (for oil-prohibited use: Optional code /K2)
Jan. 2008 CMPL 01C21F01-01E

Subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan.
REVISION RECORD
Title: Model EJA510A and EJA530A Absolute Pressure and Gauge Pressure
Transmitter
Manual No.: IM 01C21F01-01E
Edition Date Page Revised Item
1st June 1999 – New publication
2nd June 2000 CONTENTS Page 3 • Add REVISION RECORD.
2-8 2.9.4 b.• Add maximum process temperature of –40 to 75°C for KEMA
Flameproof type T6.
• Change wating period when opening terminal cover after power
off from 1 min. to 10 min.
• Add note for using heat-resisting cables.
8-4 8.3.1 • Add footnote *2 for amp. damping time constant when Optional
code /F1 is specified.
8-5 • Add footnote *3 for low side output status at failure alarm when
Optional code /F1 is specified.
10-4 10.3 • Change explosion protected type Optional code from /䊐䊐1 to
/䊐䊐11.
• Add maximum process temperature of –40 to 75°C for KEMA
Flameproof type T6.
10-5 • Add Optional code /F1 and /N4.
CMPL CMPL 1C21F1-01E 1st 2nd
Page 2 • Change Part No. on Item 7, CPU Assembly.
F9342BP F9342AB
F9342BQ F9342AL
• Add Part No. on Item 7, CPU Assembly.
F9342AF for BRAIN protocol, Optional code /F1
F9342AM for HART protocol, Optional code /F1
3rd Aug. 2001 – • Style change from S1 to S2.
2-8 2.10 • Change EMC Conformity number.
8-4, 8-5 8.3.1 • Add footnote (*4) to B40, Maximum static pressure in Parameter
Summary.
10-1 10.1 • Change Maximum Over pressure for Capsule code A from
400 kPa to 4 MPa.
10-4 10.3 • Change explosion protected type Optional code from /䊐䊐11 to
/䊐䊐1.
10-6 10.4 • Change dimensions.
CMPL CMPL 1C21F1-01E 2nd CMPL 01C21F01-01E 3rd
• Change Part No. on Item 15, Capsule Assembly and followings.
• Item 17; F9374MS F9385XK, F9385XM
• Item 18; F9374MU F9385XL
• Item 19; F9374NZ F9385XZ
• Item 20; F9374MX F9385XV, F9374NX F9385XT,
F9374MW F9385XU
• Item 23; F9374MY F9385XW
• Item 24; F9374NY F9385XY
4th May 2002 1-2 1.1 • Add “1.1 For Safety Using.”
2-7 2.9.4 • Add descriptions based on ATEX directive.
10-4 10.3 • Add Optional code K䊐2.
10-5 • Add Optional code C2 and C3.
5th Apr. 2003 2-8 2.9.4 • Add Option code KU2

2-10 2.11 • Add PED (Pressure Equipment Directive)
10-3 10.2 • Add Output Signal code F.
10-4 10.3 • Add Option code KU2.
10-5 10.3 • Add Option code HAC and PE3.
CMPL CMPL 01C21F01-01E 3rd 4th
• Add part No. on Item 7-2, CPU Assembly for fieldbus protocol.
REVISION RECORD.EPS
IM 01C21F01-01E
Edition Date Page Revised Item
6th Apr. 2006 1-2 1.1 • Add (e) Explosion Protected Type Instrument and (f) Modification
1-3 1.3 • Add “1.3 ATEX Document”
2-6 2.9.3 • Add “IECEx Certification” and delete “SAA Certification”
2-11 2.12 • Add Low Voltage Directive
10-4, 10-5 10.3 • Add Certificate numbers and Applicable standards
10-5 • Add option code /SU2 and delete option code /SU1
10-6 • Add option code /PR
7th Jan. 2008 1-1 • Add direct current symbol.

1-4 • Add 11 European languages for ATEX documentation.
2-3+ 2.9.1 • Add applicable standard and certificate number for appovals.
2-10 2.10 • Add EMC caution note.
4-2 4.4 • Add section of changing the direction of integral indicator.
8-14 8.3.3 (11) • Add figure for A40.
9-4 9.4.1 • Add figure of integral indicator direction.
10-1+ 10.1, 10.2 • Add PROFIBUS PA communication type.
10-4, -5 10.3 • Delete applicable standard from the table.
CMPL CMPL 01C21F01-01E 4th CMPL 01C21F01-01E 5th
• Delete logo from the tag plate.
8th Oct. 2008 2-9 2.9.4 Change explosion protection marking for type n from EEx to Ex.
2-10 2.10 Update EMC conformity standards.
8-4 and 8-5 8.3.1 Add new parameters.
8-6 8.3.2 Add items in table 8.3.1.
8-9 and later 8.3.3 Add (5) Change Output Limit and (13) Span Adjustment.
Re-number the items.
8-18 8.5.2 Modify descriptions and notes for Er.01.
9-1 9.3 Add a note for calibration.
9-5 9.4.3 Add a note for cleaning.
10-3 10.2 Add new suffix codes.
10-5, 10-6 10.3 Add Sealing statement for CSA.standards., Add /HC.
CMPL CMPL 01C21F01-01E 7th 8th
Change part No .of item 5 and 8.
REVISION RECORD2.EPS
IM 01C21F01-01E
KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 1 of 21
Operating/Assembly instructions
Edition: 15
BoWex®
Non-failsafe
curved-tooth gear couplings
types
junior plug-in coupling, Type junior plug-in coupling (two-part)
junior M coupling,
M und M...C
I
and their combinations
according to directive 2014/34/EU

for finish bored, pilot bored and
unbored couplings
Type junior M coupling (three-part)
Type M and M...C
Type I
Please observe protection Drawn: 2017-01-02 Pz Replacing: KTR-N dated 2016-04-20

note ISO 16016. Verified: 2017-01-02 Pz Replaced by:
KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 2 of 21
Edition: 15
The BoWex® curved-tooth gear coupling is a flexible shaft connection. It is able to compensate
for shaft misalignment, for example caused by manufacturing inaccuracies, thermal expansion,
etc.
Table of contents
1 Technical data 3
2 Advice 5
2.1 General advice 5
2.2 Safety and advice symbols 5
2.3 General hazard warnings 5
2.4 Intended use 6
2.5 Coupling selection 6
2.6 Reference to EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC 6
3 Storage, transport and packaging 7

3.1 Storage 7
3.2 Transport and packaging 7
4 Assembly 7
4.1 Components of the couplings 7
4.2 Advice for finish bore 9
4.3 Assembly of the hubs 10
4.4 Displacements - alignment of the couplings 11
5 Start-up 12
6 Breakdowns, causes and elimination 13
7 Disposal 15
8 Spares inventory, customer service addresses 15
9 Enclosure A Advice and instructions regarding the use in hazardous locations 16
9.1 Intended use in hazardous locations 16
9.2 Inspection intervals for couplings in hazardous locations 17

9.3 Checking of torsional backlash 18
9.4 Standard values of wear 19
9.5 Permissible coupling materials in hazardous locations 19
9.6 marking of coupling for hazardous locations 20

9.7 EU Certificate of conformity 21

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 3 of 21
Edition: 15
1 Technical data
Illustration 1: BoWex® junior plug-in coupling (two-part) Illustration 2: BoWex® junior M coupling (three-part)
Table 1:
® ®
BoWex junior plug-in coupling and BoWex junior M coupling
Torque [Nm] Finish bores [mm] Thread for setscrews
Hub Plug-in sleeve Max. speed
Size TA
TKN TK max. component 1b D1 component 2b D2 G1 t1 t2 [rpm]
[Nm]
d1 d2
Ø6, Ø7, Ø8, Ø9 22 Ø8 22
14 5 10 Ø10, Ø11 25 Ø10, Ø11 25 M5 6 8 1.4 6000
Ø12, Ø14 26 Ø12, Ø14 26
Ø12, Ø14 27
Ø14, Ø15 29
19 8 16 Ø16 30 M5 6 10 1.4 6000
Ø19 32 Ø19 35
Ø10, Ø11, Ø12 26
Ø14, Ø16 32
Ø14, Ø15, Ø16 32
24 12 24 M5 6 10 1.4 6000
Ø18, Ø19, Ø20 36 Ø19, Ø20 36
Ø24 38 Ø24 40
Table 2:
® ®
BoWex junior plug-in coupling and BoWex junior M coupling
Dimensions [mm]
Size
DH l1; l2 E1 L1 LH1 M1 F G E L LH M; N
14 40 23 2 48 40 8 18.5 21.5 4 50 37 6.5
19 47 25 2 52 42 10 19.0 23.0 4 54 37 8.5
24 53 26 2 54 45 9 21.5 23.5 4 56 41 7.5

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 4 of 21
Edition: 15
1 Technical data
Illustration 3: BoWex® type M Illustration 4: BoWex® type I
Table 3:
®
BoWex type M and type I
Max. Thread for setscrews
Size Pilot bore Dimensions [mm] 2)
finish [mm]
Un- Pilot bore TA
l1; l2 E L LH M; N l3 D DH DZ 1) G t
bored bored d1; d2 [Nm]
M-14 M-14C x - 15 23 4 50 37 6.5 10 25 40 33 M5 6 2
M-19 M-19C x - 20 25 4 54 37 8.5 10 32 47 39 M5 6 2
M-24 M-24C x - 24 26 4 56 41 7.5 14 36 53 45 M5 6 2
M-28 M-28C x - 28 40 4 84 46 19 13 44 65 54 M8 10 10
M-32 M-32C x - 32 40 4 84 48 18 13 50 75 63 M8 10 10
M-38 M-38C x - 38 40 4 84 48 18 13 58 83 69 M8 10 10
M-42 x - 42 42 4 88 50 19 13 65 92 78 M8 10 10
M-48 M-48C x - 48 50 4 104 50 27 13 68 95 78 M8 10 10
27 15 /
M-65 M-65C x 65 55 4 114 68 23 16 96 132 110 M10 3) 17
70 lg. 20
I-80 - 31 80 90 6 186 93 46.5 20 124 175 145 M10 20 17
I-100 - 35 100 110 8 228 102 63 22 152 210 176 M12 30 40
I-125 - 45 125 140 10 290 134 78 30 192 270 225 M16 40 80
1) Tip circle of the hub
2) Position of threads for setscrews BoWex® M-14 to M-24 opposite the keyway; BoWex® M-28 to I-125 on the keyway
3) Length of hub 55 mm t = 15 mm, 70 mm t = 20 mm
®
BoWex couplings with attachments that can generate heat, sparks and static charging
(e. g. combinations with brake drums, brake disks, overload systems such as torque
limiters, fans etc.) are not permitted for the use in hazardous locations.
A separate analysis must be performed.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 5 of 21
Edition: 15
2 Advice
2.1 General advice
Please read through these operating/assembly instructions carefully before you start up the coupling.
Please pay special attention to the safety instructions!
®
The BoWex coupling is suitable and approved for the use in hazardous locations. When using the
coupling in hazardous locations, please observe the special advice and instructions regarding safety
in enclosure A.
The operating/assembly instructions are part of your product. Please store them carefully and close to the
coupling. The copyright for these operating/assembly instructions remains with KTR.
2.2 Safety and advice symbols
This symbol indicates notes which may contribute to

Warning of potentially explosive
preventing bodily injuries or serious bodily injuries that
atmospheres
may result in death caused by explosion.

STOP Warning of personal injury preventing bodily injuries or serious bodily injuries that
may result in death.

! Warning of product damages
preventing material or machine damage.
 General advice
preventing adverse results or conditions.

Warning of hot surfaces preventing burns with hot surfaces resulting in light to
serious bodily injuries.
2.3 General hazard warnings
With assembly, operation and maintenance of the coupling it has to be made sure that the
STOP entire drive train is secured against accidental switch-on. You may be seriously hurt by
rotating parts. Please make absolutely sure to read through and observe the following
safety indications.
 All operations on and with the coupling have to be performed taking into account "safety first".
 Please make sure to switch off the power pack before you perform your work on the coupling.
 Secure the power pack against accidental switch-on, e. g. by providing warning signs at the place of switch-on
or removing the fuse for current supply.
 Do not reach into the operation area of the coupling as long as it is in operation.
 Please secure the coupling against accidental contact. Please provide for the necessary protection devices
and covers.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 6 of 21
Edition: 15
2 Advice
2.4 Intended use
You may only assemble, operate and maintain the coupling if you
 have carefully read through the operating/assembly instructions and understood them
 had technical training
 are authorized by your company
The coupling may only be used in accordance with the technical data (see chapter 1). Unauthorized modifications
on the coupling design are not admissible. We will not assume liability for any damage that may arise. In the
interest of further development we reserve the right for technical modifications.
®
The BoWex described in here corresponds to the technical status at the time of printing of these
operating/assembly instructions.
2.5 Coupling selection
For a long-lasting and failure-free operation of the coupling it must be selected according to
! the selection instructions (according to DIN 740 part 2) for the particular application (see
catalogue drive technology „BoWex “).
®
If the operating conditions (performance, speed, modifications on engine and machine)

change, the coupling selection must be reviewed.
Please make sure that the technical data regarding torque refer to the sleeve only. The
transmittable torque of the shaft-hub-connection must be reviewed by the customer and is
subject to his responsibility.
For drives subject to torsional vibrations (drives with cyclic stress due to torsional vibrations) it is necessary to
perform a torsional vibration calculation to ensure a reliable selection. Typical drives subject to torsional vibrations
are e. g. drives with diesel engines, piston pumps, piston compressors etc. If requested, KTR will perform the
coupling selection and the torsional vibration calculation.
2.6 Reference to EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
The couplings supplied by KTR should be considered as components, not machines or partly completed
machines according to EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. Consequently KTR does not have to issue a
declaration of incorporation. For details about safe assembly, start-up and safe operation please refer to the
present operating/assembly instructions considering the warnings.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 7 of 21
Edition: 15
3 Storage, transport and packaging
3.1 Storage
The coupling hubs are supplied in preserved condition and can be stored at a dry and covered place for 6 - 9
months.
The features of the coupling sleeves remain unchanged for up to 5 years with favourable stock conditions.
The storage rooms must not include any ozone-generating devices like e. g. fluorescent
! light sources, mercury-vapour lamps or electrical high-voltage appliances.
Humid storage rooms are not suitable.
Please make sure that condensation is not generated. The best relative air humidity is less
than 65 %.
3.2 Transport and packaging
In order to avoid any injuries and any kind of damage please always make use of proper
! transport and lifting equipment.
The couplings are packed differently each depending on size, number and kind of transport. Unless otherwise
contractually agreed, packaging will follow the in-house packaging specifications of KTR.
4 Assembly
The coupling is generally supplied in individual parts. Before assembly the coupling has to be inspected for
completeness.
4.1 Components of the couplings
Type made of nylon
Components of BoWex® junior plug-in coupling

Component Quantity Description
1 1 Hub
2 1 Plug-in sleeve
Setscrews
3 2
DIN EN ISO 4029
Illustration 5: BoWex® junior plug-in coupling

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 8 of 21
Edition: 15
4 Assembly
4.1 Components of the couplings
Components of BoWex® junior M coupling

1 2 Hub
2 1 Sleeve
Setscrews
3 2
DIN EN ISO 4029
Illustration 6: BoWex® junior M coupling
Type made of steel/nylon

®
Components of BoWex M coupling (size 14 - 65)
1 2 Hub
2 1 M-sleeve
Setscrews
3 2
DIN EN ISO 4029
Illustration 7: BoWex® type M
®
Components of BoWex I coupling (size 80 - 125)
1 2 Hub
1)
2 1 I-sleeve
1)
3 2 Circlips
Setscrews
4 2
DIN EN ISO 4029
1) Circlips and sleeve are delivered pre-assembled.
Illustration 8: BoWex® type I

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 9 of 21
Edition: 15
4 Assembly
4.2 Advice for finish bore
The maximum permissible bore diameters d (see table 1 to

STOP 3 in chapter 1 - technical data) must not be exceeded. If
these figures are disregarded, the coupling may tear.
Rotating particles may cause danger to life.
 Hub bores (steel hubs) machined by the customer have to

observe concentricity or axial runout, respectively (see
illustration 9).
 Please make absolutely sure to observe the figures for
Ø dmax.
 Carefully align the hubs when the finish bores are drilled.
 Please provide for a setscrew according to
DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point or an end plate to fasten
the hubs axially.
Illustration 9: Concentricity and axial runout
The customer bears the sole responsibility for all machining processes performed
! subsequently on unbored or pilot bored as well as finish machined coupling components
and spare parts. KTR does not assume any warranty claims resulting from insufficient
remachining.
Table 4: Setscrews
1) 1) 1)
Size 14 19 24 28 32 38 42 48 65 80 100 125
Dimension G M5 M5 M5 M8 M8 M8 M8 M8 M10 M10 M12 M16
Tightening torque
2 2 2 10 10 10 10 10 17 17 40 80
TA [Nm]
1) Tightening torques of the BoWex® junior plug-in coupling and BoWex® junior M coupling TA = 1,4 Nm
Table 5: Recommended fit pairs acc. to DIN 748/1

Bore [mm]
Shaft tolerance Bore tolerance
above up to
50 k6 H7
50 m6 (KTR standard)
If a feather keyway is intended to be used in the hub, it should correspond to the tolerance ISO JS9 (KTR
standard) with normal operating conditions or ISO P9 with difficult operating conditions (frequently alternating
torsional direction, shock loads, etc.).
The transmittable torque of the shaft-hub-connection must be reviewed by the customer and is subject to his
responsibility.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 10 of 21
Edition: 15
4 Assembly
4.3 Assembly of the hubs

We recommend to inspect bores, shaft, keyway and feather key for dimensional accuracy
before assembly.
Heating the hubs lightly (approx. 80 °C) allows for an easier mounting on the shaft.
Please pay attention to the ignition risk in hazardous locations!
Touching the heated hubs causes burns.

STOP Please wear safety gloves.
With the assembly please make sure that the distance dimension E (see table 2 and 3) is
! observed to allow for axial clearance of the sleeve while being in operation.
Disregarding this advice may cause damage to the coupling.
 Mount the hubs on the shaft of driving and driven side.

 Does not apply with type BoWex junior plug-in coupling:
®
Put the sleeve on the spline of the hub on the driving or driven side.
 Shift the power packs in axial direction until the distance dimension E is achieved.
 If the power packs are already firmly assembled, shifting the hubs axially on the shafts allows for adjusting the
distance dimension E.
 Fasten the hubs by tightening the setscrews DIN EN ISO 4029 with a cup point (tightening torques see
table 4).

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 11 of 21
Edition: 15
4 Assembly
4.4 Displacements - alignment of the couplings
The displacement figures specified in tables 6 and 7 provide for sufficient safety to compensate for external
influences like, for example, thermal expansion or foundation settling.
In order to ensure a long service life of the coupling and avoid dangers with the use in
! hazardous locations, the shaft ends must be accurately aligned.
Please absolutely observe the displacement figures specified (see tables 6 and 7). If the
figures are exceeded, the coupling will be damaged.
The more accurate the alignment of the coupling, the longer is its service life.
If used in hazardous areas for the explosion group IIC (marking II 2GD c IIC T X), only half of
the displacement figures (see tables 6 and 7) are permissible.
Please note:
 The displacement figures specified in tables 6 and 7 are maximum figures which must not arise in parallel. If
radial and angular displacement arises at the same time, the permissible radial displacements of the coupling
halves have to be reduced as follows:
Kr
Krzul  Kr   Ww
2Kw
Ww = angular shaft displacement
 The displacement figures mentioned are general standard figures that apply up to an ambient temperature of
®
80 °C, ensuring a sufficient service life of the BoWex coupling.
Displacement figures between the speeds specified have to be interpolated accordingly. If necessary, please
ask about the displacement for the corresponding coupling type.
 Please inspect with a dial gauge, ruler or feeler whether the permissible displacement figures of tables 6 and 7
can be observed.
Angular displacements Radial displacements Axial displacements Radial and angular

displacements
Illustration 10: Displacements
Examples of the displacement combinations

Illustration 11:
specified in illustration 11: Combinations of
displacement
Example 1:
Kr = 30 %
Kw = 70 %
Example 2:
Kr = 60 %
Kw = 40 %
Ktotal = Kr + Kw  100 %

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 12 of 21
Edition: 15
4 Assembly
4.4 Displacements - alignment of the couplings

® ®
Table 6: Displacement figures - BoWex junior plug-in coupling and BoWex junior M coupling
Type junior plug-in coupling Type junior M
Size
14 19 24 14 19 24
Max. axial displacement Ka [mm] ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Max. radial displacement with n=1500 rpm Kr [mm] ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.3 ±0.3 ±0.4
Max. radial displacement with n=3000 rpm Kr [mm] ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.1 ±0.3 ±0.3 ±0.4
Kw [degree] max. angular displacement with n=1500 rpm ±1.0 ±1.0 ±0.9 ±1.0 ±1.0 ±0.9
Kw [degree] max. angular displacement with n=3000 rpm ±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.6 ±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.6
®
Table 7: Displacement figures - BoWex type M and type I
Size 14 19 24 28 32 38 42 48 65 80 100 125
Max. axial displacement Ka [mm] ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Max. radial displacement with
±0.30 ±0.30 ±0.35 ±0.35 ±0.35 ±0.40 ±0.40 ±0.40 ±0.45 ±0.45 ±0.45 ±0.45
n=1500 rpm Kr [mm]
Max. radial displacement with
±0.20 ±0.20 ±0.23 ±0.23 ±0.23 ±0.25 ±0.25 ±0.25 ±0.28 ±0.28 ±0.28 ±0.28
n=3000 rpm Kr [mm]
Kw [degree] max. angular
±1.0 ±1.0 ±0.9 ±0.9 ±0.9 ±0.9 ±0.9 ±0.9 ±0.7 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.4
displacement with n=1500 rpm
Kw [degree] max. angular
±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.6 ±0.5 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.3
displacement with n=3000 rpm
5 Start-up
Before start-up of the coupling, please inspect the tightening of the setscrews in the hubs, the alignment and the
distance dimension E and adjust, if necessary, and also inspect all screw connections for the tightening torques
specified, dependent on the type of coupling.
If used in hazardous locations the setscrews to fasten the hubs as well as all screw connections
must be secured against working loose additionally, e. g. conglutinating with Loctite (average
strength).
Finally the coupling protection against accidental contact must be fitted.
The cover must be electrically conductive and included in the equipotential bonding. Bellhousings (magnesium
share below 7.5 %) made of aluminium and damping rings (NBR) can be used as connecting element between
pump and electric motor. The cover may only be taken off with standstill of the unit.
During operation of the coupling, please pay attention to

 different operating noise
 vibrations occurring.
If the couplings are used in locations subject to dust explosion and in mining the user must make sure that there
is no accumulation of dust in a dangerous volume between the cover and the coupling. The coupling must not
operate in an accumulation of dust.
For covers with unlocked openings on the top face no light metals must be used if the couplings are used as
equipment of equipment group ll (if possible, from stainless steel).
If the couplings are used in mining (equipment group l M2), the cover must not be made of light metal. In addition,
it must be resistant to higher mechanical loads than if it is used as equipment of equipment group ll.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 13 of 21
Edition: 15
5 Start-up
The minimum distance „Sr“ between the protective device and the rotating parts must at least correspond to the
figures specified below.
If the protective device is used as cover, regular openings can be arranged from the point of view explosion
protection that must not exceed the following dimensions:
Cover [mm]
Openings
Top side Lateral components Distance „Sr“
Circular - max. diameter 4 8  10
Rectangular - max. lateral length 4 8  10
Straight or curved slot -
not permissible 8  20
max. lateral length/height
If you note any irregularities with the coupling during operation, the drive unit must be
! switched off immediately. The cause of the breakdown must be specified by means of the
table „Breakdowns“ and, if possible, be eliminated according to the proposals. The potential
breakdowns mentioned can be hints only. To find out the cause all operating factors and
machine components must be considered.
Coating of coupling:
If coated (priming, paintings, etc.) couplings are used in hazardous locations, the requirements on
conductibility and coating thickness must be considered. In case of paintings up to 200 µm
electrostatic load does not have to be expected. Multiple coatings exceeding 200 µm are prohibited
for explosion group llC.
6 Breakdowns, causes and elimination

®
The below-mentioned failures can result in a use of the BoWex coupling other than intended. In addition to the
specifications given in these operating and assembly instructions please make sure to avoid such failures.
The errors listed can only be clues to search for the failures. When searching for the failure the adjacent
components must generally be considered.
If used other than intended the coupling can become a source of ignition.
EU directive 2014/34/EU requires special care by the manufacturer and the user.
General failures with use other than intended:

 Important data for the coupling selection were not forwarded.
 The calculation of the shaft-hub-connection was not considered.
 Coupling components with damage occurred during transport are assembled.
 If the heated hubs are assembled, the permissible temperature is exceeded.
 The clearance of the components to be assembled is not coordinated with one another.
 Tightening torques have been fallen below/exceeded.
 Components are mixed up by mistake/assembled incorrectly.
 No original KTR components (purchased parts) are used.
 Old/already worn out sleeves or sleeves stored for too long are used.
 : The coupling used/the coupling protection used is not suitable for the operation in hazardous locations
and does not correspond to EU directive 2014/34/EU, respectively.
 Maintenance intervals are not observed.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 14 of 21
Edition: 15
Hazard notes for

Breakdowns Causes Elimination
hazardous locations
1) Set the unit out of operation
2) Eliminate the reason for the misalignment
Micro friction by faulty
(e. g. loose foundation bolts, breaking of the
alignment on the
engine mount, heat expansion of unit
spline of the nylon
components, modification of the installation
Different operating sleeve
Danger of ignition due to dimension E of the coupling)
noise and/or
hot surfaces 3) For inspection of wear see item inspection
vibrations occuring
Screws for axial 2) Inspect alignment of coupling
fastening of hubs 3) Tighten the screws to fasten the hubs and
working loose secure against working loose
4) For inspection of wear see item inspection
2) Disassemble the coupling and remove
Breaking of the nylon remainders of the nylon sleeve
sleeve/spline due to 3) Inspect coupling components and replace
high shock coupling components that are damaged
energy/overload 4) Insert nylon sleeve, assemble coupling
components
5) Find out the reason for overload
Operating parameters
2) Review the operating parameters and select
Breaking of the nylon do not meet with the
none a bigger coupling (consider mounting space)
sleeve/spline performance of the
3) Assemble new coupling size
coupling
4) Inspect alignment
remainders of the nylon sleeve
Operating error of the 3) Inspect coupling components and replace
unit coupling components that are damaged
4) Insert nylon sleeve, assemble coupling
components
5) Instruct and train the service staff
3) Inspect coupling components and replace
Vibrations of drive coupling components that are damaged
components
5) Inspect alignment, adjust if necessary
6) Find out the reason for vibrations
Excessive wear on Danger of ignition due to
the spline of sleeve hot surfaces
ambient/contact
temperatures which
3) Inspect coupling components and replace
are too high for the
coupling components that are damaged
sleeve, max.
permissible
components
e. g. T4 =
5) Inspect alignment, adjust if necessary
- 30 °C/+ 100 °C
6) Inspect and adjust ambient/contact
temperature

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 15 of 21
Edition: 15
Hazard notes for

Breakdowns Causes Elimination
hazardous locations
e. g. contact with 2) Disassemble the coupling and remove
aggressive liquids/oils, remainders of the nylon sleeve
ozone influence, too 3) Inspect coupling components and replace
Excessive wear on high/low ambient coupling components that are damaged
none
the spline of sleeve temperatures etc. 4) Insert nylon sleeve, assemble coupling
causing a physical components
modification of the 5) Inspect alignment, adjust if necessary
nylon sleeve 6) Make sure that further physical
modifications of the sleeve are excluded
If you operate with a worn sleeve (see chapter 9.3 and 9.4) a proper operation meeting the
explosion protection requirements and the directive 2014/34/EU is not ensured.
7 Disposal
In respect of environmental protection we would ask you to dispose of the packaging or products on termination of
their service life in accordance with the legal regulations and standards that apply, respectively.
 Metal
Any metal components have to be cleaned and disposed of by scrap metal.
 Nylon materials
Nylon materials have to be collected and disposed of by a waste disposal company.
8 Spares inventory, customer service addresses
A basic requirement to ensure the operational readiness of the coupling is a stock of the most important spare
parts on site.
Contact addresses of the KTR partners for spare parts and orders can be obtained from the KTR homepage at
www.ktr.com.

KTR does not assume any liability or warranty for the use of spare parts and accessories
which are not provided by KTR and for the damages which may incur as a result.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 16 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
Advice and instructions regarding the use in hazardous locations

®
Enclosure A only valid for BoWex M coupling.
9.1 Intended use in hazardous locations
Conditions of operation in hazardous locations

®
BoWex couplings are suitable for the use according to EU directive 2014/34/EU.
1. Industry (with the exception of mining)

 Equipment group II of category 2 and 3 (coupling is not approved for equipment group 1)
 Media class G (gases, fogs, steams), zone 1 and 2 (coupling is not approved for zone 0)
 Media class D (dusts), zone 21 and 22 (coupling is not approved for zone 20)
 Explosion group IIC (explosion class IIA and IIB are included in IIC)
Temperature class:
Standard sleeve „light“ Conductive sleeve „black“
Temperature class Ambient or operating Max. surface Ambient or operating Max. surface
temperature Ta temperature temperature Ta temperature
1) 2) 1) 2)
T4, T3, T2, T1 - 30 °C to + 90 °C + 120 °C - 30 °C to + 100 °C + 120 °C
T5 - 30 °C to + 70 °C + 100 °C - 30 °C to + 80 °C + 100 °C
T6 - 30 °C to + 55 °C + 85 °C - 30 °C to + 65 °C + 85 °C
Explanation:
The maximum surface temperatures result from each the maximum permissible ambient or operating temperature T a plus the maximum
temperature increase T of 30 K (standard sleeve “light”) and T of 20 K (conductive sleeve “black”) which has to be taken into account.
1) The ambient or operating temperature Ta is limited to + 90 °C (standard sleeve “light”) and + 100 °C (conductive sleeve “black”) due to the
permissible permanent operating temperature of the BoWex® sleeves used.
2) The maximum surface temperature of + 120 °C applies for the use in locations which are potentially subject to dust explosion, too.
2. Mining
Equipment group I of category M2 (coupling is not approved for equipment group M1).
Permissible ambient temperature - 30 °C to + 90 °C (standard sleeve “light”) and - 30 °C to + 100 °C (conductive
sleeve “black”) respectively.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 17 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
9.2 Inspection intervals for couplings in hazardous locations
Explosion group Inspection intervals

For couplings which are classified in category 3G or 3D the operating and assembly instructions that
are usual for standard operation apply. During the standard operation which has to be subject to the
3G ignition risk analysis the couplings are free from any ignition source. Merely the temperature increase
3D produced by self-heating and depending on the coupling type has to be considered:
for BoWex : T = 30 K (standard sleeve „light“)
®
for BoWex : T = 20 K (conductive sleeve „black“)

®
The torsional backlash of the coupling (see chapter 9.3 and 9.4) according to directive 2014/34/EU
only has to be inspected if a failure of the coupling and consequently a standstill of the drive causes
danger of explosion.
We recommend a preventing inspection of circumferential backlash and visual inspection of the
sleeve. This should be performed after 3,000 operating hours for the first time, at the latest after 6
II 2GD c IIB months after start-up of the coupling.
T4, T5, T6 If you note insignificant or no wear on the sleeve upon this initial inspection, further inspections can
each be performed after 6,000 operating hours or at the latest after 18 months, provided that the
operating parameters remain the same.
If you note significant wear during the initial inspection so that it would be recommendable to replace
the sleeve, please find out the cause according to the table „Breakdowns“, if possible.
The maintenance intervals must be adjusted to the modified operating parameters without fail.
The torsional backlash of the coupling (see chapter 9.3 and 9.4) according to directive 2014/34/EU
only has to be inspected if a failure of the coupling and consequently a standstill of the drive causes
danger of explosion.
We recommend a preventing inspection of circumferential backlash and visual inspection of the
sleeve. This should be performed after 2,000 operating hours for the first time, at the latest after 3
II 2GD c IIC months after start-up of the coupling.
T4, T5, T6 If you note insignificant or no wear on the sleeve upon this initial inspection, further inspections can
each be performed after 4,000 operating hours or at the latest after 12 months, provided that the
operating parameters remain the same.
If you note significant wear during the initial inspection so that it would be recommendable to replace
the sleeve, please find out the cause according to the table „Breakdowns“, if possible.
The maintenance intervals must be adjusted to the modified operating parameters without fail.
®
BoWex coupling
Here the backlash between the hub and the

nylon spline must be inspected via torsional
backlash, each separately from the driving and
the driven side.
The friction/wear may only be Xmax. of the
original spline thickness before the nylon
sleeves must be replaced.
When reaching the torsional backlash Smax.,
the nylon sleeve must be replaced
immediately, irrespective of the inspection
Illustration 12: BoWex® coupling intervals.

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 18 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
9.3 Checking of torsional backlash
To check the torsional backlash the power pack which is switched off needs to be secured
! against accidental switch-on.
Driving side
 Turn the hub opposite the direction of drive.
Here the sleeve must not be axially displaced from its position of wear.
!
 Mark sleeve and hub (see Illustration 13).
 Turn the hub in the direction of drive and measure the torsional backlash Smax.
 When reaching the torsional backlash Smax. the nylon sleeve must be replaced.
Driven side
 Turn the hub in the direction of the drive.
Here the sleeve must not be axially displaced from its position of wear.
!
 Mark sleeve and hub (see Illustration 13).
 Turn the hub in opposite direction to the direction of drive and measure the torsional backlash Smax.
 When reaching the torsional backlash Smax. the nylon sleeve must be replaced.
Illustration 13: Marking of the sleeve and the hub

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 19 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
9.4 Standard values of wear
If the torsional backlash is  Smax. [mm] / friction  Xmax. [mm], the nylon sleeves must be replaced.
Reaching the limits for replacing depends on the operating conditions and the existing operating parameters.
In order to ensure a long service life of the coupling and avoid dangers with the use in
! hazardous locations, the shaft ends must be accurately aligned.
Please absolutely observe the displacement figures specified (see tables 6 and 7). If the
figures are exceeded, the coupling will be damaged.
Illustration 14: Sleeve in new condition Illustration 15: Wear of sleeve
Table 8:
Limits of wear each hub Limits of wear each hub
® Torsional ® Torsional
BoWex size Friction BoWex size Friction
backlash Smax. backlash Smax.
Xmax. [mm] Xmax. [mm]
[mm] [mm]
14 0.8 1.3 45 1.0 1.8
19 0.8 1.4 48 1.0 1.8
24 1.0 1.5 65 1.4 2.5
28 1.0 1.6 80 1.6 2.7
32 1.0 1.7 100 1.8 3.1
38 1.0 1.7 125 2.0 3.5
42 1.0 1.7
9.5 Permissible coupling materials in hazardous locations
Explosion group Permissible coupling materials / size

®
IIB BoWex M14 to M65 with sleeve material PA (light)
®
BoWex M14 to M19 with sleeve material PA (light)
IIC ®
BoWex M14 to M65 with sleeve material PA12CF15 (black)
In the explosion groups IIB and IIC the following materials may be combined:
Steel
Stainless steel

KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 20 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
9.6 marking of coupling for hazardous locations

®
The ATEX marking of the BoWex curved-tooth gear coupling is applied on the nylon sleeve.
 up to BoWex M32-C on the outer sheath with
®
logo only
 from BoWex M38-C on the front
®
Short labelling:
II 2GD c IIC T X/I M2 c X
(standard)
Complete labelling: II 2G c IIC T6, T5 resp. T4

- 30 °C  Ta  + 65 °C, + 80 °C resp. + 100 °C
II 2D c T 120 °C - 30 °C  Ta  + 100 °C
I M2 c - 30 °C  Ta  + 100 °C
The labelling with explosion group llC includes the explosion group llB.

CE declarations / Manufacturer declarations for the machine and/or accessories can be found on the
following pages.
09.01.13 ST4 Rev. 01 Page 1/1

Page 1
Date 13.06.2019
EC - Declaration of conformity 2006/42/EC
The manufacturer SPX Flow Technology Germany GmbH

Werkstraße 4
D - 22844 Norderstedt
hereby declares that the machinery described below is complying with all essential requirements of
the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
In addition the machinery is in conformity with the EC Directives 2014/35/EU relating to electrical
equipment and 2014/30/EU relating to electromagnetic compatibility, as far as the scope of
delivery is applicable.
Equipment NOVADOS H2
Serial No. 12001224
Job No. 0002838758.000010
Directive 2006/42/EC : EU-Machinery directive
Applied harmonised standards and national technical specifications, in particular:
EN ISO 12100, EN 809

EN 60204 =acc. to scope of supply
EC Declaration of conformity 2014/34/EU
The manufacturer hereby declares that the design of the above equipment complies with the
requirements of Directive 2014/34/EU when used as directed.
Directive 2014/34/EU : Equipment and protective systems intended for the use in
potentially explosives atmospheres
Applied harmonised standards and national technical specifications, in particular:

DIN EN 1127-1, EN 13463-1, EN 13463-5
II3G c IIC T3
The person authorised to compile the relevant technical documentation :

Mr. Uwe Schade
SPX Flow Technology Germany GmbH
Werkstraße 4, D - 22844 Norderstedt
Signed Uwe Schade CE-Representative Date: 13.06.2019

SIEMENS
EG-Konformitätserklärung
664.30005.21
Hersteller: Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Standard Drives
Anschrift: 91056 Erlangen

Deutschland
Produktbezeichnung: Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren für explosionsgefährdete Bereiche

Zündschutzart "n"
Gruppe II, Kategorie 3G, { Zone 2 ),
Temperaturklasse T1, T2 oder T3
Motortyp: 1LA7 ... , Baugröße 56 M ... 160 L

1LA9 ... -.KA. Baugröße 56 M ... 160 L
1LA6 ... , Baugröße 100 L ... 160 L
1LG4 ... , 1LG6 ... , Baugröße 180M ... 315 L
Die Kennzeichnung des Motors muss die folgenden Angaben enthalten:
@ II 3G EEx nA II T1, T2 oder T3
Das bezeichnete Produkt stimmt mit den Vorschriften folgender Europäischer Richtlinie überein:
94/9/EG Richtlinie des Europäischen Parlaments und des Rates zur Angleichung der
Rechtsvorschriften der Mitgliedstaaten für Geräte und Schutzsysteme zur
bestimmungsgemäßen Verwendung in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen
Die Übereinstimmung mit den Vorschriften dieser Richtlinie wird nachgewiesen durch die vollständige
Einhaltung folgender Normen:
EN 60034 EN 50021
EN 60204-1 EN 50014
Das bezeichnete Produkt ist zum Einbau in eine andere Maschine bestimmt. Die Inbetriebnahme ist solange
untersagt, bis die Konformität des Endproduktes mit der Richtlinie 98/37/EG festgestellt ist.
Erstausgabe: 02.01.2002
Bad Neustadt, den 14.01.2003
. t'·<. . .{f~ .
D~:·~·otors
Leiter Research and
·
. . . . . . . -//-
/.: ..... : .......
·,/ ~··
~ ...:.............................................. .
H.-J. Friese
Leiter Quality Management
Diese Erklärung ist keine Zusicherung von Eigenschaften im Sinne der Produkthaftung.
Die Sicherheitshinweise der Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten.
1.664.30005.21.000
EC declaration of conformity ENGLISH
The named product is in conformity with the requirements of the following European Directive:
94/9/EC Directive of the European Parliament and the council an the approximation of the laws of the Member States concerning equipment and
proteelive systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres
Conformity with the requirements of these Directives is testified by complete adherence to the following standards:
The named product is intended for fitting in analher machine. Commissioning is prohibited until such time as the end product has been proved to conform to
the provisions of Directive 98/37/EC
This Declaration does not give assurance of properlies within the meaning of product liability. The safety instructions provided in the product
documentation must be observed.
Declaration de conformite CE FRANCAIS
Le produit sus-mentionne est conforme aux prescriptions des Directives Europeennes suivantes :
94/9/CE Directive du Parlement Europeem et du conseil concernant le rapprochement des legislations des etats membres pour les appareils et les
systemes de protection destines a etre utilises en atmospheres explosibles
La conformite du produit sus-mentionne aux prescriptions de ces directives est demontree par sa conformite integrale aux normes suivantes :
Le produit sus-mentionne est destine exclusivement a l'incorporation dans une autre machine. La mise en service est proscrite tant que Ia conformite du
produit final avec Ia Directive 98/37/CE n'a pas ete constatee .
La presente declaration ne constitue pas une garantie de propriete au sens de Ia Iai sur Ia responsabilite du fait du produit.
Declaraci6n de conformidad CE ESPANOL
EI producto designado cumple con las prescripciones de las siguientes directivas europeas:
94/9/CE
La conformidad con las prescripciones de estas Directivas queda justificada por haberse cumplido totalmente las siguientes normas:
EI producto designado esta destinado a Ia incorporaci6n en otra maquina. No se permite Ia puesta en servicio hasta tanto no se haya comprobado que el
producto final cumple con Ia Directiva 98/37/CE .
Esta declaraci6n no garantiza caracteristicas segun Ia responsabilidad sobre productos.

Han de observarse las indicaciones de seguridad en Ia documentaci6n del producto.
Dichiarazione di conformitä CE ITALIANO
II prodotto indicato soddisfa le norme delle seguenti Direttive CEE:

94/9/CE
La conformita ai requisiti delle presenti direttive viene provata dal completo rispetto delle seguenti norme:
II prodotto indicato e destinato ad essere integrato in un'altra macchina. Ai sensi della dichiarazione del costruttore Ia messa in servizio non e consentita fino a
quando non e stabilita Ia conformita del prodotto finale alla Direttiva 98/37/CE.
La presente dichiarazione non assicura le caratteristiche del prodotto ai sensi della legge per Ia responsabilila del produttore. Osservare le avvertenze relative
alla sicurezza contenute nella documentazione relativa al prodotto.
EG-konformitetsförklaring SVENSKA
Den märkta produkten överensstämmer med föreskrifterna i följande europeiska direktiv:

94/9/EC .................... .
Överensstämmelse med föreskrifterna i dessa direktiv styrks genom det absoluta respekterandet av följande normer:
Den märkta produkten är ägnad att manieras i en annan maskin. ldrifttagandet är ej tillätet innan ändproduktens konformitet med direktiv 98/37/EC är fastställd
Denna deklaration fär inte uppfattas som försäkran om egenskaper enligt krav i produktansvar. Laktta säkerhetsanvisningarna i den medlevererade
produktdokumentationen.
664.30005.21 Seite 2
SIEMENS
Konformitätserklärung
664.30006.21
Hersteller: Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Standard Drives
Anschrift: 91056 Erlangen

Deutschland
Produktbezeichnung: Drehstrom-Asynchronmotoren für explosionsgefährdete Bereiche

Zündschutzart "n" (Zone 2)
Temperaturklasse T1, T2 oder T3
Motortyp: 1LA7 ... , Baugröße 56 M ... 160 L

1LA9 ... -.KA. Baugröße 56 M ... 160 L
1LAS ... , Baugröße 100 L ... 160 L
1LG4 ... , 1LG6 ... , Baugröße 180M ... 315 L
Die Kennzeichnung des Motors muss die folgenden Angaben enthalten:
Ex nA II T1, T2 oder T3
Das bezeichnete Produkt entspricht der Zündschutzart "n" nach:
IEC 60079-15 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres

Part 15: Type of protection "n"
Die Konformität des Produktes wird nachgewiesen durch die vollständige Einhaltung folgender Normen:
IEC 60079-15 IEC 60079-0 IEC 60034 IEC 60204-1
Das bezeichnete Produkt ist zum Einbau in eine andere Maschine bestimmt.
___ _____.
~:/
----------
ig
.~.":.!.:-........ ~~-~~---·····························
H.-J. Friese
Leiter Research and Development Motors Leiter Quality Management
Diese Erklärung ist keine Zusicherung von Eigenschaften im Sinne der Produkthaftung.
Die Sicherheitshinweise der Produktdokumentation sind zu beachten.
1.664.30006.21.000
declaration of conformity ENGLISH
The named product is in conformity with the requirements of the following Directive:
IEC 60079-15 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres. Part 15: Type of protection "n"
Conformity with the requirements of these Directives is testified by complete adherence to the following standards:
The named product is intended for fitting in analher machine.
This Declaration does not give assurance of properties within the meaning of product liability. The safety instructions provided in the product documentation
must be observed.
Declaration de conformite FRANI;AIS
Le produit sus-mentionne est conforme aux prescriptions des Directives suivante:

IEC 60079-15 Materiet electrique pour atmospheres explosives gazeuses -Partie 15: Mode de protection .,n"
La conformite du produit sus-mentionne aux prescriptions de ces directives est demontree par sa conformite integrale aux normes suivantes :
Le produit sus-mentionne est destine exclusivement ä l'inccrporation dans une autre machine.
La presente declaration ne constitue pas une garantie de propriete au sens de Ia loi sur Ia responsabilite du fait du produit.
Declaraci6n de conformidad ESPANOL
EI producto designado cumple con las prescripciones de las siguientes directivas :

IEC 60079-15
La conformidad con las prescripciones de estas Directivas queda justificada por haberse cumplido totalmenie las siguientes normas:
EI producto designado estä destinado a Ia incorporaci6n en otra mäquina.
Esta declaraci6n no garantiza caracteristicas segün Ia responsabilidad sobre productos.

Han de observarse las indicaciones de seguridad en Ia documentaci6n del producto.
Dichiarazione di conformita ITALIANO
II prodotto indicato soddisfa le norme delle seguenti Direttive :

IEC 60079-15
La conformita ai requisiti delle presenti direttive viene provata dal completo rispetto delle seguenti norme:
II prodotto indicato e destinato ad essere integrale in un'altra macchina
La presente dichiarazione non assicura le caratteristiche del prodotto ai sensi della !egge per Ia responsabilila del produttore. Osservare le avvertenze relative alla
sicurezza contenute nella documentazione relativa al prodotto.
EG-konform itetsförklari ng SVENSKA
Den märkta produkten överensstämmer med föreskrifterna i följande direktiv:

IEC 60079-15
Överensstämmelse med föreskrifterna i dessa direktiv styrks genom det absoluta respekterandet av följande normer:
Den märkta produkten är ägnad att monteras i en annan maskin.
Denna deklaration fär inte uppfattas som försäkran om egenskaper enligt krav i produktansvar. Laktta säkerhetsanvisningarna i den medlevererade
produktdokumentationen.
664.30006.21 Seite 2
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION
IEC Certification Scheme for Explosive Atmospheres
for rules and details of the IECEx Scheme visit www.iecex.com
Certificate No.: IECEx CSA 07.0008 Issue No: 11 Certificate history:

Issue No. 11 (2016-11-08)
Status: Current Page 1 of 4 Issue No. 10 (2015-10-11)
Issue No. 9 (2014-05-23)
Date of Issue: 2016-11-08 Issue No. 8 (2014-04-10)
Issue No. 7 (2013-08-30)
Applicant: Yokogawa Electric Corporation Issue No. 6 (2011-09-30)
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi Issue No. 5 (2011-03-22)
Tokyo 180-8750 Issue No. 4 (2010-06-22)
Japan Issue No. 3 (2010-03-10)
Issue No. 2 (2009-01-08)
Equipment: EJX, EJA***E, and EJA***J Series Pressure Transmitter Issue No. 1 (2008-12-18)
Optional accessory:
Type of Protection: Ex d
Marking: Ex d IIC T6 Gb Tamb 75°C IP66/IP67;

Ex d IIC T5 Gb Tamb 80°C IP66 /IP67;
Ex d IIC T4 Gb Tamb 75°C IP66/IP67
Approved for issue on behalf of the IECEx Dorin Stochitoiu, P.Eng

Certification Body:
Position: Technical Advisor
Signature:
(for printed version)
Date:
November 8, 2016
1. This certificate and schedule may only be reproduced in full.

2. This certificate is not transferable and remains the property of the issuing body.
3. The Status and authenticity of this certificate may be verified by visiting the Official IECEx Website.
Certificate issued by:

CSA Group
178 Rexdale Boulevard
Toronto, Ontario M9W IR3
Canada
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Certificate No: IECEx CSA 07.0008 Issue No: 11
Date of Issue: 2016-11-08 Page 2 of 4
Manufacturer: Yokogawa Electric Corporation

2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi
Tokyo 180-8750
JAPAN
Japan
Additional Manufacturing location(s):

Yokogawa Corporation of Yokogawa India Limited Yokogawa Manufacturing Yokogawa Electric Asia Yokogawa Middle East
America Plot No.96, Electronic City Corporation Kofu Factory Pte. Ltd. B.S.C(c)
2 Dart Road Complex, Hosur Road, 155 Takamuro-cho, Kofu- 5 Bedok South Road P.O. Box 10070, Manama
Newnan, GA 30265 Bangalore – 560 100 shi Singapore 469270 Building No.577,
United States of America India Yamanashi-ken, 400-8558 Singapore Road 2516, Busaiteen
Japan 225, Muharraq
Bahrain
This certificate is issued as verification that a sample(s), representative of production, was assessed and tested and found to comply with the
IEC Standard list below and that the manufacturer's quality system, relating to the Ex products covered by this certificate, was assessed and
found to comply with the IECEx Quality system requirements. This certificate is granted subject to the conditions as set out in IECEx
Scheme Rules, IECEx 02 and Operational Documents as amended.
STANDARDS:
The electrical apparatus and any acceptable variations to it specified in the schedule of this certificate and the identified documents, was
found to comply with the following standards:
IEC 60079-0 : 2011 Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: General requirements

Edition:6.0
IEC 60079-1 : 2007-04 Explosive atmospheres - Part 1: Equipment protection by flameproof enclosures "d"
Edition:6
This Certificate does not indicate compliance with electrical safety and performance requirements other than those expressly included in the
Standards listed above.
TEST & ASSESSMENT REPORTS:

A sample(s) of the equipment listed has successfully met the examination and test requirements as recorded in
Test Report:
CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/00 CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/01 CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/02

CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/03 CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/04 CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/05
CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/06 CA/CSA/ExTR07.0015/07
Quality Assessment Report:
NL/DEK/QAR11.0022/05 NL/DEK/QAR11.0026/05 NL/DEK/QAR11.0071/05

NL/DEK/QAR14.0009/03 NL/DEK/QAR11.0025/03 NL/DEK/QAR16.0011/00
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
Schedule
EQUIPMENT:
Equipment and systems covered by this certificate are as follows:
The EJX series are electronic transmitters which convert differential pressure, gauge pressure or absolute pressure into 4 to 20mA dc
output signal or a digital output signal.The different types of measuring functionalities are made through different arrangements of
process connection and transfer of actual “process pressure” to the internal of the sensor assembly.All these arrangements are made
outside the actual flameproof enclosure, therefore not relevant for the flameproof construction itself. The flame proof enclosure
consists of the housing assembly and capsule assembly. The housing assembly consists of the terminal compartment with provisions
for the connection of external wiring, and the amplifier compartment where the electronic circuitry is mounted. There are 2 threaded
conduit entries to fulfill wiring needsThe capsule assembly is the sensor capillary system, a silicon oil filled system of small pin holes
and “chambers”.
Ex d IIC T6 Gb Tamb 75°C IP66/IP67; Ex d IIC T5 Gb Tamb 80°C IP66 /IP67; Ex d IIC T4 Gb Tamb 75°C IP66/IP67
Max. Process Temp Max. Tamb Temperature Code
85°C 75°C T6 (85°C)
100°C 80°C T5 (l00°C)
120°C 75°C T4 (135°C)
Power Supply: 42Vdc Max or 32Vdc Max. (Fieldbus Type); 9 to 30 Vdc, 250mW (RS485 Modbus Type), 9 to 28Vdc, 27mW (Low-
Power Type) 7.14Vdc Max (Slave Module Type
Output Signal: 4 to 20mA dc or 15mAdc (Fieldbus Type); Modbus (RS485 Modbus Type), 1 to 5 Vdc (Low-Power Type)
Unused cable entries are factory fitted with a blanking plug that has been tested as part of the equipment.
Some of Yokogawa's plugs are referenced by unique identified marking of ‘EX’.
CONDITIONS OF CERTIFICATION: NO
IECEx Certificate
of Conformity
DETAILS OF CERTIFICATE CHANGES (for issues 1 and above):
1. Addition of new model

2. Correction of ambient temperature to 75°C
3. Addition of -J in model code
4. Addition of a single compartment style of enclosure
5. Addition of clarification statement
6. Addition of the alternative model name "EJA"; Deletion of MWP;
Modification of model codes (Bracket E and J in b=output signal); Addition of alternative external earth
terminal;
7. Update of applicable standards to the latest applicable standard edition; addition of power supply and output
signal; update of product codes; addition of alternative material.
8. Revision of name of "Modbus type". Revision specification of "Low Power".
Revised "Low Power" specification useful for both 3-wire and 4-wire with 3-wire terminal. Revision name of
Integral indicator. Revise terminal block to reflect new "Low Power" specification. Revise block diagram to
reflect new "Low Power" specification. Revision Installation Documents. Editorial Document Changes
9. Depth of NPT thread, plug shape, and addition of fastener information.
Addition of restriction on the usage of titanium. Addition of changeable area of diagram structure.
10. Addition of Model types, alternate construction.
11. Addition of new manufacturing location in Bangalore, India
KTR-N 40110 EN
BoWex®
Sheet: 21 of 21
Edition: 15
9 Enclosure A
9.7 EU Certificate of conformity
EU Certificate of conformity
corresponding to EU directive 2014/34/EU dated 26 February 2014
and to the legal regulations
The manufacturer - KTR Systems GmbH, D-48432 Rheine - states that the
BoWex® curved-tooth gear couplings

in an explosion-proof design described in these operating/assembly instructions are devices
corresponding to article 2, 1. of directive 2014/34/EU and comply with the general safety and health
requirements according to enclosure II of directive 2014/34/EU.
The coupling described in here complies with the specifications of the following standards/guidelines:
DIN EN 1127-1
DIN EN 1127-2
DIN EN 13463-1
DIN EN 13463-5
®
The BoWex is in accordance with the specifications of the directive 2014/34/EU. One or several
directives mentioned in the corresponding type examination certificate IBExU13ATEXB007 X were in
part replaced by updated versions.
KTR Systems GmbH being the manufacturer confirms that the product mentioned above is in
accordance with the specifications of the new directives, too.
According to article 13 (1) b) ii) of directive 2014/34/EU the technical documentation is deposited with
the institution:
IBExU
Institut für Sicherheitstechnik GmbH
Fuchsmühlenweg 7
09599 Freiberg
Rheine, 2017-01-02 i. V. i. A.
Place Date Reinhard Wibbeling Andreas Hücker
Engineering/R&D Product Manager


Spxflow PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Spxflow PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

OPERATION MANUAL

1.0 Structure, Assignment, Marking, Ordering of Spare

Structure of the user manual

In some sections of 3 "Components", 4 “Installation” and 5 “Operation” a sequential numbering

18.01.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 1/2

Assignment of the user manual

The marking on the pump refers only to the pump part.

Ordering of spare parts

18.01.13 ST4 Rev. 02 Page 2/2

1.1 Safety instructions

In case of incorrect operation or misuse there is a risk of danger to

• life and limb of the operator,

Your safety is at stake!

The following symbols are used in this user manual:

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 1/8

Designates an imminent danger. In case of non-observance of this

Designates both general hazards and hazards in an Ex area.

Designates important user tips and other useful information.

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 2/8

Do not use this pump as

• a generator, i.e. pressurised liquid is not allowed to drive the motor

• a device for cooling liquids

• a pulsator without a pressure valve

• a compressor for gases

Unauthorised modifications to the pump are prohibited for safety reasons!

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 3/8

The sound emission of metering pumps is not

1 L (A) = max. sound pressure level at 1 m distance

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 4/8

Pumps must never be allowed to work against a closed fitting!

Install a safety valve in the pressure line before the fitting.

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 5/8

Personal Protective Equipment

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 6/8

Safety Measures at the Installation Location

Place the pump on a level, stress-free foundation or frame.

Wear protective clothing when operating the pump.

EMERGENCY-OFF switches are not included in the

The EMERGENCY-OFF switches should be readily accessible and clearly visible.

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 7/8

Behaviour in case of emergency

• In case of fires, use only suitable fire-extinguishing agents.

• Rectify the fault.

17.01.13 ST4 Rev. 08 Page 8/8

1.1.1 Information sheet for the safe operation of metering and

1. General remarks .................................................................................................. 2

2. Minimizing risks due to hot surfaces or sparks forming on

3. Minimizing risks due to electrostatic charging/spark and brushing

4. Minimizing risks during and caused by servicing, repairs,

5. Operation in areas in which the presence of a cloud of

30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 1/9

If you find it difficult or impossible (e.g. special manufacturing processes or inaccessible

30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 2/9

2. Minimizing risks due to hot surfaces or sparks forming on

2.1 Installation and Start-up

• A reciprocating positive displacement pump must User manual

• Install a safety valve in the pressure line in the User manual

This is particularly applicable to the use of plunger pumps!

• Ensure there is adequate ventilation of the pump User manual

Read the detailed instructions for installation and start-up in Chapters 4

30.01.14 ST4 Rev. 04 Page 3/9

2.2 Intended operation

• Oil level User manual